2006 Accord

05/10/03 19:27:04 32SEA630_001
This Owner’s Manual should be considered a permanent part of the car, and should remain with the car when it is sold.
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of the Accord/Accord Euro. You may find descriptions of equipment and
features that are not on your particular model.
The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing.
Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
Although this manual is applicable to both right-hand and left-hand drive models, the illustrations contained in this
manual mainly refer to the left-hand drive models.
The illustrations of vehicles with diesel engine are noted by Diesel model.
Symbols on labels attached to your car are to remind you to read this Owner’s Manual for proper and safe
operation of your car.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

05/10/03 19:27:11 32SEA630_002
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a Honda Accord/Accord Euro was a wise As you read this manual, you will
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This informa-
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new car is to read tion is intended to help you avoid
this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and damage to your car, other property,
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so you or the environment.
can refer to it at any time.
(On German type)
Several other booklets explain the warranties that protect your new car. 1. Mounting the front licence plate:
Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and Mount the front licence plate to
are aware of your rights and responsibilities. the provided holder taking care
that the upper edge of the licence
Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual or the plate does not project above the
separate service information booklet helps to keep your driving trouble-free upper surface of the bumper.
while it preserves your investment. When your car needs maintenance, keep
in mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many 2. Mounting the rear licence plate:
systems unique to your car. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and Mount the rear licence plate to the
will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns. back of the car so that its lower
edge is flush with the lower end of
Best wishes and happy motoring. the surface provided for mounting.

05/10/03 19:27:21 32SEA630_003
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, includ-
is very important. And operating this ing:
car safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Labels − on the car.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed deci- three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
sions about safety, we have provided These signal words mean:
operating procedures and other infor-
mation on labels and in this manual. You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
This information alerts you to poten- HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
tial hazards that could hurt you or
others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or possi-
ble to warn you about all the hazards You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your car. You must use
your own good judgement. Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this car correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
ii

05/10/03 19:27:34 32SEA630_004
Contents
Turn to the beginning of each section for a complete list of subjects.
Your Car at a Glance ................ 2 Before Driving .................... 349 Taking Care of the
What fuel to use, how to break-in Unexpected ........................ 503
Driver and Passenger Safety ..... 7 your new car, and how to load This section covers several
Important information about the luggage and other cargo. problems motorists sometimes
proper use and care of your car’s experience, and details how to
seat belts, an overview of the Driving ............................... 367 handle them.
Supplemental Restraint System, The proper way to start the engine,
and valuable information on how shift the transmission, and park; Technical Information.......... 543
to protect children with child plus what you need to know if ID numbers, dimensions, capaci-
restraints. you’re planning to tow a trailer. ties, and technical information.
Instruments and Controls ...... 77 Maintenance ....................... 405 Index ................................. 557
Explains the purpose of each The Maintenance Schedule shows
instrument panel indicator and you when you need to take your
gauge, and how to use the controls car to the dealer. There is also a
on the dashboard and steering list of things to check and instruc-
column. tions on how to check them.
Comfort and Convenience Appearance Care ................. 495

Features ............................. 175 Tips on cleaning and protecting
How to operate the climate control your car.
system, the audio system, and
other convenience features.

05/10/03 19:27:40 32SEA630_005
Your Car at a Glance
Left-hand drive type

INSTRUMENT PANEL HAZARD WARNING AUDIO SYSTEM (P.195)
(P.80, 81, 82) BUTTON DIGITAL CLOCK (P.210, 232, 256, 281)
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.128)
(P.162)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK (P.176)
MASTER SWITCH
(P.134)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.155)
FUEL FILL DOOR HANDLE

(P.352)
BOOT RELEASE HANDLE
(P.141) BONNET RELEASE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P.378)
HANDLE 5-SPEED MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.372)
(P.354) 6-SPEED MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.374)

05/10/05 15:24:09 32SEA630_006

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS WINDSCREEN WIPERS (P.123)
(P.122) WINDSCREEN WASHERS (P.127)
HEADLIGHTS/
REAR FOG LAMP/ HAZARD WARNING
FRONT FOG LAMPS/ BUTTON
TURN SIGNALS (P.128)
(P.116/118/119/122)
REAR WINDOW
DEMISTER
REMOTE AUDIO (P.127)
CONTROLS
(P.297)
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER
(P.154) CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.302)
VSA OFF SWITCH
(P.392) DISTANCE BUTTON
HORN＊ (P.315)
VOICE CONTROL HANDS-FREE
BUTTONS＊2 TELEPHONE TILT/TELESCOPIC MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS (P.93)
SYSTEM BUTTONS ADJUSTMENT
(P.331) (P.129)
＊1 : To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
＊2 : Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
3

05/10/03 19:27:53 32SEA630_007
Right-hand drive type
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON INSTRUMENT PANEL MIRROR CONTROLS

(P.128) (P.80, 81, 82) (P.162)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.195)
DIGITAL CLOCK POWER DOOR LOCK
(P.210, 232, 256, 281) MASTER SWITCH
(P.134)
POWER
CLIMATE CONTROL WINDOW
SYSTEM SWITCHES
(P.176) (P.155)

(P.352)
BOOT RELEASE HANDLE
(P.141)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P.378) BONNET RELEASE HANDLE
5-SPEED MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.372) (P.354)
6-SPEED MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.374)

05/10/03 19:28:02 32SEA630_008
Right-hand drive type HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE

SYSTEM BUTTONS INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
HAZARD WARNING (P.332) (P.122)
BUTTON
(P.128)
WINDSCREEN WIPERS＊1
(P.123)
WINDSCREEN WASHERS＊1
(P.127)
REAR WINDOW
DEMISTER
(P.127) CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.302)
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER
(P.154)
SUNROOF SWITCH＊3
(P.160)
VSA OFF SWITCH
(P.392)
HORN＊2 DISTANCE BUTTON (P.315)
MULTI-INFORMATION
HEADLIGHTS/REAR FOG LAMP/ BUTTONS (P.93)
FRONT FOG LAMPS/TURN SIGNALS＊1 REMOTE AUDIO VOICE TILT/TELESCOPIC
(P.116/118/119/122) CONTROLS CONTROL ADJUSTMENT
(P.297) BUTTONS＊4 (P.129) LKAS BUTTON (P.325)
＊1 : Except for European models, these switches change locations with each other.
＊3 : Australian model
5

05/10/03 19:28:04 32SEA630_009

05/10/03 19:28:08 32SEA630_010
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Using Child Restraints with
information about how to protect Position ................................. 21 Tethers...................................... 55
yourself and your passengers. It Advice for Pregnant Women...... 22 Using the Lower Anchorages .... 57
shows you how to use seat belts Additional Safety Precautions .... 23 Additional Information About Your
properly. It explains your Supple- Protecting Children ......................... 24 Seat Belts .................................. 61
mental Restraint System. And it tells All Children Must Be Seat Belt System Components ... 61
you how to properly restrain infants Restrained ................................ 25 Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 61
and children in your car. Children Should Sit in the Back Automatic Seat Belt
Seat ............................................ 25 Tensioners ................................ 63
The Passenger’s Front Airbag Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 64
Poses Serious Risks to Additional Information About
Children ................................ 26 Your Airbags ............................ 66
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 The Side Airbag Poses Serious SRS Components ......................... 66
Your Car’s Safety Features .............. 9 Risks to Children ..................... 29 How Your Front Airbags
Seat Belts ...................................... 10 If You Must Drive with Several Work.......................................... 66
Airbags .......................................... 12 Children .................................... 30 How Your Side Airbags
Seats and Seat-Backs................... 13 If a Child Requires Close Work.......................................... 68
Head Restraints ........................... 14 Attention ................................... 30 How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist ......... 14 Additional Safety Precautions .... 30 Work.......................................... 69
Protecting Adults ............................. 15 General Guidelines for Using How the SRS Indicator Works ... 70
1. Close the Doors ....................... 15 Child Restraint Systems ......... 31 How the Side Airbag Off
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 16 Child Restraint System for EU Indicator Works ....................... 71
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 17 Countries .................................. 37 Airbag Service .............................. 72
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 18 Protecting Infants ........................ 38 Additional Safety Precautions .... 72
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Protecting Small Children .......... 45 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 74
Belts ...................................... 19 Protecting Larger Children ........ 50 Safety Labels .................................... 75
Driver and Passenger Safety 7

05/10/03 19:28:18 32SEA630_011
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety restrained in a child restraint system Control Your Speed
recommendations throughout this (see page 24 ). Excessive speed is a major factor in
section, and throughout this manual. crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
The recommendations on this page Be Aware of Airbag Hazards the higher the speed the greater the
are the ones we consider to be the While airbags can save lives, they risk, but serious accidents can also
most important. can cause serious or fatal injuries to occur at lower speeds. Never drive
occupants who sit too close to them, faster than is safe for current
Always Wear Your Seat Belt or are not properly restrained. conditions, regardless of the
A seat belt is your best protection in Infants, young children, and short maximum speed posted.
all types of collisions. Airbags adults are at the greatest risk. Be
supplement seat belts, but front sure to follow all instructions and Keep Your Car in Safe Condition
airbags are designed to inflate only warnings in this manual (see page Having a tyre blowout or a
in a moderate to severe frontal 12 ). mechanical failure can be extremely
collision. Side airbags are designed hazardous. To reduce the possibility
to inflate only in a moderate to Don’t Drink and Drive of such problems, check your tyre
severe side impact. So even though Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even pressures and condition frequently,
your car is equipped with airbags, one drink can reduce your ability to and perform all regularly scheduled
make sure you and your passengers respond to changing conditions, and maintenance (see page 406 . For EU
always wear your seat belts, and your reaction time gets worse with countries, Australia and New
wear them properly (see page 19 ). every additional drink. So don’t drink Zealand see the separate service
and drive, and don’t let your friends information booklet).
Restrain All Children drink and drive, either.
Children are safest when they are
properly restrained in the back seat,
not the front seat. A child who is too
small for a seat belt must be properly
8 Driver and Passenger Safety

05/10/03 19:28:25 32SEA630_012
Your Car’s Safety Features
Your car is equipped with many

(4)
(1) (9) features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
(3) during a crash.
(8) (6) Some safety features do not require
any action on your part. These
(7) include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones that are designed to
(8) (2) crumple and absorb energy during a
crash; a collapsible steering column;
(7) (6) and seat belt tensioners that
(10) automatically tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
(5)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(2) (6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags＊
＊ : For some types (9) Side Curtain Airbags＊
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:28:33 32SEA630_013
These safety features are designed Seat Belts Not wearing a seat belt properly
to reduce the severity of injuries in a For your safety, and the safety of increases the chance of serious
crash. However, you and your your passengers, your car is injury or death in a crash, even
passengers can’t take full advantage equipped with seat belts in all seating though your car has airbags.
of these safety features unless you positions.
remain sitting in a proper position In most European Countries there is
and always wear your seat belts Your seat belt system also a law covering the use of seat belts.
properly. In fact, some safety includes an indicator on the Please take time to familiarize
features can contribute to injuries if instrument panel to remind you and yourself with the legal requirements
they are not used properly. your passengers to fasten your seat of the countries in which you will
belts. drive.
Why Wear Seat Belts

Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and Not wearing a seat belt
larger children. (Infants and smaller properly increases the
children must be properly restrained chance of serious injury or
in child restraint systems.) death in a crash, even if you
have airbags.
Be sure you and your

passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.

05/10/03 19:28:42 32SEA630_014
When properly worn, seat belts: Keep you from being thrown out WARNING:
of the car. Seat belts are designed to bear upon
Keep you connected to the car so the bony structure of the body, and
you can take advantage of the car’s Help keep you in a good position should be worn low across the front
built-in safety features. should the airbags ever deploy. A of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and
good position reduces the risk of shoulders, as applicable; wearing the
Help protect you in almost every injury from an inflating airbag, and lap section of the belt across the
type of crash, including frontal, allows you to get the best abdominal area must be avoided.
side, and rear impacts and advantage from the airbag.
rollovers. Seat belts should be adjusted as
Of course, seat belts cannot firmly as possible, consistent with
Help keep you from being thrown completely protect you in every comfort, to provide the protection for
against the inside of the car and crash. But in most cases, seat belts which they have been designed. A
against other occupants. can reduce your risk of serious slack belt will greatly reduce the
injury. protection afforded to the wearer.
What you should do: Always wear Belts should not be worn with straps
your seat belt, and make sure you twisted.
wear it properly.
Each belt assembly must only be used
by one occupant; it is dangerous to
put a belt around a child being carried
on the occupant’s lap.

05/10/03 19:28:50 32SEA630_015
Airbags
Your car has a Supplemental Only on models equipped with side Only on models equipped with side
Restraint System (SRS) with front airbags curtain airbags
airbags to help protect the heads and Your car also has side airbags to help Your car also has side curtain
chests of the driver and a front seat protect the upper torso of the driver airbags. During a moderate to severe
passenger during a moderate to or a front seat passenger during a side impact, side curtain airbags help
severe frontal collision. moderate to severe side impact. to protect the heads of the driver,
front seat passenger, and passengers
sitting in the outer rear seating
positions.

05/10/03 19:28:58 32SEA630_016
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear Seats and Seat-Backs
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit Your car’s seats are designed to keep
upright and as far back as possible you in a comfortable, upright
Airbags do not replace seat belts. from the steering wheel or position so you can take full
They are designed to supplement dashboard. advantage of the protection offered
the seat belts. by seat belts and the energy
absorbing materials in the seats.
Front airbags offer no protection
in side impacts, rear impacts, How you adjust your seats and seat-
rollovers, or minor frontal backs can also affect your safety. For
collisions. example, sitting too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard
Side airbags offer no protection in increases the risk of you or your
frontal collisions, rear impacts, passenger being injured by striking
rollovers, or minor side impacts. the inside of the car, or by an
inflating airbag.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
To do their job, airbags must Reclining a seat-back too far reduces
inflate with tremendous force and the seat belt’s effectiveness and
speed. So while airbags help save increases the chance that the seat’s
lives, they can cause minor injuries, occupant will slide under the seat
or more serious or even fatal belt in a crash and be seriously
injuries if occupants are not injured.
properly restrained or sitting
properly.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:29:08 32SEA630_017
What you should do: Move the front Pre-Drive Safety Checklist Head restraints are properly
seats as far back as possible, and To make sure you and your adjusted (see page 18 ).
keep adjustable seat-backs in an passengers get the maximum
upright position whenever the car is protection from your car’s safety All doors are closed (see page 15 ).
moving. features, check the following each
time before you drive away: All luggage is properly stored or
Head Restraints secured (see page 364 ).
Head restraints can help protect you All adults, and children who have
from whiplash and other injuries. For outgrown child restraint systems, The rest of this section gives more
maximum protection, the back of are wearing their seat belts and detailed information about how you
your head should rest against the wearing them properly (see page can maximize your safety.
centre of the head restraint. 19 ).
Remember, however, that no safety
Any infant or small child is system can prevent all injuries or
properly restrained in a child deaths that can occur in severe
restraint system in the back seat crashes, even when seat belts are
(see page 24 ). properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Front seat occupants are sitting

upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel and
dashboard (see page 16 ).
Seat-backs are upright (see page

17 ).

05/10/03 19:29:18 32SEA630_018
Protecting Adults
Introduction Your car has a door monitor

The following pages provide indicator on the multi-information
instructions on how to properly display to indicate when a specific
protect the driver and other adult door or the trunk is not tightly closed.
occupants. You will see the appropriate light/
lights and the message for each
These instructions also apply to condition.
children who have outgrown child
restraint systems and are large
enough to wear lap/shoulder belts
(see page 50 for important additional
guidelines on how to properly
protect larger children).
When the trunk is not tightly closed,
1.Close the Doors the above indicator will stay on.
After everyone has entered the car,
be sure the doors are closed.
Your car has a door

monitor light on the
instrument panel to indicate When one or more doors are not
when a specific door is not tightly tightly closed, the above indicator
closed. will stay on.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:29:26 32SEA630_019
Protecting Adults
Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats

chance of someone being thrown out
of the car during a crash, and it helps
prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent

an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
See page 134 for how to lock the

When both the trunk and one or doors.
more doors are not tightly closed, Any driver who sits too close to the
the above indicator will stay on. steering wheel is at risk of being
seriously injured or killed by striking
the steering wheel or from being
struck by an inflating front airbag
during a crash.

05/10/03 19:29:35 32SEA630_020
Protecting Adults
To reduce the chance of injury, wear 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

your seat belt properly, sit upright
with your back against the seat, and Sitting too close to a front
move the seat away from the airbag can result in serious
steering wheel to the farthest injury or death if the front
distance that allows you to maintain airbags inflate.
full control of the car.
Always sit as far back from
In addition to adjusting the seat, you the front airbags as possible.
can adjust the steering wheel in and
out (see page 129 ).
Most shorter drivers can get far
Also make sure your front seat enough away from the steering
passenger moves the seat as far to wheel and still reach the pedals.
the rear as possible. However, if you are concerned about Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
sitting too close, we recommend that comfortable, upright position,
you investigate whether some type leaving ample space between your
of adaptive equipment may help. chest and the airbag cover in the
centre of the steering wheel. If you
Once your seat is adjusted correctly, sit too close to the steering wheel,
rock it back and forth to make sure you could be injured if the front
the seat is locked in position. airbag inflates.
See page 145 for how to adjust the

front seats.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:29:42 32SEA630_021
Protecting Adults
A front passenger should also adjust 4.Adjust the Head Restraints

the seat-back to an upright position,
but as far from the dashboard as Reclining the seat-back too
possible. A passenger who sits too far can result in serious injury
close to the dashboard could be or death in a crash.
injured if the front airbag inflates.
Adjust the seat-back to an
Reclining a seat-back so that the upright position and sit well
shoulder part of the belt no longer back in the seat.
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance See page 145 for how to adjust the
of sliding under the belt in a crash seat-backs.
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the Before driving, make sure everyone
greater the risk of injury. with an adjustable head restraint has
properly positioned the head
restraint. The restraint should be
positioned so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
centre of the restraint. A taller
person should adjust the restraint as
high as possible.

05/10/03 19:29:49 32SEA630_022
Protecting Adults
5.Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts
Improperly positioning head Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
restraints reduces their then tug on the belt to make sure the
effectiveness and you can be belt is securely latched. Also check
seriously injured in a crash. that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
Make sure head restraints are injuries in a crash.
in place and positioned
properly before driving.
Properly adjusted head restraints

will help protect occupants from Position the lap part of the belt as
whiplash and other crash injuries. low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
See page 149 for how to adjust the the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
head restraints. This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:29:55 32SEA630_023
Protecting Adults
If necessary, pull up on the belt again RELEASE BUTTON

To adjust the height of a front seat
to remove any slack from the belt anchor, squeeze the two release
shoulder part, then check that the buttons and slide the anchor up or
belt rests across the centre of your down as needed (it has four
chest and over your shoulder. This positions).
spreads the forces of a crash over
the strongest bones in your upper Never place the shoulder portion of a
body. lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
Improperly positioning the

seat belts can cause serious
injury or death in a crash. If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
Make sure all seat belts are instead of your shoulder, you need to
properly positioned before adjust the seat belt anchor height.
driving.

05/10/03 19:30:02 32SEA630_024
Protecting Adults
If a seat belt does not seem to work 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting In addition, an occupant who is out of
as it should, it may not protect the Position position in the front seat can be
occupant in a crash. No one should After all occupants have adjusted seriously or fatally injured by
sit in a seat with an inoperative seat their seats and put on seat belts, it is striking interior parts of the car, or
belt. Anyone using a seat belt that is very important that they continue to by being struck by an inflating front
not working properly can be sit upright, well back in their seats, airbag. Being struck by an inflating
seriously injured or killed. Have your with their feet on the floor, until the side airbag can result in possibly
dealer check the belt as soon as car is parked and the engine is off. serious injuries.
possible.
Sitting improperly can increase the On cars equipped with passenger’s side
See page 61 for additional chance of injury during a crash. For airbag without automatic cutoff system
information about your seat belt example, if an occupant slouches, If a front passenger leans sideways
system and how to take care of your lies down, turns sideways, sits and his head is in the deployment
belts. forward, leans forward or sideways, path of the side airbag, an inflating
or puts one or both feet up, the side airbag can strike the passenger
chance of injury during a crash is with enough force to very seriously
greatly increased. injure him.

05/10/03 19:30:09 32SEA630_025
Protecting Adults
Advice for Pregnant Women Pregnant women should also sit

upright and as far back as possible
Sitting improperly or out of from the steering wheel or
position can result in serious dashboard. This will reduce the risk
injury or death in a crash. of injuries to both the mother and
her unborn child that can be caused
Always sit upright, well back by a crash or an inflating airbag.
in the seat, with your feet on
the floor. Each time you have a check-up, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Remember, to get the best
protection from your car’s airbags
and other safety features, you must
sit properly and wear your seat belt Because protecting the mother is the
properly. best way to protect her unborn child,
a pregnant woman should always
wear a seat belt whenever she drives
or rides in a car.
Remember to keep the lap portion of

the belt as low as possible across
your hips.

05/10/03 19:30:16 32SEA630_026
Protecting Adults
Additional Safety Precautions Do not place hard or sharp objects On models with side airbags or
Two people should never use the between yourself and a front side curtain airbags, do not attach
same seat belt. If they do, they airbag. Carrying hard or sharp hard objects on or near a front
could be very seriously injured in a objects on your lap, or driving with door. If a side airbag or a side
crash. a pipe or other sharp objects in curtain airbag inflates, a cup
your mouth, can result in injuries holder or other hard object
Do not put any accessories on seat if your front airbag inflates. attached on or near the door could
belts. Devices intended to improve be propelled inside the car and
occupant comfort or reposition the Do not attach or place objects on hurt someone.
shoulder part of a seat belt can the front airbag covers. Any object
severely compromise the attached to or placed on the covers Keep your hands and arms away
protective capability of the seat marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the from the airbag covers. If your
belt and increase the chance of centre of the steering wheel and hands or arms are close to the
serious injury in a crash. on top of the dashboard could airbag cover in the centre of the
interfere with the proper operation steering wheel or on top of the
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags dashboard, they could be injured if
inflate, the objects could be the front airbag inflates.
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.

05/10/03 19:30:22 32SEA630_027
Protecting Children
In most countries, child restraint

systems must meet the
Children who are specifications of the ECE 44
unrestrained or improperly regulation.
restrained can be seriously In many countries, the law requires
injured or killed in a crash. children younger than 12 years of
age and less than 150 cm (60 in) in
Any child too small for a seat height to be secured in an officially
belt should be properly approved and suitable child restraint
restrained in an approved system. In those countries, officially
child restraint system. A approved and suitable child restraint
larger child should be systems must therefore be used in
properly restrained with a order to transport a child on any
Children depend on adults to protect seat belt. passenger seat whatsoever. Please
them. However, despite their best check your local legal requirements.
intentions, many parents and other
adults may not know how to properly
protect young passengers.
So if you have children, or if you ever

need to drive with a grandchild or
other children in your car, be sure to
read this section.

05/10/03 19:30:31 32SEA630_028
Protecting Children
All Children Must Be Restrained Additional Precautions to Parents Children Should Sit in the Back
Each year, many children are injured Never hold an infant or child on Seat
or killed in vehicle crashes because your lap. If you are not wearing a According to crash statistics,
they are either unrestrained or not seat belt in a crash, you could be children of all ages and sizes are
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle thrown forward into the safer when they are properly
accidents are the number one cause dashboard and crush the child. restrained in the back seat, not the
of death of children ages 12 and front seat.
under. If you are wearing a seat belt, the
child can be torn from your arms In the back seat, children are less
To reduce the number of child during a crash. For example, if likely to be injured by striking hard
deaths and injuries, infants and your car crashes into a parked interior parts during a collision or
children should always be properly vehicle at 48 km/h (30 mph), a hard braking. Also, children cannot
restrained whenever they ride in a 9 kg (20-lb) infant will become a be injured by an inflating airbag
vehicle. 275 kg (600-lb) force, and you will when they ride in the back.
not be able to hold on.
Any child who is too small to wear a
seat belt should be properly Never put a seat belt over yourself
restrained in a child restraint system and an infant or child. During a
(see page 31 ). crash, the belt could press deep
into the child and cause very
A larger child should always be serious injuries.
restrained with a seat belt, and use a
booster, if needed (see page 50 ).

05/10/03 19:30:38 32SEA630_029
Protecting Children
The Passenger’s Front Airbag As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94; If the passenger’s front airbag
Poses Serious Risks to Children inflates, it can hit the rearward
Front airbags have been designed to facing child restraint system with
help protect adults in a moderate to great force. The rearward facing
severe frontal collision. To do this, child restraint system can be
the passenger’s front airbag is quite dislodged or struck with enough
large, and it inflates with tremendous force to cause very serious injury to
speed. the infant.
Infants
Never put a rearward facing child
restraint system in the front seat of a Extreme Hazard!
vehicle equipped with a passenger’s
front airbag. If the front airbag Do not use a rearward facing
inflates, it can hit the back of the child restraint on a seat
child restraint system with enough protected by an airbag in
force to kill or very seriously injure front of it!
an infant.

05/10/03 19:30:45 32SEA630_030
Protecting Children
Small Children Larger Children In all cases observe the legal

Placing a front facing child restraint Children who have outgrown child requirements of the countries in
system in the front seat of a vehicle restraint systems are also at risk of which you will drive.
equipped with a passenger’s front being injured or killed by an inflating
airbag can be hazardous. If the passenger’s front airbag. Whenever
vehicle seat is too far forward, or the possible, larger children should sit in
child’s head is thrown forward the back seat, properly restrained
during a collision, an inflating front with a seat belt. (See page 50 for
airbag can strike the child with important information about
enough force to kill or very seriously protecting larger children.)
injure a small child.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:30:50 32SEA630_031
Protecting Children
On some models As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94;

To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in the back seat, your car has
warning labels on the windscreen
and on the front passenger’s
doorjamb. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Extreme Hazard!
Do not use a rearward facing

child restraint on a seat
protected by an airbag in
front of it!

05/10/03 19:30:57 32SEA630_032
Protecting Children
The Side Airbag Poses Serious On cars with passenger’s side airbag
Risks to Children automatic cutoff system
On cars without passenger’s side airbag To help prevent injury by an inflating
automatic cutoff system side airbag, your car has an
Side airbags have been designed to automatic cutoff system for the
help protect adults in a moderate to passenger’s side airbag. Even if with
severe side impact. this system, Honda does not
If any part of a child’s body is in the encourage children to ride in the
path of a deploying airbag, an front. To get the best protection
inflating side airbag can strike the Leaning over the front door from the side airbag, children should
child with enough force to kill or can result in serious injury or be properly restrained with their seat
very seriously injure a child. death if the side airbag belts, and sit upright and well back in
inflates. their seats. See page 71 for further
To remind you of the side airbags information on the passenger’s side
hazards, and that children must be Always sit upright with their airbag automatic cutoff system.
properly restrained in the back seat, back against the seat-back.
your car has the warning label on To remind you of the side airbags
each front doorjamb. hazards, your car also has the
warning label on each front
doorjamb.

05/10/03 19:31:08 32SEA630_033
Protecting Children
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close Additional Safety Precautions
Children Attention Use childproof door locks to
Your car has three seating positions Many parents say they prefer to put prevent children from opening the
in the back seat where children can an infant or small child in the front doors. Using this feature will
be properly restrained. passenger seat so they can watch the prevent children from opening the
child, or because the child requires doors and accidentally falling out
If you ever have to carry more than attention. (see page 141 ).
three children in your car:
Placing a child in the front seat WARNING: Use the main power
Place the largest child in the front exposes the child to hazards from window switch to prevent children
seat, provided the child is large the passenger’s front airbag and side from opening the windows. Using
enough to wear a seat belt airbag (on some types), and paying this feature will prevent children from
properly (see page 50 ). close attention to a child distracts playing with the windows, which
the driver from the important tasks could expose them to hazards or
Move the vehicle seat as far to the of driving, placing both of you at risk. distract the driver (see page 155 ).
rear as possible (see page 16 ).
If a child requires physical attention WARNING: Always take the ignition
Have the child sit upright and well or frequent visual contact, we key with you whenever you leave the
back in the seat (see page 21 ). strongly recommend that another car alone (with other occupants).
adult ride with the child in the back
Make sure the seat belt is properly seat. The back seat is far safer for a
positioned and secured (see page child than the front.
19 ).

05/10/03 19:31:16 32SEA630_034
Protecting Children
Do not leave children alone in your Keep car keys/remote General Guidelines for Using
car. Leaving children without transmitters out of the reach of Child Restraint Systems
adult supervision is illegal in some children. Even very young The following pages give general
countries and can be very children learn how to unlock guidelines for selecting and installing
hazardous. For example, infants vehicle doors, turn on the ignition, child restraint systems for infants
and small children left in a vehicle and open the boot, which can lead and small children.
on a hot day can die from to accidental injury or death.
heatstroke. And children left alone Selecting a Child Restraint System
with the key in the ignition can To provide proper protection, a child
accidentally set the vehicle in restraint system should meet three
motion, possibly injuring requirements:
themselves or others.
1. The child restraint system should
Lock all doors and the boot when meet safety standards. In most
your car is not in use. Children countries, child restraint systems
who play in cars can accidentally must meet the specifications of
get trapped inside the boot and be the ECE 44 regulation. Look for
seriously injured or could die. the approval mark on the system
Teach your children not to play in and the manufacturer’s statement
or around cars. of compliance on the boxes.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:31:23 32SEA630_035
Protecting Children
The manufacturer of the car does

not assume any responsibility for
damage which would be caused by a
defect inherent in the recommended
child restraint system.
2. The child restraint system should

be of the proper type and size to fit
the child.
Make sure the restraint system fits

your child. Check the manufacturer’s
instructions and labels for height and
weight limits. Infants: Children up to about one Small Children: A child who is too
year old should be restrained in a large for a rearward facing child
rearward facing, reclining child restraint system, and who can sit up
restraint system. Only a rearward without support, should be
facing child restraint system restrained in a front facing child
provides the proper support to restraint system. See page 45 for
protect an infant’s head, neck, and additional information on protecting
back. See page 38 for additional small children.
information on protecting infants.

05/10/03 19:31:29 32SEA630_036
Protecting Children
3. The child restraint system should Before purchasing a child restaint For EU countries, refer to page
fit the vehicle seating position (or system, we recommend that parents 37 for the recommended child
positions) where it will be used. test the child restraint system in the restraint system.
specific vehicle seating position (or
Due to variations in the design of positions) where they intend to use Your car has lower anchorages
child restraint systems, vehicle seats, the restraint system. If a previously installed for use with Child Restraint
and seat belts, all child restraint purchased child restraint system Anchorages System-compatible child
systems will not fit all vehicle seating does not fit, you may need to buy a restraint systems. For more
positions. different one that will fit. information, see page 57 .
However, Honda is confident that

one or more child restraint system
models can fit and be properly
installed in all recommended seating
positions in your car.

05/10/03 19:31:40 32SEA630_037
Protecting Children
Placing a Child Restraint System Front Passenger’s Seat

This page briefly summarizes Infants: Never in the front seat, due
Honda’s recommendations on where to the front airbag hazard.
to place rearward and front facing Small children: Not recommended,
child restraint systems in your car. due to the front airbag hazard. If a
small child must ride in front,
Airbags Pose Serious move the vehicle seat to the rear-
Risks to Children most position and secure a front
The passenger’s front airbag facing child restraint system with
inflates with enough force to kill the seat belt (see page 45 ).
or seriously injure an infant in a
rearward facing child restraint Back Seats
system. Infants: Recommended positions.
Properly secure a rearward facing
A small child in a front facing child restraint system (see page
child restraint system is also at 38 ).
risk. If the vehicle seat is too far Small children: Recommended
forward, or the child’s head is positions. Properly secure a front
thrown forward during a facing child restraint system (see
collision, an inflating front pages 45 and 57 ).
airbag can kill or seriously
injure the child. For EU countries, refer to page
37 for placing a child restraint
If a small child must ride in the system.
front, follow the instructions
provided in this section.

05/10/03 19:31:48 32SEA630_038
Protecting Children
Installing a Child Restraint System 1. Properly secure the child restraint 2. Make sure the child restraint
After selecting a proper child system to the car. All child system is firmly secured. After
restraint system, and a good position restraint systems are designed to installing a child restraint system,
to install the restraint system, there be secured to the car with the lap push and pull the restraint system
are three main steps in installing the part of a lap/shoulder belt. Some forward and from side-to-side to
restraint system: child restraint systems can be verify that it is secure.
secured to the vehicle’s lower
anchorages instead. Follow the To provide security during normal
system manufacturer’s driving manoeuvres as well as during
instructions. A restraint system a collision, we recommend that
which is not properly secured to parents secure a child restraint
the car can endanger the life of system as firmly as possible.
the child, and other occupants in a
crash. However, a child restraint system
does not need to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In
See pages 38 , 45 and 57 for some vehicles or seating positions, it
instructions on how to properly may be difficult to install a child
secure child restraint systems in this restraint system so that it does not
car. move at all. Some side to side or
back and forth movement can be
expected and should not reduce the
child restraint system’s effectiveness.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:31:54 32SEA630_039
Protecting Children
If the child restraint system is not 3. Secure the child in the child Storing a Child Restraint System
secure, try installing it in a different restraint system. Make sure the When you are not using a child
seating position, or use a different child is properly strapped in the restraint system, either remove it
style of child restraint system that child restraint system according to and store it in a safe place, or make
can be firmly secured in the desired the child restraint system maker’s sure it is properly secured. An
seating position. instructions. A child who is not unsecured child restraint system can
properly secured in a child be thrown around the car during a
For EU countries, refer to page restraint system can be thrown out crash or sudden stop and injure
37 for the recommended child of the restraint system in a crash someone.
restraint system. and be seriously injured.

05/10/03 19:32:04 32SEA630_040
Protecting Children
Child Restraint System for EU Countries
Child Restraint Suitability for Various Seat Positions

Please use child restraints as given in this table.
Seating position
Mass group Front passenger Rear passenger
Outboard Centre
group 0 Up to 10 kg X Honda BABY- SAFE U
group 0＋ Up to 13 kg X Honda BABY- SAFE U
group I 9 kg to 18 kg Honda LORD＊ Honda LORD or U
Honda Iso-Fix
group II 15 kg to 25 kg Honda KID＊ Honda KID U
group III 22 kg to 36 kg Honda KID＊ Honda KID U
U: Suitable for ‘‘universal’’ category restraints approved for use in this

mass group.
X: Seat position not suitable for children in this weight group.
＊: Move the front seat as far back as possible.
A back-rest is available as an option for Honda KID.
The particular child restraints in the above table are Honda Genuine Parts.
For a correct installation, please refer to the Child Restraint
Instruction Manual.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:32:10 32SEA630_041
Protecting Children
Your car is equipped with lower Protecting Infants

anchorages at the outer seating
The use of any child restraint positions on the rear seat. These
system which is not suitable anchorages are only to be used with
for Honda vehicles would not a child restraint system designed to
properly secure the infant or be attached to the lower anchorages.
child who could therefore be Refer to page 57 for how to install a
killed or seriously injured. child restraint system to the lower
anchorages.
Child Restraint System Type

Only a rearward facing child
restraint system provides proper
support for a baby’s head, neck and
back. Infants up to about one year of
age must be restrained in a rearward
facing child restraint system.

05/10/03 19:32:15 32SEA630_042
Protecting Children
Two types of restraints may be used: We recommend that an infant be

a restraint system designed restrained in a rearward facing child
exclusively for infants, or a Placing a rearward facing restraint system, until the infant is at
convertible restraint system used in child restraint system in the least one year old, reaches the
the rearward facing, reclining mode. front seat can result in restraint system maker’s weight or
serious injury or death if the height limit, and is able to sit up
passenger’s front airbag without support.
inflates.
For EU countries, refer to page
Always place a rearward 37 for the recommended child
facing child restraint system restraint system.
in the back seat, not the front.

05/10/03 19:32:23 32SEA630_043
Protecting Children
Rearward Facing Child Restraint Never put a rearward facing child As required by E.C.E Regulation
System Placement restraint system in the front seat. If No. 94;
For EU countries, an approved the passenger’s front airbag inflates,
rearward facing child restraint it can hit the back of the restraint
system should be placed in any with enough force to kill or seriously
seating position in the back seat (see injure an infant. If an infant must be
page 37 ). closely watched, we recommend that
another adult sit in the back seat
Except for EU countries with the baby.
In this car, a rearward facing child
restraint system can be placed in any Do not put a rearward facing child
seating position in the back seat, but restraint system in a forward-facing Extreme Hazard!
not in the front seat. position. If placed facing forward, an
infant could be very seriously injured Do not use a rearward facing
during a frontal collision. child restraint on a seat
protected by an airbag in
front of it!
If the passenger’s front airbag

inflates, it can hit the rearward
facing child restraint system with
great force. The rearward facing
child restraint system can be
dislodged or struck with enough
force to cause very serious injury to
the infant.

05/10/03 19:32:32 32SEA630_044
Protecting Children
When properly installed, a rearward Rearward Facing Child Restraint

facing child restraint system may System Installation
prevent the driver or a front-seat To properly route a lap/shoulder belt
passenger from moving the seat as through a child restraint system,
far back as recommended (see page follow the restraint system maker’s
16 ). Or it may prevent them from instructions.
locking the seat-back in the desired
upright position (see page 17 ). For EU countries, refer to page
37 for installing a child restraint
In either case, we recommend that system.
you place the child restraint system
directly behind the front passenger The lap/shoulder belts in the back
seat, move the front seat as far seating positions have a locking
forward as needed, and leave it mechanism that must be activated to 1. Place the child restraint system in
unoccupied. Or you may wish to get secure a child restraint system. the desired back seating position.
a smaller child restraint system that Press both of the release buttons
allows you to safely carry a front The following pages provide at the bottom of the handle, then
passenger. instructions and tips on how to pull up the handle to the upright
secure a rearward facing child position. Make sure the handle is
restraint system with this type of latched and the child restraint is
seat belt. (The procedures in these positioned well back in the seat-
pages are described based on a child back.
restraint system available in EU
countries.)
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:32:38 32SEA630_045
Protecting Children
2. Route the belt through the 3. To activate the lockable retractor, 4. Route the shoulder part of the belt
restraint according to the restraint slowly pull the shoulder part of the into the clip at the back of the
system maker’s instructions, then belt all the way out until it stops. restraint, then let the belt feed
insert the latch plate into the back into the retractor.
buckle.

05/10/03 19:32:44 32SEA630_046
Protecting Children
5. After the belt has retracted, tug on

it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
6. After confirming that the belt is 7. Push and pull the child restraint
locked, grab the shoulder part of system forward and from side to
the belt near the buckle and pull side to verify that it is secure
up to remove any slack from the enough to stay upright during
lap part of the belt. Remember, if normal driving manoeuvres. If the
the lap part of the belt is not tight, child restraint system is not
the child restraint system will not secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
be secure. To remove slack, it may retract fully, then repeat these
help to put weight on the child steps.
restraint system, or push on the
back of the restraint system, while
pulling up on the belt.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:32:51 32SEA630_047
Protecting Children
To deactivate the locking Rearward Facing Child Restraint Additional Precaution for Infants
mechanism and remove a child System Installation Tips ‘‘Never let children kneel on seats or
restraint system, unlatch the buckle, stand while the car is in motion. The
unroute the seat belt, and let the belt violent forces created during
fully retract. emergency braking will cause the
children to be thrown forward. The
children could be seriously injured or
killed.’’
For proper protection, an infant must

ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined
position. To determine the proper
reclining angle, check with the baby’s
doctor or follow the child restraint
system maker’s recommendations.
To achieve the desired reclining

angle, it may help to put a rolled up
towel under the toe of the restraint
as shown.

05/10/03 19:32:59 32SEA630_048
Protecting Children
Protecting Small Children Of the different restraint systems Front Facing Child Restraint System
available, we recommend those that Placement
have a five-point harness system as In this car, the best place to install a
shown. front facing child restraint system is
in one of the seating positions in the
We also recommend that a small back seat.
child stay in the child restraint
system as long as possible, until the Placing a front facing child restraint
child reaches the weight or height system in the front seat of a vehicle
limit for the restraint system. equipped with a passenger’s front
airbag can be hazardous. If the
For EU countries, refer to page vehicle seat is too far forward, or the
37 for the recommended child child’s head is thrown forward
restraint system. during a collision, an inflating front
Child Restraint System Type airbag can strike the child with
A child at least one year old who can enough force to cause very serious
sit up without support, and who fits or fatal injuries. If a small child must
within the child restraint system be closely watched, we recommend
maker’s weight and height limits, that another adult sit in the back seat
should be restrained in a front facing, with the child.
upright child restraint system.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:33:06 32SEA630_049
Protecting Children
If it is necessary to put a front facing Front Facing Child Restraint System

child restraint system in the front, Installation
Improperly placing a front move the vehicle seat as far to the To properly route a lap/shoulder belt
facing child restraint system rear as possible, be sure the child through a child restraint system,
in the front seat can result in restraint system is firmly secured to follow the restraint system maker’s
serious injury or death if the the car, and the child is properly instructions.
front airbags inflate. strapped in the restraint system.
For EU countries, refer to page
If you must place a front 37 for installing a child restraint
facing child restraint system system.
in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible The lap/shoulder belts in the back
and properly restrain the seating positions have a locking
child. mechanism that must be activated to
secure a child restraint system.

05/10/03 19:33:13 32SEA630_050
Protecting Children
The following pages provide

instructions on how to secure a front
facing child restraint system with
this type of seat belt. (The
procedures in these pages are
described based on a child restraint
system available in EU countries.)
If you have a child restraint system

designed to be attached to the car’s
lower anchorages, follow the
instructions on page 57 .
1. Place the child restraint system in 3. To activate the lockable retractor,

the desired back seating position. slowly pull the shoulder part of the
Make sure the child restraint is belt all the way out until it stops.
positioned well back in the seat-
back.
2. Route the belt through the

restraint according to the restraint
system maker’s instructions, then
insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:33:20 32SEA630_051
Protecting Children
TAB
TAB
4. Push down the tab. Route the 6. After confirming that the belt is 7. Secure the belt in the slit by
shoulder part of the belt into the locked, grab the shoulder part of pushing up the tab. Make sure the
slit at the side of the restraint, the belt near the buckle and pull belt is not twisted and it is
then let the belt feed back into the up to remove any slack from the positioned properly in the slit.
retractor. lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
5. After the belt has retracted, tug on the child restraint system will not
it. If the belt is locked, you will not be secure. It may help to put
be able to pull it out. If you can pull weight on the child restraint
the belt out, it is not locked and system, or push on the back of the
you will need to repeat these steps. restraint system, while pulling up
on the belt.

05/10/03 19:33:26 32SEA630_052
Protecting Children
To deactivate the locking Additional Precaution for Small

mechanism and remove a child Children
restraint system, unlatch the buckle, ‘‘Never let children kneel on seats or
unroute the seat belt, and let the belt stand while the car is in motion. The
fully retract. violent forces created during
emergency braking will cause the
children to be thrown forward. The
children could be seriously injured or
killed.’’
8. Push and pull the child restraint

system forward and from side to
side to verify that it is secure
enough to stay upright during
normal driving manoeuvres. If the
child restraint system is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.

05/10/03 19:33:33 32SEA630_053
Protecting Children
Protecting Larger Children On cars with side airbags

When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit Allowing a larger child to sit
for a front facing child restraint improperly in the front seat Leaning over the front door
system, the child should sit in the can result in injury or death if can result in serious injury or
back seat on a booster and wear a the passenger’s front airbag death if the side airbag
lap/shoulder belt. inflates. inflates.
We recommend that the child use a If a larger child must sit in Always sit upright with their
booster seat until the child is tall front, make sure the child back against the seat-back.
enough to use the seat belt without a moves the seat as far back as
booster. possible, uses a booster seat
if needed, and wears the seat On some models
The following pages give belt properly. Your car has an automatic cutoff
instructions on how to check proper system for the passenger’s side
seat belt fit, what kind of booster airbag if a child leans sideways and
seat to use if one is needed, and the child’s head is in the deployment
important precautions for a child path of the side airbag. Even if with
who must sit in the front seat. this system, Honda does not
encourage children to ride in the
front.

05/10/03 19:33:40 32SEA630_054
Protecting Children
‘‘Never let children kneel on seats or Checking Seat Belt Fit If the shoulder part of the belt rests
stand while the car is in motion. The over the child’s collarbone and
violent forces created during against the centre of the chest, and
emergency braking will cause the the lap belt rests over the child’s
children to be thrown forward. The hipbones and touches the tops of the
children could be seriously injured or thighs as shown, the child is
killed.’’ probably big enough to wear the seat
belt.
However, if the shoulder belt

touches or crosses the child’s neck,
or if the lap belt crosses the child’s
stomach, the child needs to use a
booster seat.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child Do not let a child wear a seat belt
sit in the rear seat, all the way back across the neck or over the stomach.
against the seat, and put on the seat This could result in serious neck and
belt. Follow the instructions on page internal injuries during a crash.
19 . Then check how the belt fits.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:33:48 32SEA630_055
Protecting Children
Do not let a child put the shoulder Using a Booster Seat A child should continue using a
part of a seat belt behind the back or booster seat until the child exceeds
under the arm. This could cause the booster seat manufacturer’s
very serious injuries during a crash. requirements.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a Even then, the child may still need to
crash and be injured. use a booster seat. Note that some
countries now require children to
Do not put any accessories on a seat use boosters until they reach a
belt. Devices intended to improve certain age and/or weight. Be sure
occupant comfort or reposition the to check current laws in the country
shoulder part of a seat belt, severely or countries where you intend to
compromise the protective capability drive.
of the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash. If a child needs a booster seat, we For EU countries, refer to page
recommend choosing a high or low- 37 for the recommended booster
Two children should never use the back style that allows the child to be seat.
same seat belt. If they do, they could directly secured with the lap/
be very seriously injured in a crash. shoulder belt.
Whichever style you select, follow

the booster seat maker’s instructions.

05/10/03 19:33:56 32SEA630_056
Protecting Children
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front Of course, children vary widely. And
It is recommended that all children while age may be one indicator of
ages 12 and under be properly when a child can safely ride in the
restrained in the back seat. front, there are other important
factors you should consider.
The back seat is the safest place for
GUIDE a child of any age or size.
In addition, the passenger’s front

airbag poses serious risks to children.
If the front seat is too far forward
and the child’s head is thrown
forward during a collision, or the
child is unrestrained or out of
On some models position, an inflating front airbag can
An optional back-rest is available for kill or seriously injure the child.
a specific booster seat (see page 37 ).
Install the back-rest to the booster On some types, the side airbag also
seat and adjust it to the vehicle seat poses risks. If any part of a larger
according to the booster seat maker’s child’s body is in the path of a
instructions. Make sure the seat belt deploying airbag, the child could
is properly routed through the guide receive possibly serious injuries.
at the shoulder of the back-rest and
the belt does not touch and cross the
child’s neck (see page 51 ).

05/10/03 19:34:05 32SEA630_057
Protecting Children
Physical Size If you decide that a child can safely Supervise the child. Even mature
Physically, a child must be large ride up front, be sure to: children sometimes need to be
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to reminded to fasten the seat belts
properly fit over the hips, chest, and Carefully read the owner’s manual or sit properly.
shoulder (see pages 19 and 50 ). If and make sure you understand all
the seat belt does not fit properly, seat belt instructions and all safety
the child should not sit in the front. information.
Maturity Move the vehicle seat to the rear-

To safely ride in front, a child must most position.
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly and wearing the seat Have the child sit up straight, back
belt properly throughout a ride. against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is

properly positioned and secured.
If your car has side airbags,

remind the child not to lean
toward the door.

05/10/03 19:34:13 32SEA630_058
Protecting Children
Using Child Restraints with ANCHOR POINTS ANCHOR POINTS

Tethers
Children riding in the automobiles
should be restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in the event of an
accident.
Your car has two tether anchor

points under the rear window at the
outer positions for securing a tether-
PLASTIC
style child restraint system to the car. ANCHOR FITTING PLASTIC COVER ANCHOR FITTING COVER
On Australian model, there are three On cars with two anchor points On Australian model
tether anchor points.
The tether anchor fittings are
Since a tether can provide additional located under the plastic covers.
security, we recommend using a Pivot the cover backward to access
tether whenever one is required or the anchor fitting.
available. (The owners may check
with the child restraint system
maker to determine whether a tether
is available for a particular child
restraint system.)
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:34:22 32SEA630_059
Protecting Children
ATTACHING CLIP (see page 149 ). The removed head To attach the tether to the child
restraint should be secured so it will restraint system, follow the child
not be thrown while you are driving. restraint system maker’s instructions.
Make sure to replace the rear head
Front restraint when the child restraint When the child restraint system is
system is not in use. used, follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint system.
WARNING: Child restraint anchorages

are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted child
ANCHOR FITTING restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts,
Attach the attaching clip to the harnesses or for attaching other items
anchor fitting as shown in the or equipment to the vehicle.
illustration, then tighten the strap
according to the child restraint
system maker’s instructions. Make
sure the strap is not twisted.
On some models
The above illustration shows how To use an anchor point, lift the rear
the attaching clip should be routed in head restraint, then route the tether
EU countries. strap over the seat-back between the
legs of the head restraint.
Remove the rear head restraint on
the seating position you want to use

05/10/03 19:34:30 32SEA630_060
Protecting Children
Using the Lower Anchorages To install a child restraint system

Your car is equipped with lower designed to be attached to the lower
anchorages at the outer rear seats. anchorages:
These anchorages are located
between the seat-back and seat 1. Move the seat belt buckle or
bottom and are to be used only with centre seat belt away from the
a child restraint system designed for anchorages.
use with the lower anchorages.
2. Make sure there are no foreign
For EU countries, refer to page objects around the anchorages.
37 for the recommended child LOWER Foreign objects could get in the
restraint system. ANCHORAGES way of a secure connection
between the child restraint system
The location of each lower and the anchorages.
anchorage is shown in the above
illustration.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:34:38 32SEA630_061
Protecting Children
LOWER ANCHORAGE
BUCKLE
GUIDE-CUP
GUIDE-CUP
Rigid type
3. On some models Move the seat belt buckle out of 4. Put the child restraint system in
You may use guide-cups that came the way, then attach the guide- the rear left or right vehicle seat
with your child restraint system to cups to the lower anchorages as and attach the child restraint
install it to the lower anchorages shown in the illustration. system to the lower anchorages
without damaging the seat surface. according to the child restraint
When using the guide-cups, system maker’s instructions.
always follow the child restraint
system manufacture’s instructions.

05/10/03 19:34:45 32SEA630_062
Protecting Children
Remove the rear head restraint on

ATTACHING CLIP
the seating position you want to use
(see page 149 ). The removed head
restraint should be secured so it will
Front not be thrown while you are driving.
Make sure to replace the rear head
restraint when the child restraint
system is not in use.
Flexible type TETHER ANCHOR FITTING
5. Follow the child restraint system 6. Attach the attaching clip to the
maker’s instructions for any tether anchor fitting as shown in
additional advice on adjusting or the illustration, then tighten the
tightening the fit. strap according to the child
restraint system marker’s
Flexible type child restraint instructions. Make sure the strap
system is available in some is not twisted.
countries. In EU countries, this
type is not available. The above illustration shows how
the attaching clip should be routed
in EU countries.

05/10/03 19:34:51 32SEA630_063
Protecting Children
The design and suitability of the

child restraint systems must be
carefully checked with the child
restraint system manufacturer
concerned and the seller of those
systems. If you are not sure, consult
your dealer before purchasing this
type of child restraint system.
7. On some models
Lift the rear head restraint, then
route the tether strap over the
seat-back between the legs of the
head restraint.
8. Push and pull the child restraint

system forward and from side to
side to verify that it is secure
enough to stay upright during
normal driving manoeuvres.

05/10/03 19:35:00 32SEA630_064
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components If you do not fasten your seat belt Lap/Shoulder Belt
Your seat belt system includes lap/ before the beeper stops, the
shoulder belts in all five seating indicator will stop blinking but SHOULDER UPPER SEAT
positions. The front seat belts are remain lit. If you continue driving PORTION BELT ANCHOR
also equipped with automatic seat without fastening your seat belt, the
belt tensioners. indicator will start blinking again and
the beeper will sound at regular
The seat belt system intervals. Also, you will see the
includes an indicator on the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with LATCH
PLATE
instrument panel to remind you and a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ message
your passengers to fasten your belts. on the multi-information display.
If you turn the ignition switch to the BUCKLE LAP PORTION

ON (II) position without fastening
your belt, a beeper will sound and This seat belt has a single belt that
the indicator will blink. The beeper goes over your shoulder, across your
will stop after a few seconds, but the chest and across your hips.
indicator will stay on until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened. To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:35:07 32SEA630_065
To unlock the belt, push the red The seat belts in all rear seating To deactivate the locking
PRESS button on the buckle. positions have an additional locking mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
mechanism that must be activated to let the seat belt fully retract. To
Guide the belt across your body to secure a child restraint. (See pages refasten the belt, pull it out only as
the door pillar. After exiting the car, 41 and 46 for instructions on how to far as needed.
be sure the belt is out of the way and secure child restraints with this type
will not get closed in the door. of seat belt.) See page 19 for instructions on how
to wear the lap/shoulder belt
All seat belts have an emergency If the shoulder part of the belt is properly.
locking retractor. In normal driving, pulled all the way out, the locking
the retractor lets you move freely in mechanism will be activated. The
your seat while it keeps some belt will retract, but it will not allow
tension on the belt. During a collision the passenger to move freely.
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.

05/10/03 19:35:13 32SEA630_066
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners When the tensioners are activated, The SRS indicator will
the seat belts will remain tight until come on if there is a
they are unbuckled in the normal problem with your automatic seat
way. belt tensioners (see page 70 ). Also,
you will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or
the symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display.
For added protection during a

moderate to severe frontal collision,
the front seat belts are equipped
with automatic seat belt tensioners.
If your front airbags inflate, the
tensioners immediately tighten the
belts to help hold the driver and a
front passenger in place.

05/10/03 19:35:20 32SEA630_067
Seat Belt Maintenance WARNING: It is essential to replace

For safety, you should check the the entire assembly after it has been
condition of your seat belts regularly. Not checking or maintaining worn in a severe impact even if damage
seat belts can result in to the assembly is not obvious.
Pull each belt out fully and look for serious injury or death if the
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check seat belts do not work WARNING: Care should be taken to
that the latches work smoothly and properly when needed. avoid contamination of the webbing with
that the lap/shoulder belts retract polishes, oils and chemicals, and
easily. Any belt not in good condition Check your seat belts particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
or not working properly will not regularly and have any safely be carried out using mild soap and
provide good protection and should problem corrected as soon as water. The belt should be replaced if
be replaced as soon as possible. possible. webbing becomes frayed, contaminated
or damaged.
WARNING: No modifications or
additions should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted to remove
slack.

05/10/03 19:35:28 32SEA630_068
If a seat belt is worn during a crash, Anchorage Points

it must be replaced by the dealer. A (Front Seat) (Rear Seat)
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed.
Automatic seat belt tensioners that

deployed during a crash must be
replaced.
For information on how to clean your

seat belts, see page 501 .
When replacing the seat belts, make The rear seat has three lap/shoulder
certain to use the anchorage points belts.
shown in the illustrations.

05/10/03 19:35:37 32SEA630_069
Additional Information About Your Airbags
SRS Components A sophisticated electronic system How Your Front Airbags Work
Your Supplemental Restraint System that continually monitors
(SRS) includes: information about the sensors, the
control unit, and the airbag
Two front airbags. The driver’s activators when the ignition switch
airbag is stored in the centre of is in the ON (II) position.
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the On cars with side airbags with
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS automatic cutoff system
AIRBAG.’’ A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
Automatic seat belt tensioners records information about the
that tighten the front seat belts sensors, the control unit, and the
during a moderate to severe airbag activators when the ignition
frontal collision (see page 63 ). switch is in the ON (II) position. If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the sensors
Sensors that can detect a An indicator on the instrument will detect rapid deceleration and
moderate to severe frontal panel that alerts you to a possible signal the control unit to instantly
collision. problem with the system (see inflate the front airbags and activate
page 70 ). the automatic seat belt tensioners.
Emergency backup power in case

your car’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.

05/10/03 19:35:44 32SEA630_070
During a frontal crash, your seat belt After a crash, you may see what
helps restrain your lower body and looks like smoke. This is actually
torso, while the tensioner tightens powder from the airbag’s surface.
and locks the seat belt to help keep Although the powder is not harmful,
you in place. Your airbag provides a people with respiratory problems
cushion to help restrain and protect may experience some temporary
your head and chest. discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the car as soon as it is safe to do so.
Since both front airbags use the
same sensors, both airbags normally
inflate at the same time. However, it
is possible for only one airbag to
inflate.
This can occur when the severity of After inflating, the front airbags
a collision is at the margin, or immediately deflate, so they won’t
threshold, that determines whether interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or not the front airbags will deploy. or the ability to steer or operate
In such cases, the seat belt will other controls.
provide sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by The total time for inflation and
the airbag would be minimal. deflation is approximately one-tenth
of a second, so fast that most
occupants are not aware that the
front airbags deployed until they see
them lying in their laps.

05/10/03 19:35:52 32SEA630_071
How Your Side Airbags Work In a moderate to severe side impact, On cars without passenger’s side airbag
(For some types) the sensors will detect rapid automatic cutoff system
deceleration and signal the control If a front passenger leans sideways
unit to instantly inflate either the and his head is in the deployment
driver’s or the passenger’s side path of the side airbag, he can be
airbag. seriously injured by an inflating side
airbag. An inflating side airbag can
Only one airbag will deploy during a strike the child with enough force to
side impact. If the impact is on the kill or very seriously injure a child.
passenger’s side, the passenger’s For the information of the side
side airbag will deploy even if there airbags hazards, see pages 29 and
is no passenger. 50 .
To get the best protection from the On cars with passenger’s side airbag
side airbags, front seat occupants automatic cutoff system
Your car is equipped with side should wear their seat belts and sit To help prevent injury by an inflating
airbags for the driver and a front upright and well back in their seats. side airbag, your car has an
seat passenger. The airbags are automatic cutoff system for the
stored in the outer edges of the front passenger’s side airbag. When the
seat-backs, and both are marked system is shut off, the Side Airbag
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’ indicator comes on as a reminder
(see page 71 ).

05/10/03 19:35:58 32SEA630_072
How Your Side Curtain Airbags In a moderate to severe side impact,

Work sensors will detect rapid deceleration
(For some types) and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the

side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
Your car is equipped with side

curtain airbags. These airbags are
stored in the front, centre, and rear
pillars on both sides. The front and
rear pillars on both sides are marked
‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.’’

05/10/03 19:36:08 32SEA630_073
How the SRS Indicator Works If the indicator comes on at any tensioners may not work when you
The SRS indicator alerts other time, or does not come on at all, need them. See your dealer as soon
you to a potential problem you should have the system checked as possible.
with your front airbags. This by your dealer. For example:
indicator will also alert you to a
potential problem with your If the SRS indicator does not come
automatic seat belt tensioners (see on after you turn the ignition Ignoring the SRS indicator
page 63 ). switch to the ON (II) position. light can result in serious
You will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or injury or death if the airbags,
the symbol with a ‘‘CHECK If the indicator stays on after the cutoff system, or tensioners
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- engine starts. do not work properly.
If the indicator comes on or Have your car checked by a
On models with side airbags, this flashes on and off while you drive. dealer as soon as possible if
indicator will also alert you to a the SRS light alerts you to a
potential problem with your side If you see the symbol (shown in potential problem.
airbags, the side curtain airbags, or the previous column) or the
on some types, passenger’s side symbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’
airbag automatic cutoff system (see message on the multi-information
page 71 ). display.
When you turn the ignition switch to If you see any of these indications,
the ON (II) position, this indicator your airbags may not deploy, your
will come on briefly then go out. This passenger’s side airbag automatic
tells you that the system is working cutoff system (if equipped) may not
properly. work properly, or your seat belt

05/10/03 19:36:18 32SEA630_074
How the Side Airbag Off If a small-statured adult leans When you turn the ignition switch to
Indicator Works sideways, or larger adult slouches ON (II), the indicator comes on and
Only on models with passenger’s and leans sideways into the goes out immediately (see page 84 ).
side airbag automatic cutoff system deployment path of the side airbag, Have the system checked;
This indicator alerts you the system may also shut off the side
that the passenger’s side airbag. if the indicator stays on or comes
airbag has been automatically shut on while you are driving without a
off. If the side airbag off indicator comes passenger in the front seat,
on and you see the symbol ‘‘ ’’
It does not mean there is a problem or the symbol with a ‘‘PASSENGER if you see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or
with your side airbags. It means that SIDE AIRBAG’’ message on the the symbol with a ‘‘PASSENGER
the side airbag cutoff system has multi-information display, you should SIDE AIRBAG’’ message on the
activated to prevent the side airbag have the passenger sit upright. Once multi-information display.
from deploying. the passenger is out of the
deployment path of the side airbag,
To reduce the risk of injury from an the system will turn the airbag back
inflating side airbag, your car has an on and the indicator will go out.
automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag. A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
Although Honda does not encourage backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
children to ride in the front, this system from working properly.
system is designed to shut off the
side airbag if a child leans sideways
and the child’s head is in the side
airbag deployment path.

05/10/03 19:36:25 32SEA630_075
Airbag Service Handling is allowed by trained Additional Safety Precautions

Your airbag system and automatic personnel only. It is prohibited to Do not attempt to deactivate your
seat belt tensioners are virtually remove the airbag unit/belt- airbags. Together, airbags and
maintenance-free, and there are no tensioner from the car. In case of seat belts provide the best
parts you can safely service. malfunction, shutdown or after protection.
However, you must have your car airbag inflation/belt-tensioner
serviced if: operation you have to ask a qualified Do not tamper with airbag and
shop for repair or removal. automatic seat belt tensioner
Your airbags ever inflate. Any components or wiring for any
airbag that has deployed must be reason. Tampering could cause
replaced along with the control the airbags and automatic seat belt
unit, automatic seat belt tensioners to deploy, possibly
tensioners, and other related parts. causing very serious injury.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by your dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
The SRS indicator light alerts you

to a problem. Take your car to an
authorized Honda dealer as soon
as possible. If you ignore this
indication, the airbags might not
inflate when you need them.

05/10/03 19:36:30 32SEA630_076
On cars with side airbags See page 363 for further information
Do not expose the front seat-backs and precautions relating to your
to water. If rain or spilled water airbags.
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.
Do not cover or replace front seat-

back covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a collision.

05/10/03 19:36:37 32SEA630_077
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your car’s exhaust contains carbon With the boot lid open, air flow can
monoxide gas. You should have no pull exhaust gas into your car’s
problem with carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
entering the car in normal driving if Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
you maintain your car properly. unconsciousness and even boot lid open, open all the windows
kill you. and set the heating and cooling
Have the exhaust system inspected system/climate control system as
for leaks whenever: Avoid any enclosed areas or shown below.
activities that expose you to
The car is raised for an oil change. carbon monoxide. If you must sit in your parked car,
You notice a change in the sound even in an unconfined area, with the
of the exhaust. engine running, adjust the heating
The car was in an accident that High levels of carbon monoxide can and cooling system/climate control
may have damaged the underside. collect rapidly in enclosed areas, system as follows:
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed. 1. Select the Fresh Air mode.
Even with the door open, run the 2. Select the mode.
engine only long enough to move the 3. Set the fan speed to high.
car out of the garage. 4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.

05/10/03 19:36:47 32SEA630_078
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations SRS AIRBAG SRS AIRBAG

shown. They warn you of potential
(Right-hand drive type) (Left-hand drive type)
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully. If CHILD SAFETY ＊ CHILD SAFETY ＊
a label comes off or becomes hard to (Left-hand drive type) (Right-hand drive type)
read, contact your dealer for a
replacement. BATTERY DANGER LABEL
The label shown below is attached to

the back of the bonnet.
SRS Airbag
SRS Airbag
Safety alert symbol
CHILD SAFETY ＊
Follow service manual SRS AIRBAG
instructions carefully Petrol models SIDE AIRBAG
RADIATOR CAP DANGER LABEL (For some types)
Diesel models
EXPANTION TANK CAP DANGER LABEL
＊ : For some types CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:36:55 32SEA630_079
Safety Labels
On cars with side airbags, the label On some models, the labels shown On Diesel models
shown below is attached to each below are attached to the Symbols on top of the
front doorjamb. windscreen and each front doorjamb. engine under the engine cover are to
remind you to follow the service
manual instructions. When replacing
the injectors, your authorized dealer
should perform this work. Contact
your dealer.
Side Airbag
Safety alert symbol
Follow owner’ s manual

instructions carefully

05/10/03 19:37:00 32SEA630_080
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Rear Window Demister ............ 127 Rear Seat Armrest ......................... 152
the controls and displays that Hazard Warning......................... 128 Seat Heaters ................................... 153
contribute to the daily operation of Headlight Washer...................... 128 Headlight Adjuster ........................ 154
your car. All the essential controls Steering Wheel Adjustment ..... 129 Power Windows ............................. 155
are within easy reach. Keys and Locks.............................. 130 Sunroof ............................................ 159
Keys............................................. 130 Mirrors ............................................ 161
Immobilizer System................... 131 Adjusting the Power Mirrors ... 162
Ignition Switch ........................... 132 Power Mirror Heaters............... 163
Power Door Locks ..................... 134 Folding Door Mirrors ............... 163
Super Locking ........................ 136 Parking Brake ................................ 164
Control Locations ............................ 78 Remote Transmitter .................. 137 Console Compartment .................. 165
Indicator Lights................................ 80 Childproof Door Locks ............. 141 Armrest ........................................... 165
Gauges .............................................. 91 Boot ............................................. 141 Beverage Holders .......................... 166
Multi-Information Display .............. 93 Boot Main Switch .................. 143 Centre Pocket ................................ 167
Controls Near the Steering Glove Box ................................... 144 Coin Box ......................................... 167
Wheel ...................................... 114 Seat Adjustments ........................... 145 Sun Visor......................................... 168
Headlights .................................. 116 Front Seat Adjustments ............ 145 Vanity Mirror ................................. 168
Daytime Running Lights .......... 118 Driver’s Seat Height Coat Hook ....................................... 168
Rear Fog Lamp .......................... 118 Adjustment ............................. 146 Sunglasses Holder ......................... 169
Front and Rear Fog Lamps ...... 119 Driver’s Seat Power Accessory Power Socket .............. 170
Automatic Lighting ................... 120 Adjustments ........................... 146 Cigarette Lighter ........................... 170
Instrument Panel Brightness ... 122 Driver’s Lumbar Support .......... 148 Ashtrays .......................................... 171
Turn Signals ............................... 122 Front Passenger’s Seat Power Interior Lights ................................ 172
Windscreen Wipers ................... 123 Adjustments ........................... 148 Ceiling Light ............................... 172
Automatic Wipers .................. 125 Head Restraints ......................... 149 Spotlights .................................... 173
Windscreen Washers ................ 127 Folding Rear Seat .......................... 150 Courtesy Lights ......................... 174
Instruments and Controls 77

05/10/03 19:37:05 32SEA630_081
Control Locations

MIRROR CONTROLS HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
(P.162) (P.128)
AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK (P.195)
MASTER SWITCH DIGITAL CLOCK
(P.134) (P.210, 232, 256, 281)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES CLIMATE CONTROL
(P.155) SYSTEM
(P.176)

(P.352)
BOOT RELEASE HANDLE
(P.141)
BONNET RELEASE HANDLE
(P.354)
78 Instruments and Controls

05/10/03 19:37:10 32SEA630_082
Control Locations
Right-hand drive type

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON MIRROR CONTROLS
AUDIO SYSTEM (P.128) (P.162)
(P.195)
DIGITAL CLOCK
(P.210, 232, 256, 281)
POWER DOOR LOCK

CLIMATE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH
SYSTEM (P.134)
(P.176)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.155)

(P.352)
BOOT RELEASE HANDLE
BONNET RELEASE HANDLE (P.141)
(P.354)

05/10/03 19:37:19 32SEA630_083
Indicator Lights
Petrol models without ACC or ACC/LKAS VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(P.86) (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.86)
FRONT FOG LAMP INDICATOR (P.87)
REAR FOG LAMP INDICATOR CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.89)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.87)
(P.85) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.85)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.86) (P.89)
DOOR AND BOOT OPEN
MONITOR (P.89)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
(P.83)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

(P.89)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.83)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.83) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
LOW FUEL INDICATOR SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.84)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.88)
(P.83) ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE INDICATOR (P.84)
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.85)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.88)
MESSAGE INDICATOR
(P.90) SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.84)
Since the indicators vary in models, some indicators are not on your car.

05/10/03 19:37:27 32SEA630_084
Indicator Lights
Petrol models with ACC or ACC/LKAS VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
REAR FOG LAMP INDICATOR ACC/LKAS WARNING INDICATOR,
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.87) ACC WARNING INDICATOR (P.90)
(P.85)
ACC/LKAS INDICATOR, ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.86) ACC INDICATOR (P.90) INDICATOR (P.85)
DOOR AND BOOT OPEN
MONITOR (P.89)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
(P.83)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

(P.89)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.83)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.83)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.88) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.84)
(P.83)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.85) INDICATOR (P.84)
MESSAGE INDICATOR
(P.90) SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.88)
Model with ACC/LKAS shown SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.84)

05/10/03 19:37:36 32SEA630_085
Indicator Lights
Diesel models VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST

REAR FOG LAMP INDICATOR CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.89)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.87)
(P.85)
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.86) (P.89) INDICATOR (P.85)
DOOR AND BOOT OPEN
MONITOR (P.89)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
(P.83)
GLOW PLUGS
INDICATOR (P.87)
SEAT BELT REMINDER

INDICATOR (P.83)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.83) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.88) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.84)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.89) ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(P.83) INDICATOR (P.84)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.85) SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.88)
MESSAGE INDICATOR (P.90) SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.84)
Since the indicators vary in models, some indicators are not on your car.

05/10/03 19:37:48 32SEA630_086
Indicator Lights
The instrument panel has many Low Oil Pressure Seat Belt Reminder
indicators to give you important Indicator Indicator
information about your car. The engine can be severely damaged The seat belt system includes an
if this indicator flashes or stays on indicator on the instrument panel
Malfunction Indicator when the engine is running. You will and a beeper to remind you and your
Lamp see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the passengers to fasten your seat belts.
You will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or symbol with an ‘‘OIL PRESSURE
the symbol with a ‘‘CHECK LOW’’ message on the multi- If you turn the ignition switch to ON
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- information display. For more (II) before fastening your belt, the
information display. See page 523 on information, see page 521 . beeper sounds and the indicator
petrol models and page 524 on diesel flashes. If you do not fasten your
models. Charging System seat belt before the beeper stops, the
Indicator indicator stops flashing but remains
On Diesel models only If this indicator comes on when the on.
This indicator will also come on engine is running, the battery is not
when you restart the engine after being charged, and you will also see If you continue driving without
your car has run out of fuel (see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the symbol fastening your seat belt, the beeper
page 492 ). with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message sounds and the indicator flashes
on the multi-information display. For again at regular intervals, and you
more information, see page 522 . will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the
symbol with a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multi-

05/10/03 19:38:00 32SEA630_087
Indicator Lights
Supplemental Restraint Side Airbag Off Indicator display. If this happens, stop the car
System Indicator (For some types) in a safe place and turn off the
This indicator comes on briefly when This indicator comes on when you engine. Reset the system by
you turn the ignition switch to ON turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If restarting the engine. The indicator
(II). If it comes on at any other time, it comes on at any other time, it will not be turned off immediately, so
it indicates a potential problem with indicates that the passenger’s side drive several kilometres and watch
your front airbags or automatic seat airbag has automatically shut off. the EPS indicator. If it does not go
belt tensioners. On models equipped You will also see the symbol off, or comes back on again while
with side airbags, this indicator will ‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with a driving, take the car to your dealer to
also alert you to a potential problem ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ have it checked. With the indicator
with your side airbags, side curtain message on the multi-information on, the EPS is turned off, making the
airbags, or passenger’s side airbag display. For more information, see car harder to steer.
automatic cutoff system (if page 71 .
equipped). You will see the symbol If the power steering system
‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with a Electric Power Steering overheats while driving, the assisting
‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the (EPS) Indicator power is reduced and steering may
multi-information display. For (For some types) feel slightly harder.
complete information, see page 70 . This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition switch to If you drive with the system
ON (II) and goes off after the engine overheated continuously or
starts. If it comes on at any other repeatedly, this can damage the
time, there is a problem with the power steering system.
Electric Power Steering system. You
will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the
symbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information

05/10/21 11:53:55 32SEA630_088
Indicator Lights
Parking Brake and with a ‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ Anti-lock Brake System
Brake System Indicator message, or the symbol ‘‘ ’’ (ABS) Indicator
This indicator has two functions: (on some types) or the symbol This indicator normally comes on for
with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ a few seconds when you turn the
1. It comes on when you turn the message (on some types) on the ignition switch to ON (II). If this
ignition switch to ON (II). It is a multi-information display. For indicator comes on at any other time,
reminder to check the parking more information, see page 526 . there is a problem in the ABS. If this
brake. Driving with the parking happens, take the car to your dealer
brake not fully released can Immobilizer System to have it checked. With the
damage the rear brakes, axles and Indicator indicator on, your car still has normal
tyres. This indicator comes on for a few braking ability but no anti-lock. You
If you drive without releasing the seconds when you turn the ignition will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the
parking brake, a chime will sound, switch to ON (II). It will then go off symbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’
and you will also see the symbol if you have inserted a properly-coded system on the multi-information
‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with a ignition key. If it is not a properly- display. For complete information,
‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE’’ coded key, the indicator will blink see page 388 .
message on the multi-information and the engine will not start (see
display. page 131 ).
2. If it stays on after you have fully This indicator also blinks several
released the parking brake while times when you turn the ignition
the engine is running, or if it switch from the ON (II) to the
comes on while driving, it can ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
indicate a problem with the brake position.
system. Also, you will see the
symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the symbol

05/10/03 19:38:24 32SEA630_089
Indicator Lights
Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator Lights On Indicator

(VSA) System Indicator (For some types)
(For some types) This indicator has three functions: This indicator reminds you that the
This indicator normally comes on for exterior lights are on. It comes on
a few seconds when you turn the 1. It comes on as a reminder that you when the light switch is in either the
ignition switch to the ON (II) have turned off the Vehicle or position. If you turn the
position. Stability Assist (VSA) system. ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0) without turning off the
If this indicator comes on and stays 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see light switch, this indicator will
on at any other time, or it does not page 391 ). remain on. A reminder chime will
come on when you turn the ignition also sound when you open the driver’s
switch to ON (II), there is a problem 3. It comes on along with the VSA door. Also, you will see the symbol
with the VSA system. You will see system indicator if there is a ‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with a
the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the symbol problem with the VSA system. ‘‘HEADLIGHTS ON’’ message on
with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message You will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ the multi-information display.
on the multi-information display. or the symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
Take the car to your dealer to have it SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- On some types, this indicator also
checked. Without VSA, your car still information display. comes on when the light switch is in
has normal driving ability, but will AUTO and the lights turn on
not have VSA traction and stability This indicator normally comes on for automatically.
enhancement. See page 391 for more a few seconds when you turn the
information on the VSA system. ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. See page 391 for more
information on the VSA system.

05/10/03 19:38:36 32SEA630_090
Indicator Lights
Rear Fog Lamp Indicator restart the engine after your car has
(For some types) run out of fuel. For more information,
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning This indicator lights when you turn see pages 492 and 525 .
Indicators on the rear fog lamp. See page
The left or right turn signal indicator 118 for information on operating the If you experience any of the
blinks when you signal a lane change rear fog lamp. following, there may be a problem
or turn. If the indicator does not with the water temperature sensor
blink or blinks rapidly, it usually Front Fog Lamp on the fuel system. Have your car
means one of the turn signal bulbs is Indicator inspected by your dealer.
burned out (see page 478 ). Replace This indicator lights when you turn
the bulb as soon as possible, since on the front fog lamps. See page This indicator remains lit shorter
other drivers cannot see that you are 119 for information on operating the than normal when the outside
signaling. front fog lamps. temperature is very low.
When you turn on the Hazard
Warning switch, both turn signal Glow Plugs Indicator It is hard to start the engine.
lights blink. All turn signals on the (Diesel models only)
outside of the car should flash. This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II). When the engine
is cold, wait for the indicator to go
off before starting the engine.
If this indicator blinks while the

engine is running, there is a problem
in the engine control system. This
indicator may also blink when you

05/10/03 19:38:46 32SEA630_091
Indicator Lights
Low Fuel Indicator The indicator comes on when the Security System Indicator
tank contains less than about: (For some types)
10.0 (2.64 US gal , 2.20 Imp gal)
On Diesel models
Refer to Priming the Fuel System
on page 492 if your car runs out of
fuel.
LOW FUEL INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon. This indicator comes on when the
You will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or security system is set. See page
the symbol with a ‘‘FUEL LOW’’ 299 for more information on the
message on the multi-information security system.
display.

05/10/03 19:38:56 32SEA630_092
Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Indicator High Beam Indicator Door and Boot Open Monitor
(For some types)
This indicator comes on when you This indicator comes on with the
set the cruise control. See page high beam headlights. See page
302 for information on operating the 116 for information on the headlight
cruise control. controls.
Cruise Main Indicator

(For some types) The appropriate indicator comes on
This indicator comes on when you in this display if the boot or any door
turn on the cruise control system by is not closed tightly. Also, you will
pressing the Master Button. (see see the symbol ‘‘ (example)’’
page 302 .) on the multi-information display.
All the indicators in the monitor

display come on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.

05/10/03 19:39:10 32SEA630_093
Indicator Lights
Message Indicator ACC Indicator (green) ACC/LKAS Indicator

(For some types) (green)
This indicator comes on when there This indicator comes on for several (For some types)
is a system message in the multi- seconds when you turn the ignition This indicator comes on for several
information display. Press the INFO switch to the ON (II) position. For seconds when you turn the ignition
button on the steering wheel to see more information, see page 305 . switch to the ON (II) position. For
the message (see page 93 ). more information, see page 306 and
ACC Warning Indicator 324 .
Most of the time, this indicator (amber)
comes on along with other indicators (For some types) ACC/LKAS Warning
in the instrument panel such as the This indicator comes on when there Indicator (amber)
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS is a problem with the ACC system. (For some types)
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc. Also, you will see the symbol This indicator comes on when there
‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with a is a problem with the ACC system
‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the and/or the LKAS system. Also, you
multi-information display. For more will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the
information, see page 318 . symbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. For more information, see
page 318 and 324 .

05/10/03 19:39:18 32SEA630_094
Gauges
The gauges illuminate when you

turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Speedometer
This shows your speed in kilometres TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE
per hour (km/h) and/or miles per TEMPERATURE
hour (mph) depending on the type. GAUGE
You can set the car speed alarm. For

more information, see page 104 .
Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.
SELECT/RESET KNOB
MUTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
Models with ACC shown

CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:39:25 32SEA630_095
Gauges
Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge

This shows the temperature of the This shows how much fuel you have.
engine’s coolant. During normal It is most accurate when the car is on On Petrol models only
operation, the pointer should rise level ground. It may show slightly Avoid driving with an extremely low
from the bottom mark to about the more or less than the actual amount fuel level. Running out of fuel could
middle of the gauge. In severe when you are driving on curvy or cause the engine to misfire,
driving conditions, such as very hot hilly roads. damaging the catalytic converter.
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise into the The needle returns to the bottom
upper half of the gauge. If it reaches after you turn off the ignition. The
the red mark, pull safely to the side gauge shows the fuel level reading On Diesel models only
of the road. Turn to page 517 on immediately after you turn the The Malfunction Indicator Lamp will
petrol models and page 519 on diesel ignition switch back to the ON (II) come on or the Glow Plugs Indicator
models for instructions and position. will blink when you restart the
precautions on checking the engine’s engine after your car has run out of
cooling system. fuel.

05/10/03 19:39:32 32SEA630_096
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display in the INFO BUTTON Odometer

instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON(II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your car more
comfortably, and others help to keep
you aware of the periodic
maintenance your car needs for
continued trouble-free driving.
ODOMETER
SEL/RESET BUTTON
You can change the display and

customize your car control settings The odometer shows the total
by pressing the SEL/RESET or number of kilometres or miles your
INFO button. car has been driven.

05/10/03 19:39:39 32SEA630_097
Trip Meter With the ignition switch in the ON When you reset Trip A, average fuel
(II) position, Trip A and Trip B economy A is reset at the same time.
switch each time you press the SEL/ When you reset Trip B, the average
RESET button. fuel economy B is reset.
To reset a trip meter, display it, then In the customizing mode, you can set
press and hold the SEL/RESET Trip A and average fuel economy A
TRIP METER button until the number resets to to reset at the same time when you
‘‘0.0’’. refuel your car (see page 100 ).
TRIP METER
This meter shows the number of

miles or kilometres driven since you
last reset it. There are two trip
meters: Trip A and Trip B. Each trip
meter works independently, so you
can keep track of two different
distances.

05/10/03 19:39:46 32SEA630_098
Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the When the outside temperature is
front bumper. The temperature 3°C or below right after you turn the
reading can be affected by heat ignition switch to the ON(II) position,
reflection from the road surface, the outside temperature display
engine heat, and the exhaust from blinks for 10 seconds.
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading When the outside temperature drops
when your speed is under 19 mph to 3 °C or below while the car is
(30km/ h). When you start your trip, travelling, you will hear chimes for 5
the sensor is not fully acclimatized, seconds. You will also see the
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE therefore it may take several symbol ‘‘ ’’ on the multi-
minutes until the proper temperature information display.
is displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
This shows the outside Fahrenheit temperature readings near freezing
temperature or the outside (0°C) could mean that ice is forming
Centigrade temperature. on the road surface. If the outside
temperature is incorrectly displayed,
you can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page 109 ).
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:39:51 32SEA630_099
With the ignition switch in the ON

(II) position, the upper part of the
display changes each time you press
the INFO button.
white arrow : Press the INFO button.

05/10/03 19:40:00 32SEA630_100
Trip Computer Average Vehicle Speed

Along with the trip meter, the trip The average vehicle speed you are
computer calculates these values: travelling is displayed in kilometres
per hour (km/h) or miles per hou
Instant Fuel Economy (mph) depending on the display
Range mode you selected.
Elapsed Time
Average Vehicle Speed Average Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy The average fuel mileage is updated
every 10 seconds. When you reset
Instant Fuel Economy trip A or trip B the average fuel
Your current fuel mileage in miles mileage for that trip meter also
per hour (mph) and miles per gallon resets (see page 94 ).
or kilometres per hour (km/h) and
1/100 km.
Range
The estimated distance you can
travel on the fuel remaining in the
tank.
Elapsed Time
The time travelled since you last
tuned the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.

05/10/03 19:40:15 32SEA630_101
Memory Button
See page See page
When a problem is detected with
85, 526 84
your car, a message will be shown on
the multi-information display. If this
See page See page
happens, refer to the applicable
85, 526 378
pages of this owner’s manual, and
follow the instructions.
See page See page
85, 526 63, 70
When there are several messages to
be shown, the system switches the
See page See page
messages every 5 seconds. The
83, 521 61, 83
message is shown until you push the
INFO button. To see the message
See page See page
again, press the INFO button, 5
523, 524 71, 84
seconds after the display disappears.
See page See page
Here is a list of messages shown on
83, 522 88
the multi-information display.
See page See page
85, 390 135
See page See page

86, 392 95

05/10/03 19:40:23 32SEA630_102
See page
15
See page
86, 116
See page
452
See page
121
See page
318, 324
See page
318
See page
105

05/10/06 12:10:38 32SEA630_103
Customized Settings CUSTOMIZE ENTRY CUSTOMIZE MENU CUSTOMIZE SETUP DEFAULT

You can change several car control SPEED ALARM 1 ON/OFF ON, OFF OFF
settings to your preference. SPEED ALARM 1 SETTING 5−200 mph 30 mph
SPEED See page (5−300 km/h) (50 km/h)
To change the settings, the ignition ALARM 103 SPEED ALARM 2 ON/OFF ON, OFF OFF
switch must be in the ON(II) SPEED ALARM 2 SETTING 5−200 mph 50 mph
position. (5−300 km/h) (80 km/h)
WARNING MESSAGE ON, OFF OFF
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY −3°C to 3°C 0°C
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESET ON, OFF OFF
CHG See page with REFUEL
SETTING 106 ELAPSED TIME SET IGN OFF, TRIP A, IGN OFF
TRIP B
PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECT BEEP ON, OFF ON
ACC DISPLAY SPEED UNIT mph, km/h (previous setting)
ENGLISH, ITALIAN,
LANGUAGE See page SPANISH, GERMAN, ENGLISH
112 FRENCH,
PORTUGUESE
DEFAULT See page CANCEL, OK
ALL 113
EXIT

05/10/03 19:40:35 32SEA630_104
Setting Incomplete
A ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears on the multi-
information display if you fail to
customize the settings.

05/10/06 12:10:44 32SEA630_105
Selecting a Customize Group

(II) position, press the INFO button
for more than 3 seconds, then
release it. The CUSTOMIZE ENTRY
screen appears on the multi- See page
information display. Each time you 103
press the INFO button, the display
changes as shown in the illustration.
Select which of these customize See page
menus you want to cange: 106
SPEED ALARM
CHG SETTING See page
LANGUAGE 112
DEFAULT ALL
If you select and press the See page

SEL/RESET button, the normal 113
display is shown again.
dotted-line arrow : Press and hold the INFO button.

black arrow : Press the SEL/RESET button.

05/10/03 19:40:51 32SEA630_106
Speed Alarm
screen appears on the multi-
information display. Each time you
Select which of these customize
menus you want to change:
The settings you can change are:

SPEED ALARM 1 ON/OFF
SPEED ALARM 1 SETTING
SPEED ALARM 2 ON/OFF
SPEED ALARM 2 SETTING
If you select by pressing the

SEL/RESET button, ‘‘CHG
SETTINGS’’ appears again.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:40:59 32SEA630_107
Speed Alarm ON/OFF While the car is travelling, you can Speed Alarm Setting
turn the speed alarm on or off by
running pressing the INFO button.
As shown in the illustration, the

meter symbols have a slanted line
each when speed alarms 1 and 2 are
parking both off.
You can turn the speed alarm You can set the speed only when the
function on or off. The function has car is parked. Each time you select
two options(1 and 2). Select 1 or 2 by ＋, the set speed increases by 5
pressing the INFO button, and press km/h (mph). Each time you select
the SEL/RESET button. The −, the set speed decreases by 5
confirmation screen is shown for 2 km/h (mph). The set speed ranges
seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE from 5 km/h (mph) to 300 km/h
ENTRY returns. An alarm sounds (200 mph).
when the car runs at the set speed.

05/10/03 19:41:04 32SEA630_108
(examples)
Set speed unit : mph
Set speed unit : km/h
When the car speed reaches the set

speed, you will see an indicator on
the multi-information display and
hear a beep.

05/10/03 19:41:12 32SEA630_109
CHG Settings
screen appears on the multi-
information display, Each time you
Select which of these customize
menus you want to change:
The settings you can change are:

PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECT
BEEP
ACC DISPLAY SPEED UNIT
WARNING MESSAGE
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESET
with REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME SET
If you select by pressing the black arrow : Press the SEL/RESET button.
SEL/RESET button, ‘‘CHG
SETTINGS’’ appears again.

05/10/03 19:41:21 32SEA630_110
Pre-Running Car Detect Beep Press the SEL/RESET button. The Adaptive Cruise Control Display Speed
display changes as shown above. Unit
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO button, then press the SEL-
RESET button to enter your
selection.
When your choice is set, the display

shows ‘‘SETUP ON’’ for several
seconds, and then returns to the
CUSTOMIZE MENU screen.
To exit this mode without changing

the current setting, select ,
When PRE-RUNNING CAR and press the SEL/RESET button.
DETECT BEEP is set to ON, one To change the speed unit
beep sounds when the ACC detects a measurement, do this:
vehicle in front of you. You also hear
a beep when that vehicle goes out of
the range of your car’s radar sensor.

05/10/03 19:41:29 32SEA630_111
Press the SEL/RESET button. The Warning Message Before performing this setting, make
display changes. The highlighted sure the a language selection has
unit, mph or km/h, is the current been already made.
setting. To change the setting, press
the INFO button until the unit you To exit this mode without changing
want is highlighted, then press the the current setting, select ,
SEL/RESET button. and press the SEL/RESET button.
When your choice (mph) is set, the

display shows ‘‘mph SETUP’’ for
several seconds, then returns to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.

the current setting, select , When WARNING MESSAGE is set
and press the SEL/RESET button. to ON, a message appears along with
a warning symbol when there is a
problem with the car. Select ON or
OFF by pressing the INFO button,
and enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button. The
confirmation screen appears for 2
seconds, then ‘‘CUSTOMIZE
MENU’’ returns.

05/10/06 12:10:51 32SEA630_112
Adjust Outside Temp. Display ENTRY screen returns.

and press the SEL/RESET button.
You can adjust the outside

temperature shown on the multi-
information display in the range of
−3°C to 3°C.
Adjust the temperature by pressing

the INFO button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
The confirmation screen appears for

2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE

05/10/03 19:41:42 32SEA630_113
Trip A & AVG. FUEL A RESET with To exit this mode without changing
REFUEL the current setting, select ,
You can set whether or not Trip A

and average fueleconomy A are reset
when you refuel your car. Select ON
or OFF by pressing the INFO button,
and enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button. The
confirmation screen appears for 2
seconds, then ‘‘CUSTOMIZE
MENU’’ returns.

05/10/03 19:41:50 32SEA630_114
Elapsed Time Reset IGN OFF − The elapsed time is Select the desired setting by
reset when you turn the ignition pressing the INFO button, and enter
switch to the LOCK(0) position. your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
TRIP A − The elapsed time is reset
when Trip A is reset. The confirmation screen appears for
2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
TRIP B − The elapsed time is reset MENU screen returns.
when Trip B is reset.
You can select from three possible

settings for elapsed time reset:

05/10/03 19:41:57 32SEA630_115
Language
If you select EN
You can select a language used on The confirmation screen appears for
the multi-information display. The 2 seconds, then the normal display
language options are English (EN), appears.
Spanish(ES), Italian(IT), French
(FR), German(DE) and Portuguese To exit this mode without changing
(PT). the current setting, select ,
Press the SEL/RESET button and
make your selection by pressing the
INFO button.

05/10/06 10:41:37 32SEA630_116
Default All
You can initialize all the customized To exit this mode without initializing
settings. the customized settings, select
‘‘CANCEL’’.
After pressing the SEL/RESET,
select ‘‘OK’’ by pressing the INFO
button, then press the SEL/RESET
again. Afterwards, a
‘‘COMPLETED’’ message appears
on the multi-information display for 2
seconds, then the normal display
appears.

05/10/03 19:42:09 32SEA630_117
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
DISTANCE BUTTON INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSCREEN WIPERS

BRIGHTNESS WINDSCREEN WASHERS
HEADLIGHTS/
REAR FOG LAMP/ HAZARD WARNING
FRONT FOG LAMPS/ BUTTON
TURN SIGNALS
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
REAR WINDOW
DEMISTER
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER
VSA OFF SWITCH
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS＊2 TILT/
TELESCOPIC
ADJUSTMENT
HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE HORN＊1 MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS

BUTTONS

05/10/03 19:42:16 32SEA630_118
HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSCREEN

BUTTONS BRIGHTNESS WIPERS＊1
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON WINDSCREEN
WASHERS＊1
CRUISE CONTROL
HEADLIGHTS/ BUTTONS
REAR FOG LAMP/
FRONT FOG LAMPS/
TURN SIGNALS＊1 DISTANCE BUTTON
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER or
SUNROOF SWITCH＊3
REAR WINDOW
DEMISTER
VSA OFF SWITCH
MULTI-INFORMATION
REMOTE AUDIO TILT/
CONTROLS HORN＊2 BUTTONS
TELESCOPIC
VOICE CONTROL ADJUSTMENT LKAS BUTTON
BUTTONS＊4
＊1 : Except for European models, these switches change locations with each other.
＊3 : Australian model

05/10/03 19:42:23 32SEA630_119
Headlights If you leave the lights on with the

ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0), you will hear a
reminder chime when you open the
driver’s door.
When the light switch is in either of

these positions, the lights-on
indicator comes on as a reminder
and you will see the symbol
‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with a
‘‘HEADLIGHTS ON’’ message on
the multi-information display.
The rotating switch on the lever To change from low beams to high
controls the lights. Turning this beams, push the turn signal lever
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns forward until you hear a click. The
on the position lights, tail-lights, and blue high beam indicator will light
rear licence plate lights. Turning the (see page 89 ). To return to low
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns beams, pull the turn signal lever
on the headlights. back.

05/10/03 19:42:27 32SEA630_120
The high beams will stay on for as

long as you hold the lever back, no
matter what position the headlight
switch is in.
To flash the high beams, pull the

turn signal lever back lightly, then
release it. The high beams will come
on and go off.

05/10/03 19:42:35 32SEA630_121
Daytime Running Lights Rear Fog Lamp The rear fog lamp will go off when
(For some types) (For some types) you turn the headlights off. To turn
The daytime running lights come on the rear fog lamp on again, you have
automatically when the ignition to turn the rear fog lamp switch
switch is turned to the ON (II) again with the headlights on.
position. They go out automatically
when the light switch is ON.
REAR FOG LAMP SWITCH
The rear fog lamp switch is located

next to the light control switch. You
can use the rear fog lamp when the
headlights are on (the light control
switch is in the position).
To operate the rear fog lamp, turn

the switch up from the off ( )
position. The indicator in the
instrument panel comes on to
indicate that the rear fog lamp is on.

05/10/03 19:42:45 32SEA630_122
Front and Rear Fog Lamps To turn on the rear fog lamp only, When you turn the light control
(For some types) turn the switch down from the off switch on again, the front fog lamps
( ) position. The indicator in will also turn on. To turn the fog
the instrument panel comes on to lights completely off, turn the fog
indicate that the rear fog lamp is on. light switch down to the off ( )
position.
To operate the front fog lamps, turn
the switch up from the off ( ) To turn the rear fog lamp on again,
position to the position. The you have to turn the fog light switch
indicator comes on as a again with the headlights on
reminder. To turn the rear fog lamp ( position).
on with the front fog lamps, turn the
switch one position up from the
position.
The fog lamp switch is located next The rear fog lamp will go off when
to the light control switch. You can you turn the headlights off. The
control the front fog lamps with this front fog lamps go off when the light
switch when the light control switch control switch is turned to the OFF
is in the or position. position.
You can also use the rear fog lamp

when the light control switch is in
the position or the front fog
lamps are turned on.

05/10/03 19:42:53 32SEA630_123
Automatic Lighting To turn on automatic lighting, turn Do not leave the light switch in
(For some types) the light switch to AUTO at any time. AUTO if you will not be driving the
The lights will come on automatically car for an extended period (a week
AUTO POSITION when the outside light level becomes or more). You should also turn off
low (at dusk, for example). The the lights if you plan to leave the
Lights On indicator comes on as a engine idling or the engine off for a
reminder. The lights and indicator long time. This will prevent the
will turn off automatically when the battery from discharging.
system senses high ambient light.
The lights will remain on when you

turn off the ignition switch. They will
turn off automatically when you open
the driver’s door. To turn them on
again, either turn the ignition switch
The Automatic Lighting feature to the ON (II) position or turn the
turns on the headlights, all other light switch to .
exterior lights, and the instrument
panel lights when it senses low Even with the automatic lighting
ambient light. feature turned on, we recommend
that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas,
such as long tunnels or parking
structures.

05/10/03 19:43:01 32SEA630_124
Automatic Lighting Off Feature The lights turn on again when you
(For some types) unlock or open the driver’s door. If
The Automatic Lighting Off feature you unlock the door, but do not open
turns off the headlights, parking it within 15 seconds, the lights go off.
lights, tail-lights and licence plate With the driver’s door open, you will
light within 15 seconds of removing hear a lights-on reminder chime.
the key from the ignition switch and
closing the driver’s door.
The automatic lighting off feature

activates if you leave the headlight
switch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’
position or if the lights are turned on
LIGHT SENSOR by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position, turn the ignition switch to
The automatic lighting feature is the LOCK (0) position, then open
controlled by a sensor located on top and close the driver’s door.
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquid on it. If you turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position with the
When there is a problem with the headlight switch on, but do not open
automatic lighting feature, you will the door and get out, the lights turn
see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if
symbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ the switch is in the ‘‘AUTO’’
message on the multi-information position).
display.

05/10/03 19:43:08 32SEA630_125
Instrument Panel Brightness Turn Signals
SELECT/RESET KNOB TURN SIGNAL LEVER
The Select/Reset knob on the The level of brightness is shown on Signal a turn or lane change with this
instrument panel controls the the multi-information display while lever. Push down or up on the lever
brightness of the instrument panel you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds to signal a turn. If you push it up or
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the after you finish adjusting. down all the way, the turn signal
brightness. continues to blink even when you
The instrument panel illumination release the lever. It shuts off auto-
dims when you turn the light switch matically as you complete the turn.
to or . To cancel the glare
reduction function, turn the knob
clockwise. When you turn the knob
counterclockwise, the illumination
dims.

05/10/03 19:43:15 32SEA630_126
To signal a lane change, push lightly Windscreen Wipers In intermittent, the wipers operate
on the turn signal lever in the proper every few seconds. The sweep
direction and hold it. The lever will interval will change slightly with
return to the centre position as soon speed; getting shorter as you drive
as you release it. faster. While the vehicle is stopped
and in gear, the wipers sweep the
windscreen whenever you remove
your foot from the brake pedal. In
low speed and high speed, the wipers
run continuously.
This lever controls the windscreen

wipers and washers. It has five
positions;
MIST: mist mode
OFF: off
INT: intermittent
LO: low speed
HI: high speed
To select a position, push the lever

up or down.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:43:20 32SEA630_127
You can vary how often the wipers To operate the wipers in mist mode,
sweep the windscreen by turning the push the control lever up from the
INT TIME ring on the lever. OFF position. The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
If you turn the INT TIME ring to the This gives you a quick way to clear
shortest delay, the wipers will the windscreen.
change from intermittent to low
speed operation when vehicle speed
exceeds 20 km/h (12 mph).

05/10/03 19:43:28 32SEA630_128
Automatic Wipers When the system senses rainfall, it

(For some types) turns on the windscreen wipers and
varies their speed (intermittent, low
speed, or high speed) depending on
how hard it is raining.
When the rotary switch is in the

‘‘LO’’ (low speed) or ‘‘HI’’ (high
speed) position, the windscreen
wipers run at that speed. Automatic
sensing is disabled.
AUTO SENS RING
The automatic wiper system senses You can adjust the sensitivity of the
rainfall and automatically turns on system by turning the AUTO SENS
the windscreen wipers. To enable ring on the lever.
sensing, push the control lever down
from the OFF position to AUTO. Turning the ring anticlockwise:
Lowers sensitivity against rain drop.
Turning the ring clockwise:
Heightens sensitivity against rain
drop.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:43:33 32SEA630_129
If you try to clean the windscreen

around the rainfall sensor using a
cloth soaked with water with the
RAINFALL ignition switch in the ON (II)
SENSOR position and the wiper switch in the
AUTO position, the wiper may
operate unexpectedly and you may
get injured. Make sure to turn off
the wipers before you wash your car.
To operate the wipers in mist mode, The rainfall sensor is located in the
push the control lever up from the windscreen near the rearview mirror.
OFF position. The wipers run at high If the sensor is covered with mud, oil,
speed until you release the lever. dust, etc., the wipers may not
This gives you a quick way to clear operate properly or may operate
the windscreen. unexpectedly.

05/10/03 19:43:42 32SEA630_130
Windscreen Washers Rear Window Demister

The rear window demister will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the demister button to
turn it on and off. The light above/in
the button lights to show the
demister is on. It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition. You have to
turn it on again when you restart the
car.
When you turn on the rear window Cars without navigation system
demister, the power mirror heaters
also turn on. Make sure the rear window is clear
To clean the windscreen, pull back and you have good visibility before
on the wiper control lever. The starting to drive.
washers spray until you release the
lever.
The wipers run at low speed while

you’re pulling the lever, then
complete one more sweep of the
windscreen after you release it.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:43:50 32SEA630_131
Hazard Warning Button Headlight Washer

(For some types)
When you pull back on the wiper
control lever with the headlight
switch ON, the headlight washers
and Windscreen Washers work at
the same time.
The headlight washers use the same

fluid reservoir as the windscreen
washers.
Cars with navigation system
The demister and antenna wires on

the inside of the rear window can be Push the button between the centre
accidentally damaged. When vents to turn on the hazard warning
cleaning the glass, always wipe side lights (four-way flashers). This
to side. causes all outside turn signals and
both turn signal indicators in the
instrument panel to flash. Use these
lights to give a warning to other road
users that your car is causing a
hazard.

05/10/03 19:43:59 32SEA630_132
Steering Wheel Adjustment 3. Move the steering wheel up or

Make any steering wheel adjustment down, and in or out to the desired
before you start driving. position, making sure the wheel
points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
Adjusting the steering wheel gauges and the indicators.
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of 4. Push the lever up to lock the
the car and be seriously steering wheel in that position.
injured in a crash.
5. Make sure you have securely
Adjust the steering wheel locked the steering wheel in place
only when the car is stopped. To adjust the steering wheel: by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
1. Insert the key in the ignition
switch, and unlock the steering
column.
2. Push the lever under the steering

column all the way down.

05/10/03 19:44:07 32SEA630_133
Keys and Locks
Keys These keys contain electronic

circuits that are activated by the
KEY IGNITION KEYS KEY IGNITION KEY IGNITION Immobilizer System. They will not
NUMBER WITH REMOTE NUMBER WITH REMOTE KEY work to start the engine if the
TAG TRANSMITTER TAG TRANSMITTER
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct

sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy

objects on them.
On some models On some models
Keep the keys away from liquids.
Your car comes with two ignition Your keys are supplied with a key If they get wet, dry them
keys. number tag. You will need this key immediately with a soft cloth.
The ignition key fits all the locks on number if you ever have to get a lost
your car: key replaced. Keep the tag stored in
• Ignition a safe place. If you need to replace a
• Driver’s door key, use only Honda-approved key
• Glove box blanks.
• Boot release handle

05/10/03 19:44:15 32SEA630_134
Keys and Locks
Remote transmitter Immobilizer System The system may not recognize your
Your car also comes with one or two The Immobilizer System protects key’s coding if another immobilizer
remote transmitters depending on your car from theft. A properly- key or other metal object is near the
models. The remote transmitter is coded ignition key must be used in ignition switch when you insert the
built into the master key; see page the ignition switch for the engine to key. To make sure the system
137 for an explanation of the remote start. If an improperly-coded key (or recognizes the key code:
transmitter operation. other device) is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled. Do not keep other immobilizer
keys on the same key ring.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the Immobilizer Use a plastic or leather key fob,
System indicator should come on for not metal.
a few seconds, then go out. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the Keep other keys away from your
system does not recognize the car’s key and the ignition switch
coding of the key. Turn the ignition while trying to start the engine.
switch to the LOCK (0) position,
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn If the system repeatedly does not
the switch to the ON (II) position recognize the coding of your key,
again. contact your dealer.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:44:22 32SEA630_135
Keys and Locks
The Immobilizer System indicator (EU models) Ignition Switch

will also blink several times when EC Directives
you turn the ignition switch from the This immobilizer system complies
ON (II) position to the ACCESSORY with the R & TTE (Radio equipment
(I) or LOCK (0) position. and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment and the mutual
Do not attempt to alter this system recognition of their conformity)
or add other devices to it. Electrical Directives.
problems could result that may make
your car undriveable.
If you have lost your key and you

cannot start the engine, contact your
dealer.
The ignition switch is on the right
side of the steering column. It has
four positions:
• LOCK (0)
• ACCESSORY (I)
• ON (II)
• START (III)

05/10/03 19:44:29 32SEA630_136
Keys and Locks
LOCK (0) − You can insert or ON (II) − This is the normal key
remove the key only in this position. position when driving. All features
To switch from ACCESSORY to Removing the key from the and accessories on the car are usable.
LOCK, you must push the key in ignition switch while driving Several of the lights on the instru-
slightly as you turn it. If your car has locks the steering. This can ment panel come on as a test when
an automatic transmission, the shift cause you to lose control. you turn the ignition switch from
lever must also be in Park. The anti- ACCESSORY to ON.
theft lock will lock the steering Remove the key from the
column when you remove the key. ignition switch only when On some types, the headlights come
parked. on automatically in this position.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may sometimes make START (III) − Use this position
it difficult to turn the key from the ACCESSORY (I) − In this position, only to start the engine. The switch
LOCK to the ACCESSORY position. you can operate the audio system returns to the ON (II) position when
Firmly turn the steering wheel to the and the cigarette lighter. you let go of the key.
left or to the right as you turn the
key. The engine will not start if the
Immobilizer System does not recog-
nize the key’s coding (see page 131 ).

05/10/03 19:44:35 32SEA630_137
Keys and Locks
Power Door Locks To lock any passenger’s door when

getting out of the car, push the lock
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK TAB tab down and close the door. To lock
the driver’s door, remove the key
from the ignition switch and push
the lock tab down or push the master
switch down, then close the door.
The master door lock switch allows Each door has a lock tab at the top of
control of all door and boot locks the door. When you push down the
from the driver’s door. Push the top lock tab on the driver’s door, all
of the switch to lock all doors and doors and the boot lock. Pulling up
boot, and push the bottom to unlock the lock tab on the driver’s door only
them. unlocks that door and the boot. The
lock tab on each passenger’s door
only locks and unlocks that door.

05/10/03 19:44:44 32SEA630_138
Keys and Locks
If your car is equipped with the Lockout Prevention

security system, when you lock the If you forget and leave the key in the
doors and the boot with the key, all ignition switch, Lockout Prevention
outside turn signals and both will not allow you to lock the driver’s
indicators in the instrument panel door. You will see the symbol
flash three times to verify the doors ‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with an
and the boot are locked and the ‘‘IGNITION KEY’’ message on the
security system has set (see page multi-information display. With the
299 ). driver’s door open and the key in the
ignition, the master door lock switch
The security system (if equipped) is disabled. However, if the driver’s
activates after you lock the doors door is not open, the master door
KEY and the boot with the lock tab on the lock switch is not disabled. If you try
driver’s door or the master door lock to lock an open driver’s door by
All doors and the boot lock or unlock switch (see page 299 ). pushing down the lock tab, the tabs
when you use the key to lock or on all doors pop out. Pushing down
unlock the driver’s door. On vehicles with boot main switch the lock tab on the front passenger’s
With the boot main switch in the door only locks that door.
On some models OFF position, you cannot open the
You can open or close the windows boot with the boot release even if
by using the key in the driver’s door you unlock the driver’s door with the
(see page 158 ). key, the lock tab on the driver’s door,
the master door lock switch, or the
remote transmitter. See page 143 for
more information.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:44:53 32SEA630_139
Keys and Locks
Super Locking The super locking will not set if any

(For some types) door or the boot lid is not fully closed.
It will be set even if the bonnet, any If there are persons inside the
window or the sunroof is open. car with the super locking set,
they cannot unlock the doors
With the super locking set, the from the inside.
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door, the lock tabs on all Make sure there is no person
doors and the boot release on the inside the car before setting
boot lid are disabled. the super locking.
You can also set the super locking

with the remote transmitter. To set it, On cars with ultrasonic sensor
push the LOCK button twice within If you set the super locking with the
5 seconds (see page 138 ). windows or the sunroof open, the
The super locking helps to protect ultrasonic sensor may activate the
your car and valuables from theft. To To reset the super locking, unlock alarm unexpectedly when the system
set the super locking, insert the key the driver’s door with the key or the senses strong impacts on the vehicle
to the driver’s door lock and turn the remote transmitter. or loud sound.
key towards the front of the car
twice within 5 seconds. On cars with ultrasonic sensor
Only the remote transmitter can
reset the security system. Unlocking
the driver’s door with the key
activates the alarm.

05/10/03 19:45:02 32SEA630_140
Keys and Locks
Remote Transmitter When you push the LOCK button on The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
the remote transmitter, all outside switch is in the centre position) and
LOCK turn signals and both indicators in the spotlights (if the switch is in the
BUTTON the instrumental panel flash three Door position) will come on when
times to verify the doors and the you press the UNLOCK button. If
LED boot are locked and the security you do not open any door or the boot,
system (if equipped) has set. the lights stay on for about 30
seconds, then fade out. If you relock
BOOT
RELEASE When you push the UNLOCK button, the doors and the boot with the
BUTTON all doors and the boot unlock. All remote transmitter before 30
outside turn signals, and both seconds have elapsed, the lights will
UNLOCK indicators in the instrumental panel go off immediately.
BUTTON flash once.
You cannot lock the doors and the
You can lock and unlock your car On some models boot with the remote transmitter if
with the remote transmitter. When You can also open all four power any door or the boot is not fully
you push the LOCK button, all doors windows from outside the car with closed or the key is in the ignition
and the boot lock. the remote transmitter. Refer to switch. You cannot unlock the doors
Power Windows on page 133 . and the boot with the key in the
ignition switch.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:45:12 32SEA630_141
Keys and Locks
If you unlock the doors and the boot Super Locking

with the remote transmitter, but do (For some types)
not open any door or the boot within You can set the super locking with If there are persons inside the
30 seconds, the doors and the boot the remote transmitter. To set the car with the Super Locking
automatically relock and the security super locking, push the LOCK set, they cannot unlock the
system (if equipped) sets. button twice within 5 seconds. doors from the inside.
To open the boot, push the Boot The super locking will not set if any Make sure there is no person
Release button for approximately 1 door is not fully closed. It will be set inside the car before setting
second. even if the bonnet, any window or the Super Locking.
the sunroof is open.
The boot will not open if the key is in
the ignition switch. To reset the super locking, push the
UNLOCK button on the remote
On cars with boot main switch transmitter, or unlock the driver’s
You can open the boot with the boot door with the key.
release button on the remote
transmitter regardless of the position On cars with ultrasonic sensor
of the main switch on the boot panel. Only the remote transmitter can
The boot will not open if the key is in reset the security system. Unlocking
the ignition switch. See page 118 for the driver’s door with the key
more information. activates the alarm.
See page 136 for information on the

super locking.

05/10/03 19:45:20 32SEA630_142
Keys and Locks
Replacing the Battery

When the remote transmitter’s
battery begins to get weak, it may
take several pushes on the button to
lock or unlock the doors and the
boot, and the LED will not light. BATTERY
Replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616

SCREW
TAB
To replace the battery: 3. Inside the transmitter, separate

the inner cover from the keypad
1. Remove the screw at the base of by releasing the two tabs on the
the transmitter with a small cover.
Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying

its middle seam with your
fingernail.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:45:29 32SEA630_143
Keys and Locks
4. Remove the old battery from the (EU models) Transmitter Care
back of the inner cover, and note EC Directives Avoid severe shock to the trans-
the polarity. Make sure the This keyless entry system complies mitter, such as dropping or throwing
polarity of the new battery is the with the R & TTE (Radio equipment it. Also, protect it from extreme hot
same (＋ side facing down), then and Telecommunications Terminal or cold temperatures.
insert it into the back of the cover. Equipment and the mutual
recognition of their conformity) Clean the transmitter case with a
5. Install the parts in reverse order. Directives. soft cloth. Do not use strong
cleaners or solvents that could harm
the case. Immersing the transmitter
in any liquid will harm the trans-
An improperly disposed battery can mitter and cause it to not function
hurt the environment. properly.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal. If you lose a transmitter, you will
need to have the replacement
programmed to your car’s system by
your dealer. Any other transmitters
you have will also need to be
reprogrammed.

05/10/03 19:45:39 32SEA630_144
Keys and Locks
Childproof Door Locks Boot You can also lock and unlock the
boot by using the remote transmitter,
the master door lock switch or the
Pull driver’s door lock tab (see pages
134 and 137 ).
When you lock the doors and the

boot with the remote transmitter, all
outside turn signals and both
indicators in the instrument panel
flash three times to verify the doors
BOOT RELEASE and the boot are locked and the
LEVER HANDLE security system has set (see page
299 ).
The childproof door locks are There are two ways to open the boot:
designed to prevent children seated If your car is equipped with the
in the rear from accidentally opening Pull up on the boot release handle security system, the lights will also
the rear doors. Each rear door has a next to the driver’s seat. flash three times when the doors and
lock lever near the edge. With the the boot are locked with the key on
lever in the LOCK position, the door Press and hold the boot release the driver’s door.
cannot be opened from the inside button on the remote transmitter.
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up and use the outside door
handle.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:45:46 32SEA630_145
Keys and Locks
RELEASE BOOT HANDLE IGNITION KEY
To open the boot, push the release, To close the boot, hold the boot To protect items in the boot, you can
then lift up the boot lid. handle and lower the boot, then lock the boot release handle with the
press down on the boot lid. ignition key.
See page 364 for the information on

luggage loading. Keep the boot lid
closed at all times while driving to
avoid damaging the lid, and to
prevent exhaust gas from getting
into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 74 .

05/10/03 19:45:54 32SEA630_146
Keys and Locks
On cars with boot main switch Boot Main Switch Even if the boot main switch is in the
Even if the boot release handle is (For some types) OFF position, you can open the boot
locked, turn off the boot main switch with the boot release button on the
to disable the boot release. With this BOOT MAIN SWITCH remote transmitter.
main switch in the ON position, the
boot will be unlocked when you NOTE: To protect your valuables in
unlock the driver’s door with the key, the boot from theft by breaking into
the lock tab on the driver’s door, the the car through the window, we
master door lock switch, or the recommend that you set the boot
remote transmitter. main switch to the OFF position and
ON lock the boot release handle with the
On cars with super locking OFF key.
Even if the boot release handle is
locked, set the super locking to
disable the boot release (see page
136 ). To protect items in the boot, your
car has a boot main switch under the
right centre of the boot opening.
Turn off the boot main switch to

disable the boot release on the boot
lid when the driver’s door is
unlocked with the key, the lock tab
on the driver’s door, the master door
lock switch, or the remote
transmitter.

05/10/03 19:46:00 32SEA630_147
Keys and Locks
Glove Box
An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your
passenger in a crash, even if
the passenger is wearing the
seat belt.
Always keep the glove box

closed while driving.
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the

handle to the centre console side.
Close it with a firm push. Lock or
unlock the glove box with the
ignition key.
The glove box light comes on when

the position lights are on.

05/10/03 19:46:06 32SEA630_148
Seat Adjustments
Front Seat Adjustments

See pages 15 − 17 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To adjust the seat forward and To change the angle of the seat-back,
backward, pull up on the bar under pull up on the lever on the outside of
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move the seat bottom. Move the seat-back
the seat to the desired position and to the desired position and release
release the bar. Try to move the seat the lever. Let the seat-back latch into
to make sure it is locked in position. the new position.

05/10/03 19:46:16 32SEA630_149
Seat Adjustments
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Driver’s Seat Power Adjustments

(For some types) (For some types)
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
The two power seat adjustment
switches are on the outside edge of
the seat bottom. The horizontal
switch adjusts the seat bottom in
several directions. The short vertical
switch adjusts the seat-back angle.
LEVER
You can adjust the seat with the Push the horizontal switch forward
ignition switch in any position. Make or backward to move the seat
The height of your driver’s seat is all seat adjustments before you start forward or backward.
adjustable. To raise the seat bottom, driving.
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push down the lever
repeatedly.
Make sure to pull the lever upward
or downward to its full range.
Make all adjustments before you

start driving.

05/10/03 19:46:22 32SEA630_150
Seat Adjustments
Pull up or push down on the front of Pull the centre of the horizontal Adjust the seat-back angle by
the switch to move the seat bottom’s switch up to raise the seat. Push it pushing the rear switch in the
front edge up or down. Pull up or down to lower the seat. direction you want to move.
push down on the rear of the switch
to move the rear of the seat bottom
up or down.

05/10/03 19:46:29 32SEA630_151
Seat Adjustments
Driver’s Lumbar Support Front Passenger’s Seat Power Adjust the seat-back angle by
Adjustments pushing the vertical switch in the
(For some types) direction you want to move.
LEVER
Vary the lumbar support by moving

the lever on the side of the seat-back.
Move the lever forward to increase The seat adjustment switches are on
support and backward to decrease it. the outside edge of the seat bottom.
Push the long horizontal switch
forward or backward to move the
seat bottom in that direction.

05/10/03 19:46:36 32SEA630_152
Seat Adjustments
Head Restraints FRONT REAR OUTSIDE POSITION

information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
Your car has adjustable head

restraints on the front seats. They
are also on the outside positions of
the rear seat. On some types, the
centre position of the rear seat also
has the head restraint. The centre
head restraint should be used at the RELEASE BUTTON RELEASE BUTTON
highest position.
The head restraints adjust for height. To remove a head restraint for
The head restraints help protect you You need both hands to adjust the cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
and your passengers from whiplash restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it it will go. Push the release button
and other injuries. They are most while driving. To raise it, pull upward. and pull the restraint out of the seat-
effective when you adjust them so To lower the restraint, push the back.
the back of the occupant’s head rests release button sideways, and push
against the centre of the restraint. A the restraint down.
taller person should adjust the
restraint as high as possible.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:46:43 32SEA630_153
Seat Adjustments, Folding Rear Seat
REAR CENTRE POSITION

Folding Rear Seat
The back of the rear seat folds down
to give you direct access to the boot.
Each side folds down separately.
With only half the seat folded, you
can still carry a passenger in the
back seat. The seat-back can be
released from inside the boot.
If the rear head restraints get caught

RELEASE on the front seat-backs and you
BUTTON cannot fold down the rear seat fully, GUIDE CENTRE SHOULDER BELT
you can remove the head restraints.
When you use the head restraint on Pull the restraint out of the seat-back When storing luggage, you can move
the rear centre seating position, by pressing the release button (see the rear centre shoulder belt out of
adjust it to the highest position by page 149 ). the way by removing the belt from
pulling it upward. You cannot use the guide.
this head restraint in the lower
position.

05/10/03 19:46:51 32SEA630_154
Folding Rear Seat
To lock the seat-back upright, push it Never drive with the seat-back
firmly against the boot panel. Make folded down and the boot lid open.
sure it is latched in place by pulling See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
on the top of the seat. page 74 .
Do not put any heavy items on the

Pull seat-back when it is folded.
Always replace the rear head
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are restraints when the seat-
positioned in front of the rear seat- backs are returned to upright
back whenever the seat-back is in its position.
RELEASE upright position.
To release the seat-back from inside Make sure all items in the boot, or
the boot, pull the release under the items extending through the opening
boot panel. Push the seat-back down, into the back seat, are secured.
then let go of the release. Loose items can fly forward and
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See Carrying Luggage on
page 364 .
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:46:55 32SEA630_155
Rear Seat Armrest
The rear seat armrest is located in

the centre of the rear seat. Pivot it
down to use it.
A beverage holder is located in the

armrest.

05/10/03 19:47:02 32SEA630_156
Seat Heaters (For some types)
The HI or LO indicator lights and Follow these precautions whenever

remains lit until you turn it off by you use the seat heaters:
pushing the opposite side of the
switch lightly. The indicator will turn Use the HI setting only to heat the
off. seats quickly. Select the LO
setting when the seats feel warm.
In HI, the heater turns off when the The HI setting draws large
seat gets warm, and turns back on amounts of current from the
after the seat’s temperature drops. It battery.
SEAT continues to cycle as long as you
HEATER leave it set on HI. The HI indicator Do not use the seat heaters, even
SWITCH remains lit as a reminder that you on the LO setting, if the engine is
have the heater on. left idling for an extended period.
Both front seats are equipped with This can weaken the battery,
seat heaters. Because of the sensors In LO, the heater runs continuously. causing hard starting.
for the side airbag system, there is It does not cycle with temperature
no heater in the passenger’s seat- changes.
back. The ignition switch must be
ON (II) to use the heaters. Push the
front of the switch, HI, to rapidly
heat up the seat. After the seat
reaches a comfortable temperature,
select LO by pushing the back of the
switch. This will keep the seat warm.

05/10/03 19:47:08 32SEA630_157
Headlight Adjuster (For some types)
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER DIAL 0: A driver or a driver and passenger On cars with headlights bulbs of high
in the front seat. voltage discharge tube
1: Five persons in the front and rear Your car is equipped with an
seats. Automatic Headlight Adjusting
2: Five persons in the front and rear system that senses changes in the
seats and luggage in the boot, car posture due to riding and loading
within the limits of maximum conditions of the passengers and
permissible vehicle weight. their luggage and adjusts the vertical
3: A driver and luggage in the boot, angle of the headlights (low beam)
within the limits of maximum automatically.
permissible axle weight and
maximum permissible vehicle
weight.
The vertical angle of the headlights
(low beam) can be adjusted accord-
ing to the number of persons and the
loading weight in the boot compart-
ment.
Turn the adjusting dial to select an

appropriate angle of the headlights.

05/10/03 19:47:15 32SEA630_158
Power Windows
Your car’s windows are electrically- DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

powered. Turn the ignition switch to
ON (II) to raise or lower any window. Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers
Each door has a switch that controls can cause serious injury.
its window. To open the window,
push the switch down and hold it. Make sure your passengers
Release the switch when you want are away from the windows
the window to stop. Close the before closing them.
window by pulling back on the
switch and holding it.
MAIN SWITCH WARNING: Always take the ignition
key with you whenever you leave the car
The driver’s door armrest has a alone (with other occupants).
master power window control panel.
To open any of the passenger’s win-
dows, push down on the appropriate
switch and hold it until the window
reaches the desired position. To
close the window, pull back on the
window switch. Release the switch
when the window gets to the position
you want.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:47:22 32SEA630_159
Power Windows
The master control panel also con- The MAIN switch controls power to Auto Reverse
tains these extra features: the passengers’ windows. When you If the driver’s window runs into any
push in the MAIN switch, the obstacle while it is closing
AUTO − To open the driver’s passengers’ windows cannot be automatically, it will reverse
window fully, push the window raised or lowered. The MAIN switch direction, and then stop. To close the
switch firmly down, then release it. does not affect the driver’s window. window, remove the obstacle, then
The window automatically goes To cancel this feature, push on the use the window switch again.
down all the way. To stop the switch again to get it to pop out.
window from going all the way down, Keep the MAIN switch pushed in Auto reverse stops sensing when the
pull back on the window switch when you have children in the car so window is almost closed. You should
briefly. they do not injure themselves by always check that all passengers and
operating the windows objects are away from the window
To close the driver’s window fully, unintentionally. before closing it.
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. The window The lights inside the switches come
automatically goes all the way up. To on when you turn the ignition switch
stop the window from going all the to ON (II).
way up, push down on the window
switch briefly.
To open or close the driver’s window

partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.

05/10/03 19:47:28 32SEA630_160
Power Windows
If your car’s battery is disconnected The power window system has a key-
or goes dead, or the driver’s window off delay function. The windows will
fuse is removed, the AUTO function still operate for up to 10 minutes (45
will be disabled. The power window seconds on some types) after you
system needs to be reset after turn off the ignition. Opening either
reconnecting the battery or installing front door cancels the delay function.
the fuse. You should do the following. You must turn the ignition switch to
ON (II) again before you can raise or
1. Start the engine. Push down on lower the windows.
the driver’s window switch until
the window is fully open.
2. Pull back on the driver’s window

switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operate

properly after resetting, have your
car checked by a dealer.

05/10/03 19:47:40 32SEA630_161
Power Windows
Opening the Windows with the 3. Turn the key clockwise again and
Remote Transmitter UNLOCK hold it. All four windows start to
BUTTON
(For some types) open. To stop the windows,
You can open all of the windows release the key.
from the outside with the remote
transmitter. 4. To open the windows further, turn
Open and hold the key again (within
1. Press the UNLOCK button once 10 seconds).
to unlock the doors and the boot. Close
NOTE: If the window stops before
2. Press the UNLOCK button a the desired position, repeat steps 2
second time, and hold it. All four and 3.
windows start to open. To stop the
windows, release the button. Opening/Closing the Windows
with the Key
3. To open the windows further, (For some types)
press the button again. You can open and close the windows
with the key in the driver’s door lock.
You cannot close the windows with
the remote transmitter. To open:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
2. Turn the key clockwise, then

release it.

05/10/03 19:47:52 32SEA630_162
Power Windows, Sunroof
To close: Sunroof To open the sunroof, pull the sunroof

1. Insert the key in the driver’s door (For some types) switch backward and hold it. Release
lock. the switch when the sunroof gets to
SUNROOF SWITCH the desired position. To close the
2. Turn the key anticlockwise, then sunroof, push the sunroof switch
release it. forward and hold it.
3. Turn the key anticlockwise again, To tilt the sunroof, push the centre
and hold it. All four windows start of the sunroof switch straight up. To
to close. To stop the windows, stop the sunroof from tilting fully
release the key. open, push the sunroof switch
forward.
4. To close the windows further, turn
and hold the key again (within Make sure everyone’s hands are
10 seconds). away from the sunroof before
The sunroof switch is located on the opening or closing it.
NOTE: If the window stops before ceiling between the spotlights. The
the desired position, repeat steps 2 ignition switch must be in the ON
and 3. (II) position to operate the sunroof.
On some models, the sunroof switch

is located under the side air vent
(see the next page).
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:48:01 32SEA630_163
Sunroof
To tilt up the back of the sunroof, The sunroof has a key-off delay. You
press and hold the centre button can still open and close the sunroof
( ). To close the sunroof, for up to 10 minutes (45 seconds on
press and hold the upper part of the some types) after you turn off the
switch ( ). To open the ignition. The key-off delay cancels as
sunroof, press and hold the lower soon as you open either front door.
part of the switch ( ). Release You must then turn the ignition to
the switch when the sunroof gets to ON (II) for the sunroof to operate.
the desired position. Make sure
everyone’s hands are away from the
sunroof before opening or closing it.
If you try to open the sunroof in
below-freezing temperatures, or
SUNROOF SWITCH when it is covered with snow or ice,
Opening or closing the you can damage the sunroof panel or
On some models sunroof on someone’s hands motor.
The sunroof has two positions: it can or fingers can cause serious
be tilted up in the back for injury. WARNING: Always take the ignition
ventilation, or it can be slide back key with you whenever you leave the car
into the roof. Use the switch under Make sure all hands and alone (with other occupants).
the driver’s side dashboard vent to fingers are clear of the
operate the sunroof. The ignition sunroof before opening or WARNING: Extending the head, arms
switch must be ON (II). closing it. or other parts of the body through the
sunroof while the vehicle is moving can
cause serious injury or death.

05/10/03 19:48:08 32SEA630_164
Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors INDICATOR SENSOR

clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
TAB
BUTTON
The inside mirror has day and night The inside mirror can automatically
positions. The night position reduces darken to reduce glare. To turn on
glare from headlights behind you. this feature, press the button on the
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
the mirror to select the day or night indicator comes on as a reminder.
position. When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
car behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this sensing.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:48:15 32SEA630_165
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 4. When you finish, turn the

adjustment knob to the centre
ADJUSTMENT KNOB (off) position. This turns off the
adjustment knob so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
Adjust the outside mirrors with the 3. Push or pull the adjustment knob
adjustment knob on the driver’s door in the appropriate direction to
armrest: move the mirror right, left, up, or
down.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L (left

side) or R (right side).

05/10/03 19:48:23 32SEA630_166
Mirrors
Power Mirror Heaters When you turn on the rear window Folding Door Mirrors
demister, the power mirror heaters (For some types)
POWER MIRROR HEATER BUTTON also turn on (see page 127 ).
FOLDING MIRROR SWITCH
Push
On some types, the outside mirrors

are heated to remove fog and frost. Door mirrors can be folded by the
With the ignition switch ON (II), folding switch next to the main
turn on the heaters by pressing the switch, which enables you to park
button. The light in the button your car in a limited parking space
comes on as a reminder. Press the easily. Make sure to fold out the
button again to turn the heaters off. mirrors before you start driving.
With the ignition switch ON (II),
press the folding switch to fold up
both outside mirrors simultaneously.
To fold out, press the switch again.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:48:30 32SEA630_167
Mirrors, Parking Brake
Never drive your car with the Parking Brake If you drive at certain speeds without
outside mirrors folded. fully releasing the parking brake, the
PARKING BRAKE LEVER beeper sounds continuously.
Driving the car with the parking

brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles.
To apply the parking brake, pull the

lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released with the
engine running (see page 85 ).

05/10/03 19:48:38 32SEA630_168
Console Compartment, Armrest
Console Compartment Armrest

RIGHT LEVER LEFT LEVER
CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT
To open the console compartment, You can put small items in the tray To use the console lid as an armrest,
pull up on the right lever and lift the located in the console compartment slide it to the desired position.
armrest. lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
left lever and lift up the armrest. Make sure the passenger’s hands or
To close it, lower the armrest, and fingers are away from the armrest
push it down until it latches. before moving it.

05/10/03 19:48:44 32SEA630_169
Beverage Holders
Push
To use the front beverage holder, Be careful when you are using the The rear seat also has a beverage
push on the lid. The beverage holder beverage holders. A spilled liquid holder in the centre armrest. To use
lid is spring-loaded and will swing that is very hot can scald you or your it, pivot the armrest down.
open. To close it, push it down until it passengers. Spilled liquids can also
latches. damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.

05/10/03 19:48:52 32SEA630_170
Centre Pocket, Coin Box
Centre Pocket Coin Box

(For some types)
Push
COIN BOX
The coin box is located under the air

To open the centre pocket, push- On some models vent. To open the coin box, swing
down on the centre of the lid to To open the centre pocket, pull down the upper edge of the lid down. Close
unlatch it. It will swing open the lid. it with a firm push.
automatically.
To close it, push the lid down until it
latches.
This pocket can store up to 12
Compact Discs.

05/10/03 19:49:02 32SEA630_171
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror, Coat Hook
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror Coat Hook

COAT HOOK
SUN VISOR VANITY MIRROR
To use the sun visor, pull it down. To use a vanity mirror on the back of To use a coat hook, slide it out
You can also use the sun visor at the the sun visor, pull up the cover. slightly, then pull it down.
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun On some models Make sure the coat hook is pulled up
visor toward the side window. The light beside the mirror comes when you are not using it. This hook
on when you pull up the cover. is not designed for large or heavy
Make sure you put the sun visor items.
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.

05/10/03 19:49:09 32SEA630_172
Coat Hook, Sunglasses Holder
Sunglasses Holder
(For some types)
On vehicles with side curtain
airbags, do not put a coat
hanger or hard objects on a
coat hook. This could result
in injuries if your side curtain Push
airbag inflates.
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push Some larger styles of sunglasses

on the front edge. It will unlatch and may not fit in the holder.
swing down. To close it, push it until
it latches. Make sure the holder is You may also store small items in
closed while you are driving. this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.

05/10/03 19:49:17 32SEA630_173
Accessory Power Socket, Cigarette Lighter
Accessory Power Socket Cigarette Lighter The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position
for the cigarette lighter to work. To
heat up the lighter, push it in. It will
pop out when it is ready for use. Do
not hold the lighter in while it is
heating up, you could cause it to
overheat.
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
To use the accessory power socket, The cigarette lighter is located next
pull the cover up. The ignition switch to the ashtray under the lid. To use it,
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or pull up the lid.
ON (II) position.
This socket is intended to supply

power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
It will not power an automotive type

cigarette lighter element.

05/10/03 19:49:23 32SEA630_174
Ashtrays
LID FRONT REAR
ASHTRAY ASHTRAY
Open the front ashtray by lifting the The rear ashtray is at the rear end of
lid up. To remove it for emptying, the centre console. Open the ashtray
open the lid, then lift up the ashtray by swinging the upper edge of the lid
by pulling up its right side slightly. down. To remove the ashtray for
emptying, open it, then lift up and
out.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:49:29 32SEA630_175
Ashtrays, Interior Lights
Ceiling Light After all doors are closed tightly, the

light dims slightly, then fades out in
Use the ashtray only for cigarettes, CENTRE POSITION about 30 seconds. In the ON position,
cigars, and other smoking materials. the ceiling light stays on
To prevent a possible fire and continuously.
damage to your car, don’t put paper
or other things that can burn in the ON The ceiling light (with the switch in
ashtray. the centre position) also comes on
when you unlock the door with the
OFF remote transmitter (see page 137 ).
The light fades out after all doors are
closed.
The ceiling light has a three-position

switch. In the OFF position, the light
does not come on. In the centre
position, the ceiling light comes on
when you open any door.

05/10/03 19:49:35 32SEA630_176
Interior Lights
The ceiling light (with the switch in Spotlights

the centre position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
If you leave any door open with the

key not in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after 3
minutes.
Cars with sunroof
Turn on a spotlight by pushing the

lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at all
times.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:49:43 32SEA630_177
Interior Lights
The spotlights (with the switch in Courtesy Lights

the DOOR position) also come on
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT
when you unlock the door with the
remote transmitter, and when you
remove the key from the ignition
switch. (See Ceiling Light on page
OFF
172 .)
DOOR
Cars with sunroof FRONT DOOR LIGHT
On some models The courtesy light in each front door

The spotlights have a two-position comes on when the door is opened,
switch. In the DOOR position, the and goes out when the door is closed.
lights come on when you open any
door. In the OFF position, the lights Your car also has a courtesy light in
do not come on. the ignition switch. This light comes
on when you open the driver’s door.
It fades out in about 30 seconds after
the door is closed.

05/10/03 19:49:48 32SEA630_178
Comfort and Convenience Features
The heating and air conditioning Climate Control System ................ 176 Hands-Free Telephone System.... 331
systems in your car provide a com- Without Navigation System
fortable driving environment in all Fully-automatic Operation ........ 178
weather conditions. Semi-automatic Operation ........ 179
Dual Temperature Control ....... 184
The standard audio system has With Navigation System
many features. This section de- Fully-automatic Operation ........ 185
scribes those features and how to Semi-automatic Operation ........ 186
use them. Dual Temperature Control ....... 192
Hot Gas Heater System ............ 193
(For some types) Sunlight Sensor/
The security system helps to dis- Temperature Sensor ............. 194
courage vandalism and theft of your Audio System ................................. 195
car. Audio System (A Type) ................ 199
Audio System (B Type) ................ 220
Audio System (C, D Type) ........... 244
Audio System (E Type) ................ 270
Protecting Compact Discs ........ 291
Caring for the Cassette
Player ...................................... 296
Remote Audio Controls ............ 297
Security System ............................. 299
Ultrasonic Sensor ...................... 301
Cruise Control ................................ 302
Adaptive Cruise Control ............... 305
Lane Keeping Assist System........ 322
Comfort and Convenience Features 175

05/10/03 19:49:55 32SEA630_179
Climate Control System
The automatic climate control CENTRE VENTS DRIVER’S SIDE VENT

system in your car picks the proper TABS TAB
combination of air conditioning,
heating, and ventilation to maintain
the interior temperature you select.
The system also adjusts the fan
speed and air flow levels.
You can adjust the temperatures of Close

the driver’s side and the passenger’s Open
side independently (see pages
184 and 192 ).
The direction of air flow from the To adjust the air flow from each vent, The side vents can be opened and
vents in the centre and each side of move the tab in the centre of each closed with the dials underneath
the dashboard is adjustable. vent up-and-down and side-to-side. them.
176 Comfort and Convenience Features

05/10/03 19:50:01 32SEA630_180
PASSENGER’S SIDE VENT

TAB
Close
Open
The climate control system draws air

through the exterior vents at the
bottom of the windscreen. Keep
these vents clear of leaves and other
debris.
For the climate control system to

provide heating and cooling, the
engine must be running.

05/10/03 19:50:07 32SEA630_181
Without Navigation System TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

Fully-automatic Operation
To put the Automatic Climate DRIVER’S SIDE FAN CONTROL PASSENGER’S SIDE
Control in fully-automatic mode, TEMPERATURE BUTTONS TEMPERATURE
press the AUTO button, then set the CONTROL DIAL CONTROL DIAL
desired temperature by turning the
driver’s temperature control dial.
You will see AUTO in the system’s
display.
The system automatically selects the

proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
AUTO BUTTON
OFF BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON

05/10/03 19:50:17 32SEA630_182
When you set the temperature to its Pressing the OFF button shuts the When you turn the A/C off, the sys-
lower limit ‘‘ ’’ or its upper climate control system completely tem cannot regulate the inside tem-
limit ‘‘ ’’, the system runs at off. No air flow can cause the perature if you set the dial below the
full cooling or heating only. It does windows to fog up. It is outside temperature. With the A/C
not regulate the interior temperature. recommended that you keep the fan off, use the temperature control dial
on at all times so stale air and to adjust the temperature of the air
In cold weather, the fan will not moisture do not build up in the flow to a comfortable setting.
come on automatically until the car interior and cause fogging.
has been driven for a short time and Recirculation Button
the heater starts to develop warm air. Semi-automatic Operation This button controls the source of air
You can manually select various going into the system. When the
On Diesel models only functions of the Climate Control indicator in this button is lit, air from
Your car has the hot gas heater system when it is in fully-automatic the car’s interior is sent through the
system. It assists the heater to warm mode. All other features remain auto- system again (Recirculation mode).
the air (see page 193 ). matically controlled. Making any When the indicator is off, air is
manual selection causes the word brought in from outside the car
AUTO in the display to go out. (Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button the system in recirculation mode
Press the A/C button to turn the air when driving through an area of
conditioning on and off. You will see smoke or fumes.
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

05/10/03 19:50:24 32SEA630_183
Fan Control Buttons

You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing the fan control FAN CONTROL BUTTONS MODE BUTTON
buttons: ▲ to increase the fan’s
speed, or ▼ to decrease the fan’s AIR CONDITIONING
speed. BUTTON
Mode Button
Use the MODE button to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents in all modes; you can turn it off
with the dial below each vent. Each
time you press the MODE button,
the display shows the mode selected.
Press the button four times to see all
the modes.
Dual Button
Press the DUAL button to select
dual temperature control mode (see
page 183 ). DUAL BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON

05/10/03 19:50:30 32SEA630_184
The main air flow is divided

between the floor vents and
defroster vents at the base of the
windscreen.
The main air flow comes

from the floor vents.

05/10/03 19:50:36 32SEA630_185

between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.

from the dashboard vents.

05/10/03 19:50:43 32SEA630_186
The button directs the main

air flow to the windscreen for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you select , the A/C

turns on automatically and the
system selects Fresh Air mode. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
increase air flow to the windscreen
by closing the side vents in the
dashboard.
When you turn off by

pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings. DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
Rear Window Demister Button CONTROL DIAL CONTROL DIAL
This button turns the rear window
demister on and off (see page 127 ). DUAL BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEMISTER BUTTON

05/10/03 19:50:49 32SEA630_187
Dual Temperature Control DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

Your car is equipped with two
temperature control dials, one for
the driver, and one for the passenger.
The driver’s side and the passenger’s
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these dials when the
green indicator in the DUAL button
is lit.
Temperature Control Dials

Push the fan, the A/C, the AUTO, or
the button, and the set
temperatures appear in the display.
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, you can adjust both To set the driver’s side temperature
sides to the same temperature by to a different value than the
turning the driver’s control dial. passenger’s, press the DUAL button,
then turn the driver’s control dial. To
set the passenger’s side to a
different value than the driver’s side,
turn the passenger’s side
temperature control dial (see page
178 ). You can adjust the passenger’s
side without pressing the DUAL
button first.

05/10/03 19:50:56 32SEA630_188
With Navigation System

Fully-automatic Operation TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
To put the Automatic Climate
Control in fully-automatic mode,
press the AUTO button. The
indicator in the button will light.
Then set the desired temperature by
pressing the temperature buttons: ▲
to raise the temperature above the
displayed value, or ▼ to lower the
temperature.
The system automatically selects the OFF BUTTON RECIRCULATION

proper mix of conditioned and/or AUTO BUTTON BUTTON
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

CONTROL BUTTONS CONTROL BUTTONS

05/10/03 19:51:04 32SEA630_189
When you set the temperature to its Pressing the OFF button shuts the Semi-automatic Operation
lower limit ‘‘ ’’ or its upper climate control system completely You can manually select various
limit ‘‘ ’’, the system runs at off. No air flow can cause the functions of the Climate Control
full cooling or heating only. It does windows to fog up. It is system when it is in fully automatic
not regulate the interior temperature. recommended that you keep the fan mode. All other features remain
on at all times so stale air and automatically controlled. Some of
In cold weather, the fan will not moisture do not build up in the these functions appear in the
come on automatically until the car interior and cause fogging. Navigation System display. Press the
has been driven for a short time and A/C button next to the display to
the heater starts to develop warm air. show these functions. Making any
manual selection causes the
On Diesel models only indicator in the AUTO button to go
Your car has the hot gas heater out.
system. It assists the heater to warm
the air (see page 193 ).

05/10/03 19:51:10 32SEA630_190
Air Conditioning (A/C) Icons

Touching ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ in the
display turns the air conditioning on DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
and off. You will see A/C ON or A/C TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the sys-

tem cannot regulate the inside tem-
perature if you set it below the out-
side temperature. With the A/C off,
use the temperature control buttons
to adjust the temperature of the air
flow to a comfortable setting.
AIR
CONDITIONING
(A/C) ICONS
A/C BUTTON MODE ICONS
FAN CONTROL
ICONS

05/10/03 19:51:17 32SEA630_191
Mode Icons
Use the MODE icons in the display
to select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard corner vents and the side
vents in all modes.

between the floor vents and
defroster vents at the base of the
windscreen.

from the floor vents.

05/10/03 19:51:23 32SEA630_192

between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.

from the dashboard vents.

05/10/03 19:51:30 32SEA630_193
Fan Control Icons

You can manually select the fan
speed by touching any of the fan
control icons on the display.
Recirculation Button
This button controls the source of air
going into the system. When the
indicator in this button is lit, air from
the car’s interior is sent through the
system again (Recirculation mode).
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from outside the car
(Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
the system in recirculation mode
when driving through an area of
smoke or fumes.
Dual Button
Press the DUAL button to select
DUAL BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON
dual temperature control mode (see
page 192 ).

05/10/03 19:51:37 32SEA630_194
The button directs the main

air flow to the windscreen for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you select , the A/C

turns on automatically and the
system selects Fresh Air mode. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
increase air flow to the windscreen
by closing the side vents in the
dashboard.
When you turn off by

pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
Rear Window Demister Button

This button turns the rear window
demister on and off (see page 127 ).
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
CONTROL BUTTONS CONTROL BUTTONS
DUAL BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEMISTER BUTTON

05/10/03 19:51:44 32SEA630_195
Dual Temperature Control DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

Your car has four temperature
control buttons on the climate
control panel, two for the driver and
two for the passenger. The driver’s
and passenger’s sides can be
controlled independently by pushing
these buttons when the green
indicator in the DUAL button is lit.
Temperature Control Buttons

Push AUTO or and the set
temperatures appear in the display.
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, you can adjust both
sides to the same temperature by
pressing the ▲ or ▼ buttons on the
driver’s side.
DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE PASSENGER’S SIDE

CONTROL BUTTONS TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DUAL BUTTON BUTTONS

05/10/03 19:51:55 32SEA630_196
To set the driver’s side temperature Hot Gas Heater System After the engine warms up or the
to a different value than the On Diesel models only outside temperature is high, the hot
passenger’s, press the DUAL button, Your car has the hot gas heater gas heater system will stop
then press the ▲ or ▼ buttons on system. It assists the heater until the automatically.
the driver’s side. To set the engine warms up after you start the
passenger’s side to a different value engine. This system uses your car’s You may hear some noise from the
than the driver’s, press the ▲ or ▼ air conditioning system to warm the engine compartment. This is normal;
buttons on the passenger’s side. You air. Under the following conditions, it is the hot gas heater activation.
can adjust the passenger’s side the hot gas heater system operates
without pressing the DUAL button automatically. The hot gas heater system will not
first. activate if the outside temperature is
The engine coolant is cold (about too cold (under −30°C).
When you set the temperature to its under 75°C).
lower limit or its upper limit, it will be
displayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’. The outside temperature is low
(under about 5°C).
The temperature control dial is set

to any position except for the
‘‘ ’’. (The interior of the car
is cold.)
The fan is set to the desired speed.

05/10/03 19:52:00 32SEA630_197
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The climate control system has two

sensors. A sunlight sensor is located
in the top of the dashboard and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.

05/10/03 19:52:06 32SEA630_198
Audio System
Your car has one of the audio

systems described in this section. (A Type)
Read the appropriate pages in this
section for operation of the audio
systems installed in your car.
page 199 to 219 for A type

page 220 to 243 for B type
page 244 to 269 for C, D type
page 270 to 295 for E type
If your car has a different audio

system from these types, read the
radio manufacturer’s manual that
came with your car for its operation.

05/10/03 19:52:10 32SEA630_199
Audio System
(B Type)

05/10/03 19:52:16 32SEA630_200
Audio System
(C Type) (D Type)
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:52:20 32SEA630_201
Audio System
(E Type)
For some types

05/10/03 19:52:27 32SEA630_202
Audio System (A Type)
AM/FM/CD Audio System

Your car’s audio system provides
clear reception on each band while
the preset bars allow you to easily
select your favourite stations. STEREO INDICATOR
In some countries, you can also
utilize many convenient features
provided by the Radio Data System AM/FM
(RDS). BUTTON
Operating the Radio SEEK BAR TUNE BAR

The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the PRESET
system on by pushing the PWR/ BARS
VOL knob or the AM/FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the PWR/VOL
same knob. KNOB
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:52:37 32SEA630_203
The band and frequency that the TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune Preset − You can store the
radio was last tuned to is displayed. the radio to a desired frequency. frequencies of your favourite radio
To change bands, press the AM/FM Press the side of the bar to tune stations in the three preset bars.
button. On the FM band, ‘‘ST’’ will be to a higher frequency, and the Each side of the bars (1 − 6) will
displayed if the station is broadcast- side to tune to a lower store one frequency on each AM
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on frequency. The frequency numbers band (LW, MW), and two
AM is not available. will start to change rapidly. Release frequencies on the FM band.
the bar when the display reaches the To store a frequency:
You can use any of four methods to desired frequency. To change the
find radio stations on the selected frequency in small increments, press 1. Select the desired band, AM (LW),
band: TUNE, SEEK, AUTO SELECT, and release the TUNE bar quickly. AM(MW) or FM. FM1 and FM2
and the preset bars. let you store two frequencies with
SEEK − The SEEK function each preset bar.
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press 2. Use the TUNE or SEEK function
the SEEK bar on either the or to tune the radio to a desired
, then release it. Depending on station.
which side you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the 3. Pick the preset number (1 − 6)
current frequency. It stops when it you want for that station. Press
finds a station with a strong signal. the left or right side of the bar and
hold it until you hear a beep.

05/10/03 19:52:44 32SEA630_204
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total

of six stations on each AM (LW,
MW) and twelve on FM. A.SEL INDICATOR
Once a station’s frequency is stored,

simply press and release the left or
right side of the proper preset bar to
tune to it.
AM/FM
BUTTON A.SEL
The preset frequencies will be lost if BUTTON
your car’s battery goes dead, is SEEK/SKIP
TUNE
disconnected, or the radio fuse is BAR
BAR
removed.
PRESET
BARS
PWR/VOL
KNOB
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:52:49 32SEA630_205
AUTO SELECT − If you are If you are in a remote area, Auto Auto Select does not erase the
travelling far from home and can no Select may not find twelve strong frequencies that you set previously.
longer receive the stations you FM stations. If this happens, you will When you return home, turn off
preset, you can use the AUTO see a ‘‘0’’ displayed when you press Auto Select by pressing the A. SEL
SELECT feature to find stations in the left or right side of any preset button. The preset bars will then
the local area. bar that does not have a station select the frequencies you originally
stored. set.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in If you do not like the stations Auto
the display, and the system will go Select has stored, you can store
into scan mode for several seconds. other frequencies in the preset bars.
It automatically scans FM band, Use the TUNE or SEEK function to
looking for stations with strong find the desired frequencies, then
signals. It stores the frequencies of store them in the selected preset
twelve FM stations in the preset bars bars as described previously.
(1 − 6). You can then use the preset
bars to select those stations.

05/10/03 19:52:56 32SEA630_206
Radio Data System (RDS)

With your audio system, you can
provided by the Radio Data System TA INDICATOR TP INDICATOR
(RDS).
With the FM band selected, you can

keep listening to the same station TA/RDS
AM/FM BUTTON
even if its frequency changes as you BUTTON A.SEL
enter different regions while you are BUTTON
travelling.
The RDS function turns on auto-

matically when you turn the system
on. If the station you are listening to
is an RDS station, the frequency
display will disappear and the station
name will be displayed. Then, the
system will automatically keep
selecting the frequency with the
strongest signal from the frequen-
cies that carry the same programs.
This can save you the trouble of
re-tuning to obtain the same station PWR/VOL KNOB
as long as you are in the same RDS
network area. CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:53:04 32SEA630_207
You can turn on or off the RDS Program Service Name Display TA (Traffic Announcement Standby)
function. To switch the function on If the station you are listening to is Function
or off, press the PWR/VOL knob for an RDS station, the frequency When the TA/RDS button is pressed
more than 2 seconds with the audio display will disappear and the station and released, ‘‘TA’’ will light on the
system on, then press the Preset 2 name or PTY information will be display and the system will stand by
side of the preset bar repeatedly. To displayed. Press the TA/RDS button for traffic announcements.
set the RDS on or off, press the for more than two seconds to switch
PWR/VOL knob again. the display information between the When a traffic information (TP)
name of network/station and the station is selected, ‘‘TP’’ will light on
When the signals of the RDS station PTY information (see page 189 for the display indicating that traffic
become so weak that the system can the PTY display information). reports can be received from this
no longer follow the station, the station. When the EON (Enhanced
system will hold the last tuned Other Network) TP station is
frequency and the display will selected, ‘‘TP’’ will also light on the
change from the station name to the display.
frequency.
EON information cross-references
In some countries, you cannot utilize other program services that
features provided by RDS as the broadcast traffic information, and
RDS function is not provided in all when EON information is received,
stations. traffic reports can be received
through another program service.

05/10/03 19:53:11 32SEA630_208
You can receive traffic information

while you are listening to a CD or
cassette (if equipped). If the system TP INDICATOR
is tuned to a TP or EON TP station TA INDICATOR NEWS INDICATOR
before playing a CD or cassette, the A.SEL INDICATOR
system will stand by for traffic
announcements by pressing the TA/ TA/RDS
RDS button (‘‘TA’’ indicator ON) and AM/FM BUTTON
the system will switch from CD or BUTTON A.SEL
cassette to the traffic announcement BUTTON
when it begins. The system will SEEK/SKIP
BAR
return to the CD or tape mode when
the traffic information is finished.
To turn off the TA function, press

the TA/RDS button again. ‘‘TA’’ will
go out from the display.
If you use SEEK or Auto Select with

the TA function ON, the system
searches only TP or EON TP
stations.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:53:16 32SEA630_209
PTY Display Function L.CLASS : Light classics; classical After you select the desired program
When the TA/RDS button is pressed music for non-specialist appreciation. type, the system will search for a
for more than two seconds, the PTY NEWS : Short accounts of facts, station with the same PTY code as
display function comes on. This events, publicly expressed views, the selected program type. When
function lets you know the type of reportage, etc. you use this function for the first
programs the selected RDS station is OTH MUS : Other types of music, time, ‘‘NEWS’’ will appear as it was
broadcasting. For example, if the such as Jazz, R & B, Folk, Country, preset at the factory.
station is broadcasting dramas, Reggae.
‘‘DRAMA’’ is shown in the display. If POP MUS : Commercial music of If the selected RDS station does not
it is a station of scientific programs, popular appeal. transmit PTY data, ‘‘NO PTY’’ is
‘‘SCIENCE’’ will be shown. The ROCK MUS : Contemporary modern displayed. When the selected station
principal PTYs are shown as follows. music. is not an RDS station, ‘‘NO RDS’’ is
SCIENCE : Programs about nature, displayed for about 5 seconds. The
AFFAIRS : Topical programs science, and technology. PTY display function turns off and
expanding upon the news. SPORT : Programs concerned with the display returns to normal if no
CLASSICS : Serious classics; any aspect of sports. further steps are taken.
performances of major orchestral VARIED : Light entertainment
works. programs.
CULTURE : Programs concerned
with any aspect of national or
regional culture.
DRAMA : All radio plays and serials.
EASY MUS : M.O.R MUSIC.
EDUCATE : Educational programs.
INFO : General information and
advice.

05/10/03 19:53:22 32SEA630_210
While a PTY is displayed, you can

use the SEEK/SKIP bar to find a
station of the desired PTY. When TP INDICATOR
you press either side of the SEEK/ TA INDICATOR NEWS INDICATOR
SKIP bar, the display will show A.SEL INDICATOR
different PTYs (see the PTYs list on
the previous page). TA/RDS
AM/FM BUTTON
The PTY setting mode is cancelled if BUTTON A.SEL
no further steps are taken within 5 BUTTON
seconds after selecting the desired SEEK/SKIP
BAR
PTY by operating the SEEK/SKIP
bar.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:53:29 32SEA630_211
After your desired PTY is displayed, PTY/News Interrupt Function Your audio system has other
press either side of the SEEK/SKIP To activate this function, press the interrupt functions (including TA
bar again within 5 seconds. The TA/RDS button for more than two function). The interrupt function
system will go into the PTY search seconds and select ‘‘NEWS.’’ The first activated has priority over the
mode and it will search for a station system will hold the last tuned FM others and the indication of the other
of the selected PTY. If there is no station/network PTY while you are interrupt function goes out. To
station available in the selected PTY, listening to the CD or tape. With this activate the other interrupt function,
‘‘NO PTY’’ is displayed for about 5 function on, playing CD or tape is turn off the currently activated
seconds and the PTY search mode is interrupted and the system switches interrupt function.
cancelled. from CD or tape mode to the FM
newscast when the newscast is PTY Alarm
Some stations may broadcast the broadcasting from the FM station. PTY code ‘‘ALARM’’ is used for
programs with contents are different emergency announcements, such as
from their PTY code. When the program is changed to natural disasters. When this code is
another program or the frequency received, ‘‘ALARM’’ goes on the
In the PTY search mode, the tuning cannot be received for 10 seconds display and the volume is changed.
step is set to 50 kHz while searching due to weak signal, the system will When the alarm is cancelled, the
the FM band. This step changes to return to the CD or tape mode system will return to the normal
100 kHz when the AF or TA function automatically. operation mode.
is activated.

05/10/03 19:53:37 32SEA630_212
Adjusting the Sound Adjustment Level

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the SOUND button. The mode
changes from BAS to TRE to FAD to
BAL, and then back to the selected
audio mode, each time you press the SOUND BUTTON
SOUND button. Each mode is shown
in the display as it changes. VOLUME KNOB
Balance/Fader − These two

modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker. Treble/Bass − Use these modes to The system will automatically return
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength, adjust the tone to your liking. Select the display to the selected audio
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back TRE or BAS by pressing the SOUND mode about five seconds after you
strength. button. Adjust the desired mode by stop adjusting a mode with the
turning the VOLUME knob. VOLUME knob.
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
SOUND button. Adjust the Balance The displayed number shows you
or Fader to your liking by turning the current setting.
the VOLUME knob. When the adjustment level reaches
the centre, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

05/10/03 19:53:46 32SEA630_213
Digital Clock DIGITAL CLOCK

The audio system usually shows the
time when the ignition switch is in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
PRESET BARS
To set the time, press the Clock Set
button until you hear a beep. The CLOCK SET
displayed time begins to blink. BUTTON
Press and hold the H (Preset 4) side

of the bar until the hour advances to
the desired time.
Press and hold the M (Preset 5) side You can use the R (Preset 6) side of For example:
of the bar until the minutes advance the bar to quickly set the time to the 1:06 will reset to 1:00
to the desired time. nearest hour. Press the Clock Set 1:52 will reset to 2:00
button until you hear a beep, then
Press the Clock Set button again to press the R (Preset 6) side of the bar. If your car’s battery is disconnected
enter the set time. If the displayed time is before the or goes dead, the time setting will be
half hour, pressing R sets the clock lost. To set the time again, follow the
back to the previous hour. If the setting procedure.
displayed time is after the half hour,
pressing R sets the clock forward to
the beginning of the next hour.

05/10/03 19:53:54 32SEA630_214
Operating the CD Player

You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
Examine the CD for any labels or AM/FM BUTTON

other contamination on it that could
cause it to jam in the drive. With the
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
or ON (II), insert the disc into the CD/AUX
BUTTON RPT
CD slot. Push the disc in halfway; BUTTON
the drive will pull it in the rest of the SEEK/SKIP
way and begin to play. The number BAR
of the track that is playing is shown
in the display. EJECT
CD SLOT
BUTTON
You can also play 8-cm (3-in) discs
without using an adapter ring. Play PWR/VOL
only standard round discs. Odd- KNOB
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.

The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit. CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:54:02 32SEA630_215
For best results when using CD-R Press the eject button to remove the Each time you press and release the
discs, use only high quality discs disc from the drive. side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,
labelled for audio use. When the system skips forward to the
recording a CD-R, the recording If you eject the disc, but do not beginning of the next track. Press
must be closed in order for the disc remove it from the slot, the system and release the side to skip
to be used by CD players. CD-RW will automatically reload the disc backward to the beginning of the
discs will not work in this unit. after 15 seconds and put the CD current track. Press it again to skip
player in pause mode. To begin to the beginning of the previous
When the system reaches the end of playing the disc, press the CD button. track.
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play the disc again. You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
You can switch to the radio while a passages and change tracks.
CD is playing by pressing the
AM/FM button. Press the CD To move rapidly within a track, press
button to return to playing the CD. and hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press
The CD will begin playing where it the side to move forward. Press
left off. the side to move backward.
Release the bar when the system
If you turn the system off while a CD reaches the point you want.
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.

05/10/03 19:54:09 32SEA630_216
REPEAT − To activate the Repeat Operating the CD Changer To select the CD changer, press the
feature, press and release the RPT (Optional) CD button. The disc and track
button. You will see RPT in the A Compact Disc changer is available numbers will be displayed.
display. The system continuously for your car. It holds up to six or
replays the current track. Press the eight discs, providing several hours To select a different disc, use the
RPT button again to turn it off. of continuous entertainment. You Preset 5 (DISC−) side or Preset 6
operate this CD changer with the (DISC＋) side of the preset bar.
same controls used for the in-dash Press the Preset 6 side to select the
CD player. next disc in the magazine. Press the
Preset 5 side of the bar to select the
Load the desired CDs in the previous disc. If you select an empty
magazine and load the magazine in slot in the magazine, the changer will,
the changer according to the after finding that slot empty, try to
instructions that came with the unit. load the CD in the next slot. This
Play only standard round discs. Odd- continues until it finds a CD to load
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or and play.
For best results when using CD-R

discs, use only high quality discs
labelled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:54:17 32SEA630_217
If you load a CD in the in-dash player When you switch back to CD mode, Operating the Optional MD
while the changer is playing a CD, the system selects the same unit (in- Player/Changer
the system will stop the changer and dash or changer) that was playing (For some types)
begin playing the in-dash CD. To when you switched out of CD mode. A MD player or changer is available
select the changer again, press the for your car as optional equipment.
CD button. Play will begin where it To use the SKIP and REPEAT You can operate this MD player/
left off. Use the CD button to switch functions, refer to the in-dash player changer with the same controls used
between the player and the changer. operating instructions. for the in-dash CD changer. Follow
the instructions that came with the
If you eject the disc in the in-dash unit.
CD while it is playing, the system
will automatically switch to the CD Protecting Compact Discs
changer and begin to play where it For information on how to handle
left off. If there are no CDs in the and protect compact discs, see page
changer, the display will flash. You 291 .
will have to select another mode
(AM or FM) with the button.

05/10/03 19:54:23 32SEA630_218
CD Player Error Indications

If you see an error indication in the Indication Cause Solution
display while operating the CD
player, find the cause in the chart to Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
the right. If you cannot clear the FOCUS Error Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
error indication, take the car to your player.
dealer. Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
Mechanical Error If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.

05/10/03 19:54:31 32SEA630_219
CD Changer Error Indications

display while operating the optional
CD changer, find the cause in the Press the magazine eject button and pull out
chart to the right. If you cannot clear the magazine. Check for an error indication.
the error indication, take the car to FOCUS Error Insert the magazine again. If the code does not
your dealer. disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your dealer.
No CD in the CD Insert CD.
Magazine
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine. Check for an error indication.
Mechanical Error Insert the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
normal.
No CD magazine in the Insert CD magazine.
CD Changer

05/10/03 19:54:39 32SEA630_220
Operating the Cassette Player

(Optional)
The cassette system features Dolby＊ AM/FM BUTTON TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
RPT INDICATOR
chromium-dioxide (CrO2) tape, and
auto-reverse for continuous play.
To operate the cassette player, the

ignition switch must be in CD/AUX RPT
ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Make BUTTON BUTTON
sure the tape opening on the cassette
is facing to the right, then insert the
cassette most of the way into the slot.
The system will pull it in the rest of
the way, and begin to play.
＊
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
SEEK/SKIP BAR
PWR/VOL KNOB
PRESET BARS
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:54:46 32SEA630_221
The tape direction indicator will light If you turn the system off while a Tape Search Functions
to show you which side of the tape is playing, either with the PWR/ With a cassette playing, you can use
cassette is playing. The ▲ indicates VOL knob or by turning off the the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
the side you inserted facing upward ignition, the cassette will remain in function to find a desired program.
is now playing. If you want to play the drive. When you turn the system
the other side, press the Preset 3 back on, the cassette player will be in FF/REW − Fast Forward and Re-
(PLAY/PROG) side of the preset pause mode. To begin playing, press wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
bar. the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side of wind the tape, push the Preset 1
the preset bar. (REW) side of the preset bar. You
Dolby noise reduction turns on when will see REW in the display. To fast
you insert a cassette. The indi- To switch to the radio or CD player forward the tape, push the Preset 2
cator will light in the display. If the while a tape is playing, press the (FF) side of the preset bar. You will
tape was not recorded with Dolby AM/FM, or CD/AUX button. To see FF displayed. Press the Preset 1,
noise reduction, turn it off by change back to the cassette player, 2, or 3 side of the bars to take the sys-
pressing the Preset 4 (NR) side of push the CD/AUX button. tem out of rewind or fast forward.
the preset bar. When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it reverses direction and
Noise reduction remains off until you begins to play.
turn it on by pressing the bar again.
When the system reaches the end of

the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the eject button
on the cassette player.

05/10/03 19:54:52 32SEA630_222
SKIP − The Skip function allows repeat this same program until you Caring for the Cassette Player
you to find the beginning of a song deactivate REPEAT by pressing the Damaged cassettes can jam inside
or passage. To activate SKIP, press button again. the drive or cause other problems.
the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the See page 296 for information on
side to advance to the The SKIP and REPEAT functions cassette care and protection.
beginning of the next song or use silent periods on the tape to find
passage, or the side to return to the end of a song or passage. These
the beginning of the current song or features may not work to your
passage. FF or REW will flash in the satisfaction if there is almost no gap
display as the tape moves. When the between selections, a high noise
system reaches the beginning of the level between selections, or a silent
next song or passage (FF), or the period in the middle of a selection.
beginning of the current one (REW),
it goes back to PLAY mode.
REPEAT − The Repeat function

continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to

05/10/03 19:54:58 32SEA630_223
Audio System (B Type)
AM/FM/CD Audio System

Your car’s audio system provides
SCAN BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR AM/FM BUTTON
clear reception on each band while
the preset bars allow you to easily A.SEL INDICATOR
select your favourite stations.
SCAN INDICATOR
In some countries, you can also
provided by the Radio Data System A.SEL
BUTTON
(RDS).
TUNE BAR SEEK BAR
PRESET
BARS
PWR/VOL KNOB

05/10/03 19:55:06 32SEA630_224
Operating the Radio You can use any of five methods to SEEK − The SEEK function
The ignition switch must be in find radio stations on the selected searches the band for a station with
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO a strong signal. To activate it, press
operate the audio system. Turn the SELECT, and the preset bars. the SEEK bar on either the or
system on by pushing the PWR/ , then release it. Depending on
VOL knob or the AM/FM button. TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune which side you press, the system
Adjust the volume by turning the the radio to a desired frequency. scans upward or downward from the
same knob. Press the side of the bar to tune current frequency. It stops when it
to a higher frequency, and the finds a station with a strong signal.
The band and frequency that the side to tune to a lower
radio was last tuned to is displayed. frequency. The frequency numbers
To change bands, press the AM/FM will start to change rapidly. Release
button. On the FM band, ‘‘ST’’ will be the bar when the display reaches the
displayed if the station is broadcast- desired frequency. To change the
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on frequency in small increments, press
AM is not available. and release the TUNE bar quickly.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:55:14 32SEA630_225
SCAN − The SCAN function Preset − You can store the Once a station’s frequency is stored,
samples all the stations with strong frequencies of your favourite radio simply press and release the left or
signals on the selected band. To stations in the three preset bars. right side of the proper preset bar to
activate it, press the SCAN button, Each side of the bars (1 − 6) will tune to it.
then release it. You will see SCAN in store one frequency on each AM
the display. The system will scan up band (LW, MW), and two The preset frequencies will be lost if
the band for a station with a strong frequencies on the FM band. your car’s battery goes dead, is
signal. When it finds one, it will stop To store a frequency: disconnected, or the radio fuse is
and play that station for 1. Select the desired band, AM (LW), removed.
approximately five seconds. If you do AM(MW) or FM. FM1 and FM2
nothing, the system will then scan let you store two frequencies with
for the next strong station and play each preset bar.
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue 2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
listening to, press the SCAN button function to tune the radio to a
again. desired station.
3. Pick the preset number (1 − 6)

you want for that station. Press
the left or right side of the bar and
hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total

MW) and twelve on FM.

05/10/03 19:55:19 32SEA630_226
AUTO SELECT − If you are If you are in a remote area, Auto Auto Select does not erase the
travelling far from home and can no Select may not find twelve strong frequencies that you set previously.
longer receive the stations you FM stations. If this happens, you will When you return home, turn off
preset, you can use the AUTO see a ‘‘0’’ displayed when you press Auto Select by pressing the A. SEL
SELECT feature to find stations in the left or right side of any preset button. The preset bars will then
the local area. bar that does not have a station select the frequencies you originally
stored. set.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in If you do not like the stations AUTO
the display, and the system will go SELECT has stored, you can store
It automatically scans FM band, Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
looking for stations with strong function to find the desired
signals. It stores the frequencies of frequencies, then store them in the
twelve FM stations in the preset bars selected preset bars as described
(1 − 6). You can then use the preset previously.

05/10/03 19:55:26 32SEA630_227

provided by the Radio Data System TA INDICATOR TP INDICATOR AM /FM BUTTON
(RDS).

keep listening to the same station
even if its frequency changes as you
enter different regions while you are A.SEL
BUTTON
travelling.
The RDS function turns on auto- TA/RDS

matically when you turn the system BUTTON
on. If the station you are listening to
cies that carry the same programs.
This can save you the trouble of PWR/VOL KNOB
re-tuning to obtain the same station
network area.

05/10/03 19:55:33 32SEA630_228
frequency.

05/10/03 19:55:39 32SEA630_229

while you are listening to a CD or
cassette (if equipped). If the system
is tuned to a TP or EON TP station TA INDICATOR TP INDICATOR
before playing a CD or cassette, the
announcements by pressing the TA/
RDS button (‘‘TA’’ indicator ON) and
the system will switch from CD or A.SEL
BUTTON
cassette to the traffic announcement
when it begins. The system will
return to the CD or tape mode when TA/RDS
the traffic information is finished. BUTTON


stations.

05/10/03 19:55:45 32SEA630_230
PTY Display Function AFFAIRS : Topical programs science, and technology.

When the TA/RDS button is pressed expanding upon the news. SPORT : Programs concerned with
for more than two seconds, the PTY CLASSICS : Serious classics; any aspect of sports.
display function comes on. This performances of major orchestral VARIED : Light entertainment
function lets you know the type of works. programs.
programs the selected RDS station is CULTURE : Programs concerned
broadcasting. For example, if the with any aspect of national or
station is broadcasting dramas, regional culture.
‘‘DRAMA’’ is shown in the display. If DRAMA : All radio plays and serials.
it is a station of scientific programs, EASY MUS : M.O.R MUSIC.
‘‘SCIENCE’’ will be shown. The EDUCATE : Educational programs.
principal PTYs are shown as follows. INFO : General information and
advice.
L.CLASS : Light classics; classical
music for non-specialist appreciation.
NEWS : Short accounts of facts,
events, publicly expressed views,
reportage, etc.
OTH MUS : Other types of music,
such as Jazz, R & B, Folk, Country,
Reggae.
POP MUS : Commercial music of
popular appeal.
ROCK MUS : Contemporary modern
music.
SCIENCE : Programs about nature, CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:55:51 32SEA630_231
After you select the desired program While a PTY is displayed, you can After your desired PTY is displayed,
type, the system will search for a use the SEEK bar to find a station of press either side of the SEEK bar
station with the same PTY code as the desired PTY. When you press again within 5 seconds. The system
the selected program type. When either side of the SEEK bar, the will go into the PTY search mode
you use this function for the first display will show different PTYs (see and it will search for a station of the
time, ‘‘NEWS’’ will appear as it was the PTYs list on the previous page). selected PTY. If there is no station
preset at the factory. available in the selected PTY, ‘‘NO
The PTY setting mode is cancelled if PTY’’ is displayed for about 5
If the selected RDS station does not no further steps are taken within 5 seconds and the PTY search mode is
transmit PTY data, ‘‘NO PTY’’ is seconds after selecting the desired cancelled.
displayed. When the selected station PTY by operating the SEEK bar.
is not an RDS station, ‘‘NO RDS’’ is Some stations may broadcast the
displayed for about 5 seconds. The programs with contents are different
PTY display function turns off and from their PTY code.
the display returns to normal if no
further steps are taken. In the PTY search mode, the tuning
step is set to 50 kHz while searching
the FM band. This step changes to
100 kHz when the AF or TA function
is activated.

05/10/03 19:55:57 32SEA630_232
PTY/News Interrupt Function Your audio system has other PTY Alarm
To activate this function, press the interrupt functions (including TA PTY code ‘‘ALARM’’ is used for
TA/RDS button for more than two function). The interrupt function emergency announcements, such as
seconds and select ‘‘NEWS.’’ The first activated has priority over the natural disasters. When this code is
system will hold the last tuned FM others and the indication of the other received, ‘‘ALARM’’ goes on the
station/network PTY while you are interrupt function goes out. To display and the volume is changed.
listening to the CD or tape. With this activate the other interrupt function, When the alarm is cancelled, the
function on, playing CD or tape is turn off the currently activated system will return to the normal
interrupted and the system switches interrupt function. operation mode.
from CD or tape mode to the FM
newscast when the newscast is
broadcasting from the FM station.
When the program is changed to

another program or the frequency
cannot be received for 10 seconds
due to weak signal, the system will
return to the CD or tape mode
automatically.

05/10/03 19:56:03 32SEA630_233
Adjusting the Sound

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
Adjustment Level
these you want to adjust by pressing
the FAD/BAL and BASS/TREB
buttons, then turning the VOLUME
knob.

controls adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
The Balance control adjusts the side-
to-side strength, while the Fader
FAD/BAL BASS/TREB
control adjusts the front-to-back BUTTON BUTTON
strength.
To adjust the balance or fader, press

the FAD/BAL button. The mode
changes between the balance and
fader controls. Then, turn the
VOLUME knob to adjust the
strength of the sound coming from VOLUME KNOB
each speaker.

05/10/03 19:56:09 32SEA630_234
Treble/Bass − Use these controls The system will automatically return

to adjust the tone to your liking. the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
To adjust the tone, press the BASS/ stop adjusting a mode with the
TREB button. The mode changes VOLUME knob.
between the treble and bass controls.
Then, turn the VOLUME knob to
adjust the tone quality.
The displayed number shows you

the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
As you adjust a mode, you will hear a

beep whenever the adjustment level
reaches the centre ( ), maximum,
and minimum of its range.

05/10/03 19:56:17 32SEA630_235
Digital Clock
time when the ignition switch is in DIGITAL CLOCK

button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.

the desired time.
Press and hold the M (Preset 5) side PRESET

of the bar until the minutes advance BARS
to the desired time.
Press the Clock Set button again to

enter the set time.
CLOCK SET BUTTON

05/10/03 19:56:22 32SEA630_236
You can use the R (Preset 6) side of For example:

the bar to quickly set the time to the 1:06 would RESET to 1:00
nearest hour. Press the Clock Set 1:52 would RESET to 2:00
button until you hear a beep, then
press the R (Preset 6) side of the bar. If your car’s battery is disconnected
If the displayed time is before the or goes dead, the time setting will be
half hour, pressing R sets the clock lost. To set the time again, follow the
back to the previous hour. If the setting procedure.
displayed time is after the half hour,
pressing R sets the clock forward to
the beginning of the next hour.

05/10/03 19:56:29 32SEA630_237
Operating the CD Player

You operate the CD player with the
Examine the CD for any labels or SCAN/RPT BUTTON TRACK NUMBER AM/FM BUTTON
other contamination on it that could
cause it to jam in the drive. With the
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I) CD/AUX
or ON (II), insert the disc into the RDM BUTTON
CD slot. Push the disc in halfway; BUTTON
the drive will pull it in the rest of the
way and begin to play. The number EJECT
BUTTON
of the track that is playing is shown CD LOAD
CD SLOT
in the display. INDICATOR
You can also play 8-cm (3-in) discs

without using an adapter ring. Play
only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
PWR/VOL KNOB
disc to jam in the unit.

05/10/03 19:56:37 32SEA630_238
For best results when using CD-R If you turn the system off while a CD You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
discs, use only high quality discs is playing, either with the PWR/VOL while a disc is playing to select
labelled for audio use. When knob or by turning off the ignition, passages and change tracks.
recording a CD-R, the recording the disc will stay in the drive. When
must be closed in order for the disc you turn the system back on, the CD To move rapidly within a track, press
to be used by CD players. CD-RW will begin playing where it left off. and hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press
discs will not work in this unit. the side to move forward. Press
Press the eject button to remove the the side to move backward.
When the system reaches the end of disc from the drive. Release the bar when the system
the disc, it will return to the begin- reaches the point you want.
ning and play the disc again. If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system Each time you press and release the
You can switch to the radio while a will automatically reload the disc side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,
CD is playing by pressing the after 15 seconds and put the CD the system skips forward to the
AM/FM button. Press the CD player in pause mode. To begin beginning of the next track. Press
button to return to playing the CD. playing the disc, press the CD button. and release the side to skip
The CD will begin playing where it backward to the beginning of the
left off. current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:56:42 32SEA630_239
SCAN − This feature, when REPEAT − To activate the Repeat RANDOM PLAY − This feature,
activated, samples all the tracks on feature, press and release the RPT when activated, plays the tracks on
the selected disc in the order they button. You will see RPT in the the CD in random order, rather than
are recorded on the CD. To activate display. The system continuously in the order they are recorded on the
the Scan feature, select the Scan replays the current track. Press the CD. To activate Random Play, press
mode by pressing and holding the RPT button again to turn it off. and release the RDM button. You
SCAN button until you hear a beep. will see RDM in the display. The
You will see SCAN in the display. system will then select and play
The system will then play the first tracks randomly. This continues
track for approximately ten seconds. until you deactivate Random Play by
If you do nothing, the system will pressing RDM again.
then play the following tracks for ten
seconds each. When it plays a track
that you want to continue listening to,
press the SCAN button again.

05/10/03 19:56:50 32SEA630_240
Operating the CD Changer To select the CD changer, press the If you load a CD in the in-dash player
(Optional) CD button. The disc and track while the changer is playing a CD,
A Compact Disc changer is available numbers will be displayed. the system will stop the changer and
for your car. It holds up to six or begin playing the in-dash CD. To
eight discs, providing several hours To select a different disc, use the select the changer again, press the
of continuous entertainment. You Preset 5 (DISC−) side or Preset 6 CD button. Play will begin where it
operate this CD changer with the (DISC＋) side of the preset bar. left off. Use the CD button to switch
same controls used for the in-dash Press the Preset 6 side to select the between the player and the changer.
CD player. next disc in the magazine. Press the
Preset 5 side of the bar to select the If you eject the disc in the in-dash
Load the desired CDs in the previous disc. If you select an empty CD while it is playing, the system
magazine and load the magazine in slot in the magazine, the changer will, will automatically switch to the CD
the changer according to the after finding that slot empty, try to changer and begin to play where it
instructions that came with the unit. load the CD in the next slot. This left off. If there are no CDs in the
Play only standard round discs. Odd- continues until it finds a CD to load changer, the display will flash. You
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or and play. will have to select another mode
cause other problems. (AM or FM) with the button.

CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:56:57 32SEA630_241
When you switch back to CD mode, Operating the Optional MD Protecting Compact Discs
the system selects the same unit (in- Player/Changer For information on how to handle
dash or changer) that was playing (For some types) and protect compact discs, see page
when you switched out of CD mode. An MD player or changer is available 291 .
for your car as optional equipment.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and You can operate this MD player/
RANDOM functions, refer to the in- changer with the same controls used
dash player operating instructions. for the in-dash CD player. Follow the
instructions that came with the unit.

05/10/03 19:57:04 32SEA630_242
CD Player Error Indications

player, find the cause in the chart to Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
the right. If you cannot clear the FOCUS Error Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
error indication, take the car to your player.
dealer. Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
Mechanical Error If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
normal.

05/10/03 19:57:12 32SEA630_243

display while operating the optional
CD changer, find the cause in the Press the magazine eject button and pull out
chart to the right. If you cannot clear the magazine. Check for an error indication.
the error indication, take the car to FOCUS Error Insert the magazine again. If the code does not
your dealer. disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
No CD in the CD Insert CD.
Magazine
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine. Check for an error indication.
Mechanical Error Insert the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
normal.
No CD magazine in the Insert CD magazine.
CD Changer

05/10/03 19:57:19 32SEA630_244

(Optional)
The cassette system features Dolby＊ RPT BUTTON TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
To operate the cassette player, the AM/FM

BUTTON
ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Make CD/AUX
sure the tape opening on the cassette TUNE BAR BUTTON
The system will pull it in the rest of SEEK/SKIP BAR
＊
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories NOISE REDUCTION INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR
PWR/VOL KNOB
PRESET BARS

05/10/03 19:57:27 32SEA630_245
The tape direction indicator will light If you turn the system off while a Tape Search Functions
to show you which side of the tape is playing, either with the PWR/ With a cassette playing, you can use
cassette is playing. The ▲ indicates VOL knob or by turning off the the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
the side you inserted facing upward ignition, the cassette will remain in function to find a desired program.
is now playing. If you want to play the drive. When you turn the system
the other side, press the Preset 3 back on, the cassette player will be in FF/REW − Fast Forward and Re-
(PLAY/PROG) side of the preset pause mode. To begin playing, press wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
bar. the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side of wind the tape, push the Preset 1
the preset bar. (REW) side of the preset bar. You
Dolby noise reduction turns on when will see REW in the display. To fast
you insert a cassette. The indi- To switch to the radio or CD player forward the tape, push the Preset 2
cator will light in the display. If the while a tape is playing, press the (FF) side of the preset bar. You will
tape was not recorded with Dolby AM/FM, or CD/AUX button. To see FF displayed. Press the Preset 1,
noise reduction, turn it off by change back to the cassette player, 2, or 3 side of the bars to take the sys-
pressing the Preset 4 (NR) side of push the CD/AUX button. tem out of rewind or fast forward.
Noise reduction remains off until you begins to play.
When the system reaches the end of

the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the eject button

05/10/03 19:57:33 32SEA630_246
SKIP − The Skip function allows repeat this same program until you Caring for the Cassette Player
you to find the beginning of a song deactivate REPEAT by pressing the Damaged cassettes can jam inside
or passage. To activate SKIP, press button again. the drive or cause other problems.
the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the See page 296 for information on
side to advance to the The SKIP and REPEAT functions cassette care and protection.
beginning of the next song or use silent periods on the tape to find
passage, or the side to return to the end of a song or passage. These
the beginning of the current song or features may not work to your
passage. FF or REW will flash in the satisfaction if there is almost no gap
display as the tape moves. When the between selections, a high noise
system reaches the beginning of the level between selections, or a silent
next song or passage (FF), or the period in the middle of a selection.
beginning of the current one (REW),
it goes back to PLAY mode.
REPEAT − The Repeat function

continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the

05/10/03 19:57:40 32SEA630_247
Audio System (C, D Type)
AM/FM/CD Changer C type

Audio System
Your car’s audio system provides SCAN BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR
clear reception on each band while A.SEL INDICATOR
the preset bars allow you to easily
select your favourite stations.
On cars with C type audio system AM/FM

In some countries, you can also BUTTON
A.SEL
utilize many convenient features BUTTON
provided by the Radio Data System SEEK/
SKIP
(RDS). BAR
The in-dash CD changer holds up to PRESET

6 discs. You operate the CD changer BARS
with the same controls used for the
radio. See page 258 for CD changer
operation.
TUNE BAR PWR/VOL KNOB

05/10/03 19:57:47 32SEA630_248
Operating the Radio D Type

The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the STEREO INDICATOR
system on by pressing the PWR/
VOL knob, AM/FM button. Adjust
the volume by turning the knob.
The band and frequency that the AM/FM

radio was last tuned to is displayed. BUTTON
A.SEL
To change bands, press the AM/FM BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
button. On the FM band, ‘‘ST’’ will be BAR
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available. PRESET
BARS
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE BAR PWR/VOL KNOB

05/10/03 19:57:55 32SEA630_249
You can use any of five methods to SCAN − The SCAN function Preset − You can store the
find radio stations on the selected samples all the stations with strong frequencies of your favourite radio
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO signals on the selected band. To stations in the three preset bars.
SELECT, and the preset bars. activate it, press the SCAN button, Each bar will store two frequencies
then release it. You will see SCAN in on each AM band (LW, MW), and
TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune the display. The system will scan up four frequencies on the FM band.
the radio to a desired frequency. the band for a station with a strong To store a frequency:
Push the on the TUNE bar to signal. When it finds one, it will stop
tune to a higher frequency, or push and play that station for 1. Select the desired band, AM (LW),
the to tune to a lower frequency. approximately five seconds. If you do AM(MW) or FM. FM1 and FM2
Hold the bar down until the display nothing, the system will then scan let you store two frequencies with
reaches the desired frequency. for the next strong station and play each preset bar.
that for five seconds. When it plays a
SEEK − The SEEK function station that you want to continue 2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
searches the band for a station with listening to, press the SCAN button function to tune the radio to a
a strong signal. To activate it, press again. desired station.
the SEEK bar ( or ) until
you hear a beep, then release it. 3. Pick the preset number (1 − 6)
Depending on which side of the you want for that station. Press
SEEK bar you press, the system the left or right side of the bar and
scans upward or downward from the hold it until you hear a beep.
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
MW) and twelve on FM.

05/10/03 19:58:02 32SEA630_250
Once a station’s frequency is stored, AUTO SELECT − If you are If you are in a remote area, Auto
simply press and release the left or travelling far from home and can no Select may not find twelve strong
right side of the proper preset bar to longer receive the stations you FM stations. If this happens, you will
tune to it. preset, you can use the AUTO see a ‘‘0’’ displayed when you press
SELECT feature to find stations in the left or right side of any preset
The preset frequencies will be lost if the local area. bar that does not have a station
your car’s battery goes dead, is stored.
disconnected, or the radio fuse is To activate Auto Select, press the
removed. A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in If you do not like the stations AUTO
the display, and the system will go SELECT has stored, you can store
It automatically scans FM band, Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
looking for stations with strong function to find the desired
signals. It stores the frequencies of frequencies, then store them in the
twelve FM stations in the preset bars selected preset bars as described
(1 − 6). You can then use the preset previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you set previously.
When you return home, turn off
Auto Select by pressing the A. SEL
button. The preset bars will then
select the frequencies you originally
set.

05/10/03 19:58:09 32SEA630_251

On cars with C type audio system C type
TA INDICATOR
With your audio system, you can SCAN BUTTON TP INDICATOR AM/FM BUTTON
provided by the Radio Data System
(RDS).
keep listening to the same station A.SEL
even if its frequency changes as you BUTTON
enter different regions while you are
travelling. TUNE BAR SEEK
BAR
matically when you turn the system PRESET
on. If the station you are listening to BARS
cies that carry the same programs. TA/RDS BUTTON PWR/VOL KNOB
This can save you the trouble of
re-tuning to obtain the same station
network area.

05/10/03 19:58:17 32SEA630_252
frequency.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:58:23 32SEA630_253

while you are listening to a CD or C Type AM/FM BUTTON
TP INDICATOR NEWS INDICATOR
is tuned to a TP or EON TP station
before playing a CD or cassette, the TA INDICATOR A.SEL INDICATOR
the system will switch from CD or A.SEL
cassette to the traffic announcement BUTTON
when it begins. The system will
return to the CD or tape mode when
the traffic information is finished.
TA/RDS
To turn off the TA function, press BUTTON

stations.

05/10/03 19:58:28 32SEA630_254
PTY Display Function AFFAIRS : Topical programs SCIENCE : Programs about nature,
When the TA/RDS button is pressed expanding upon the news. science, and technology.
for more than two seconds, the PTY CLASSICS : Serious classics; SPORT : Programs concerned with
display function comes on. This performances of major orchestral any aspect of sports.
function lets you know the type of works. VARIED : Light entertainment
programs the selected RDS station is CULTURE : Programs concerned programs.
‘‘DRAMA’’ is shown in the display. If DRAMA : All radio plays and serials.
it is a station of scientific programs, EASY MUS : M.O.R MUSIC.
‘‘SCIENCE’’ will be shown. The EDUCATE : Educational programs.
principal PTYs are shown as follows. INFO : General information and
advice.
reportage, etc.
Reggae.
popular appeal.
music.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 19:58:35 32SEA630_255
If the selected RDS station does not no further steps are taken within 5 seconds and the PTY search mode is
transmit PTY data, ‘‘NO PTY’’ is seconds after selecting the desired cancelled.
is activated.

05/10/03 19:58:41 32SEA630_256
station/network PTY while you are interrupt function goes out. To display and the volume is changed.
listening to the CD or tape. With this activate the other interrupt function, When the alarm is cancelled, the
function on, playing CD or tape is turn off the currently activated system will return to the normal
interrupted and the system switches interrupt function. operation mode.

automatically.

05/10/03 19:58:47 32SEA630_257
Adjusting the Sound

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are C Type
these you want to adjust by pressing Adjustment Level
the SOUND button, then turning the
VOLUME knob. The mode changes
from BAS to TRE to FAd to BAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
SOUND button.
Treble/Bass − Use these modes to

adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the SOUND
button. Adjust the desired mode by SOUND
turning the VOLUME knob. BUTTON

modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAd adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
VOLUME KNOB

05/10/03 19:58:54 32SEA630_258
Select BAL or FAd by pressing the D Type

SOUND button. Adjust the Balance
or Fader to your liking by turning Adjustment Level LEVEL GAUGE
the VOLUME knob.
The displayed number shows you

the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
On cars with D type audio system

The level gauge on the display also
shows you the range.
The system will automatically return SOUND

the display to the selected audio BUTTON
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
VOLUME knob.
VOLUME KNOB

05/10/03 19:59:01 32SEA630_259
Digital Clock C Type

time when the ignition switch is in DIGITAL CLOCK

button (AUX) until you hear a beep.
The displayed time begins to blink.

the desired time.
Press and hold the M (Preset 5) side PRESET

of the bar until the minutes advance BARS
to the desired time.
Press the Clock Set button (AUX)

again to enter the set time.
CLOCK SET BUTTON

05/10/03 19:59:08 32SEA630_260
You can use the R (Preset 6) side of

D Type
the bar to quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. Press the Clock Set
button (SOUND) until you hear a
beep, then press the R (Preset 6) DIGITAL CLOCK
side of the bar. If the displayed time
is before the half hour, pressing R
sets the clock back to the previous
hour. If the displayed time is after
the half hour, pressing R sets the
clock forward to the beginning of the
next hour.
For example: PRESET

1:06 would RESET to 1:00 BARS
1:52 would RESET to 2:00
If your car’s battery is disconnected

or goes dead, the time setting will be
lost. To set the time again, follow the
setting procedure.
CLOCK SET BUTTON

05/10/03 19:59:15 32SEA630_261
Operating the CD Changer C Type

Your car’s audio system has an in- SCAN BUTTON DISC AND TRACK NUMBERS
dash CD changer that holds up to six
CD LOAD
discs, providing several hours of INDICATOR
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
To load CDs or operate the CD CD

RPT BUTTON
changer, the ignition switch must be BUTTON
in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). SKIP BAR
EJECT
Load and play only standard round BUTTON
discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in CD SLOT
the drive or cause other problems.
You cannot load and play 8-cm
(3-inch) discs in this system.

recording a CD-R, the recording LOAD BUTTON

05/10/03 19:59:23 32SEA630_262
Loading CDs in the Changer

To load multiple CDs in one D Type
RPT BUTTON DISC AND TRACK NUMBERS
operation:
CD LOADED
1. Press and hold the LOAD button INDICATOR
until you hear a beep and see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then
release the button.
CD
RDM BUTTON
2. On the upper side of the display, BUTTON
the disc number for an empty SKIP BAR
position will begin blinking and the
EJECT
green CD load indicator will come BUTTON
on. CD SLOT
3. Insert the disc into the CD slot.

Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD load indicator
turns red and blinks as the CD is
loaded.
LOAD BUTTON SCAN BUTTON

05/10/03 19:59:32 32SEA630_263
4. When the CD load indicator turns To load a single CD: If you press the LOAD button while
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the a CD is playing, the system will stop
display, insert the next disc into 1. Press and release the LOAD playing that CD and start the loading
the CD slot. button. sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
5. Repeat this until all six positions 2. The disc number for an empty
are loaded. The system will then position starts to blink and the You can also load a CD into an empty
begin playing the last CD loaded. green CD load indicator comes on. position while a CD is playing by
When you see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the pressing the appropriate side of a
If you are not loading CDs into all six display, insert the disc into the CD preset bar. Select an empty position
positions, the system will begin slot. Insert it only about halfway; (the disc number indicator is off),
playing the last CD loaded. the drive will pull it in the rest of and press the left or right side of the
the way. preset bar for that position (1 to 6).
If you stop loading CDs before all six The system will stop playing the
positions are filled, and you do not 3. The system will load the CD, and current CD and start the loading
press the LOAD button, the system begin playing it. sequence. It will then play the CD
will wait for ten seconds, then stop just loaded.
the load operation and begin playing
the last CD loaded.


05/10/03 19:59:40 32SEA630_264
Operation To move rapidly within a track, press track for approximately 10 seconds.
Select the CD changer by pressing and hold the left or right side of the If you do nothing, the system will
the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in SKIP bar. You will hear a beep and then play the following tracks for 10
the display. The system will begin the system will continue to move. seconds each. When it plays a track
playing the last selected disc in the Press to move forward, or that you want to continue listening to,
CD changer. You will see the disc to move backward. Release the press the SCAN button again.
and track numbers displayed. bar when the system reaches the
point you want. D-SCAN − This feature, when
When that disc ends, the next disc in activated, samples each first track of
the CD changer is loaded and played. Each time you press and all the discs in the CD changer in the
After the last disc finishes, the release it, the system skips forward order they are stored. To activate
system returns to disc one. to the beginning of the next track. the Scan feature, select the D-Scan
Press and release to skip mode by pressing and holding the
To select a different disc, press the backward to the beginning of the SCAN button. You will see D-SCAN
appropriate side of a preset bar (1 − current track. Press and release it in the display. The system will then
6). If you select an empty position in again to skip to the beginning of the play the first track of the first CD for
the CD changer, the system will go previous track. approximately ten seconds.
into the loading sequence (see page If you do nothing, the system will
260 ). SCAN − This feature, when then play the next CD’s first track.
activated, samples all the tracks on When it plays a disc that you want to
You can use the SKIP bar while a the selected disc in the order they continue listening to, press the
disc is playing to select passages and are recorded on the CD. To activate SCAN button again.
change tracks. the SCAN feature, select the SCAN
mode by pressing the SCAN button.
You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in the display.
The system will then play the first

05/10/03 19:59:46 32SEA630_265
REPEAT − To activate the Repeat On D type audio system To take the system out of CD mode,
feature, press and release the RPT RANDOM PLAY − This feature, press the AM/FM button. Each time
button. You will see RPT in the when activated, plays the tracks you press the AM/FM button, the
display as a reminder. The system within a CD in random order, rather system will change to the next mode;
continuously replays the current than in the order they are recorded FM1, FM, or AM. When you return
track. Press the RPT button again to on the CD. To activate Random Play, to CD mode by pressing the CD
turn it off. Pressing either side of the press the RDM button. You will see button, play will continue at the same
SKIP or TUNE bar also turns off the RDM in the display. The system will point that it left off.
repeat feature. then select and play tracks randomly.
This continues until you deactivate If you turn the system off while a CD
D-REPEAT − This feature, when Random Play by pressing the RDM is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
activated, replays all the tracks on button again, or you select a knob or the ignition switch, play will
the selected disc in the order they different CD with a preset bar. continue at the same point when you
are recorded on the CD. To activate turn it back on.
the disc repeat feature, select the D-
Repeat mode by pressing and
holding the RPT button. You will see
D-RPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current CD.
Press the RPT button again to turn it
off. Pressing either side of the SKIP
or TUNE bar also turns off the
repeat feature.

05/10/03 19:59:52 32SEA630_266
Removing CDs from the Changer C Type

To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You CD SLOT
will see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. When
you remove the disc from the slot, AM/FM BUTTON
the system automatically begins the
Load sequence so you can load
another CD in that position. If you do
not load another CD, after 15 CD
seconds, the system selects the BUTTON
previous mode (AM, FM1, or FM2).
If you do not remove the disc from

the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 15 seconds, and select the
previous mode (AM or FM). To
begin playing the disc, press the CD
button.
To remove a different CD from the

changer, first select it with the left or
right side of the appropriate preset EJECT BUTTON
bar. When that CD begins playing,
press the eject button.
PWR/VOL KNOB

05/10/03 20:00:00 32SEA630_267
If you press the eject button while

D Type
listening to the radio, or with the
audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected. AM/FM BUTTON
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the CDs from the changer. CD
BUTTON
In any mode, if you press the eject
button and hold it until you hear a
beep, the system will eject all of the
CD SLOT
discs in the changer.
You can also eject discs when the

ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first. You
can eject all six discs, one at a time.
Protecting Compact Discs EJECT BUTTON

For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
291 .
PWR/VOL KNOB

05/10/03 20:00:07 32SEA630_268

changer, find the cause in the chart Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
to the right. If you cannot clear the FOCUS Error Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
error indication, take the car to your again. If the code does not disappear or the
dealer. CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Mechanical Error Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.
No CD in the CD Insert CDs.
Changer

05/10/03 20:00:14 32SEA630_269

(Optional) C Type
The cassette system features Dolby＊
RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
AM/FM
BUTTON
ignition switch must be in RPT CD/AUX
BUTTON BUTTON
ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Make
sure the tape opening on the cassette
The system will pull it in the rest of
＊
PWR/VOL KNOB SEEK/SKIP BAR
PRESET BARS

05/10/03 20:00:21 32SEA630_270
The tape direction indicator will light D Type

to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The ▲ indicates NOISE REDUCTION INDICATOR
the side you inserted facing upward RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the Preset 3
(PLAY/PROG) side of the preset AM/FM
bar. RPT BUTTON
BUTTON
CD/AUX
Dolby noise reduction turns on when BUTTON
you insert a cassette. The indi-
cator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the Preset 4 (NR) side of
the preset bar.
Noise reduction remains off until you

PWR/VOL KNOB SEEK/SKIP BAR

PRESET BARS
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:00:28 32SEA630_271
When the system reaches the end of Tape Search Functions SKIP − The Skip function allows
the tape, it will automatically reverse With a cassette playing, you can use you to find the beginning of a song
direction and play the other side. If the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT or passage. To activate SKIP, press
you want to remove the cassette function to find a desired program. the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the
from the drive, press the eject button side to advance to the
on the cassette player. FF/REW − Fast Forward and Re- beginning of the next song or
wind move the tape rapidly. To re- passage, or the side to return to
If you turn the system off while a wind the tape, push the Preset 1 the beginning of the current song or
tape is playing, either with the PWR/ (REW) side of the preset bar. You passage. FF or REW will flash in the
VOL knob or by turning off the will see REW in the display. To fast display as the tape moves. When the
ignition, the cassette will remain in forward the tape, push the Preset 2 system reaches the beginning of the
the drive. When you turn the system (FF) side of the preset bar. You will next song or passage (FF), or the
back on, the cassette player will be in see FF displayed. Press the Preset 1, beginning of the current one (REW),
pause mode. To begin playing, press 2, or 3 side of the bars to take the sys- it goes back to PLAY mode.
the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side of tem out of rewind or fast forward.
To switch to the radio or CD begins to play.
changer while a tape is playing, press
the AM, FM, CD or AUX button. To
change back to the cassette player,
push the CD or AUX button.

05/10/03 20:00:35 32SEA630_272
REPEAT − The Repeat function The SKIP and REPEAT functions Operating the Optional MD
continuously replays the current use silent periods on the tape to find Player/Changer
song or passage. Press the RPT the end of a song or passage. These (For some types)
button to activate it; you will see RPT features may not work to your A MD player or changer is available
displayed as a reminder. When the satisfaction if there is almost no gap for your car as optional equipment.
system reaches the end of the song between selections, a high noise You can operate this MD player/
or passage currently playing, it will level between selections, or a silent changer with the same controls used
automatically go into rewind. When period in the middle of a selection. for the in-dash CD changer. Follow
it senses the beginning of the same the instructions that came with the
song or passage, the system returns Caring for the Cassette Player unit.
to PLAY mode. It will continue to Damaged cassettes can jam inside
repeat this same program until you the drive or cause other problems.
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the See page 296 for information on
button again. cassette care and protection.

05/10/03 20:00:43 32SEA630_273
Audio System (E Type)
With Navigation System

AM/FM/CD Changer AM/FM BUTTON
Audio System
Your car’s audio system provides UPPER
clear reception on each band, while DISPLAY
the preset icons in the Navigation
System display allow you to easily
select your favorite stations.
In some countries, you can also PRESET

utilize many convenient features AUDIO ICONS
DISPLAY
provided by the Radio Data System BUTTON
(RDS). SEEK BAR
The in-dash CD changer holds up to TUNE KNOB PWR/VOL

6 discs. You operate the CD changer KNOB
with the same controls used for the
radio. See page 282 for CD changer
operation. SCAN ICON AUTO SELECT ICON
For some types

05/10/03 20:00:50 32SEA630_274
Operating the Radio You can use any of five methods to SCAN − The SCAN function
The ignition switch must be in find radio stations on the selected samples all the stations with strong
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO signals on the selected band. To
operate the audio system. Turn the SELECT, and the preset icons. activate it, touch the SCAN icon at
system on by pressing the PWR/ the bottom of the display. You will
VOL knob or the AM/FM button. TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to see SCAN in the upper display. The
Adjust the volume by turning the tune the radio to a desired frequency. system will scan up the band for a
PWR/VOL knob. Turn the knob clockwise to tune to a station with a strong signal. When it
higher frequency, or anticlockwise to finds one, it will stop and play that
The band and frequency that the tune to a lower frequency. station for approximately five
radio was last tuned to is displayed. seconds. If you do nothing, the
To change bands, press the AM/FM SEEK − The SEEK function system will then scan for the next
button. On the FM band, ST will be searches the band for a station with strong station and play that for five
seen in the upper display if the a strong signal. To activate it, press seconds. When it plays a station that
station is broadcasting in stereo. and release the SEEK bar ( or you want to continue listening to,
Stereo reproduction on AM is not ). Depending on which side of touch the SCAN icon again.
available. the SEEK bar you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.

05/10/03 20:01:00 32SEA630_275
Preset − You can store the 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to store a total AUTO SELECT − If you are
frequencies of your favourite radio of six stations on each AM and travelling far from home and can no
stations in the six preset icons. Each twelve on FM. longer receive the stations you
icon will store one frequency on each preset, you can use the AUTO
AM band (LW, MW), and two Once a station’s frequency is stored, SELECT feature to find stations in
frequencies on the FM band. simply touch the proper preset icon the local area.
to tune to it.
To store a frequency: To activate Auto Select, touch the
1. Push the AUDIO DISPLAY button The preset frequencies will be lost if Auto Select icon on the display. The
to view the audio display. You will your car’s battery goes dead, is A.SEL indicator will flash in the
see the six preset icons. disconnected, or the radio fuse is upper display, and the system will go
removed. into scan mode for several seconds.
2. Select the desired band, AM (LW), It automatically scans FM band,
AM (MW) or FM. FM1 and FM2 looking for stations with strong
let you store two frequencies with signals. It stores the frequencies of
each preset icon. twelve FM stations in the preset
icons. You can then use the preset
3. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN icons to select those stations.
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
4. Pick the preset icon (1−6) you

want for that station. Touch the
icon, and hold it until you hear a
beep.

05/10/03 20:01:06 32SEA630_276
If you are in a remote area, Auto A.SEL INDICATOR

Select may not find twelve strong
FM stations. If this happens, you will
not see a station number on the UPPER DISPLAY AM/FM BUTTON
corresponding preset icon.
If you do not like the stations Auto

Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset icons.
Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN PRESET
function to find the desired AUDIO
DISPLAY ICONS
frequencies, then store them in the BUTTON
selected preset icons as described SEEK BAR
previously.
TUNE KNOB PWR/VOL
Auto Select does not erase the KNOB
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn SCAN ICON
off Auto Select by touching the AUTO SELECT ICON
AUTO SELECT icon. The preset For some types
icons will then select the frequencies
you originally set.

05/10/03 20:01:14 32SEA630_277

(For some types) TA INDICATOR TP INDICATOR
utilize many convenient features UPPER
provided by the Radio Data System DISPLAY
(RDS).
keep listening to the same station
even if its frequency changes as you
enter different regions while you are
travelling.
TA/RDS
BUTTON
matically when you turn the system
on. If the station you are listening to TUNE KNOB PWR/VOL
is an RDS station, the frequency KNOB
name will be displayed in the upper SCAN ICON
display. Then, the system will
automatically keep selecting the For some types
frequency with the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
same programs. This can save you
the trouble of re-tuning to obtain the
same station as long as you are in the
same RDS network area.

05/10/03 20:01:23 32SEA630_278
system on, and press the TUNE name or PTY information will be display and the system will stand by
knob until ‘‘AF’’ is displayed on the displayed. Press the TA/RDS button for traffic announcements.
upper display. Then, turn the TUNE for more than two seconds to switch
knob left or right. To set the RDS on the display information between the When a traffic information (TP)
or off, press the PWR/VOL knob name of network/station and the station is selected, ‘‘TP’’ will light on
again. PTY information (see page 277 for the display indicating that traffic
the PTY display information). reports can be received from this
When the signals of the RDS station station. When the EON (Enhanced
become so weak that the system can Other Network) TP station is
no longer follow the station, the selected, ‘‘TP’’ will also light on the
system will hold the last tuned display.
frequency and the display will
change from the station name to the EON information cross-references
frequency. other program services that
broadcast traffic information, and
In some countries, you cannot utilize when EON information is received,
features provided by RDS as the traffic reports can be received
RDS function is not provided in all through another program service.
stations.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:01:29 32SEA630_279

while you are listening to a CD or TA INDICATOR TP INDICATOR
is tuned to a TP or EON TP station NEWS INDICATOR
before playing a CD or cassette, the
the system will switch from CD or
cassette to the traffic announcement AM/FM
BUTTON
when it begins. The system will AUTO SELECT
return to the CD or tape mode when ICON TA/RDS
the traffic information is finished. BUTTON

go out from the upper display.

searches only TP or EON TP For some types
stations.

05/10/03 20:01:35 32SEA630_280
PTY Display Function AFFAIRS : Topical programs SCIENCE : Programs about nature,
When the TA/RDS button is pressed expanding upon the news. science, and technology.
for more than two seconds, the PTY CLASSICS : Serious classics; SPORT : Programs concerned with
display function turns on. This performances of major orchestral any aspect of sports.
function lets you know the type of works. VARIED : Light entertainment
programs the selected RDS station is CULTURE : Programs concerned programs.
‘‘DRAMA’’ is shown in the upper DRAMA : All radio plays and serials.
display. If it is a station of scientific EASY MUS : M.O.R MUSIC.
programs, ‘‘SCIENCE’’ will be shown. EDUCATE : Educational programs.
The principal PTYs are shown as INFO : General information and
follows. advice.
reportage, etc.
Reggae.
popular appeal.
music.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:01:41 32SEA630_281
If the selected RDS station does not no further steps are taken within 5 seconds in the upper display and the
transmit PTY data, ‘‘NO PTY’’ is seconds after selecting the desired PTY search mode is cancelled.
is activated.

05/10/03 20:01:47 32SEA630_282
station/network PTY while you are interrupt function goes out. To upper display and the volume is
listening to the CD or tape. With this activate the other interrupt function, changed. When the alarm is
function on, playing CD or tape is turn off the currently activated cancelled, the system will return to
interrupted and the system switches interrupt function. the normal operation mode.

automatically.

05/10/03 20:01:55 32SEA630_283
Adjusting the Sound

To adjust the sound, push the
AUDIO button, then enter the sound Radio CD
grid by touching the SOUND icon on
the display.
Treble/Bass − To adjust the bass

and treble, touch the or
icon on each side of the Treble
or Bass adjustment bar. The
adjustment bars show you the
current settings.
Left/Right Balance and Front/

Rear Fader − These modes adjust (For some types) (For some types)
the strength of the sound coming
from each speaker. Left/Right
balance adjusts the side-to-side
strength, while Front/Rear fader
adjusts the front-to-back strength.
To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjust
the front/rear fader, touch the ‘‘FR’’
or ‘‘RR’’ icon.

05/10/03 20:02:01 32SEA630_284
For some types Digital Clock

Speed-sensitive volume The upper display shows the time
compensation (SVC) − The SVC when the ignition switch is in
mode controls the volume based on ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). The
vehicle speed. The faster you go, the Navigation System receives signals
louder the audio volume becomes. from the Global Positioning System
As you slow down, the audio volume (GPS), and the displayed time is
decrease. updated automatically by the GPS.
Refer to the Navigation System
The default setting is Mid. If you feel Owner’s Manual to set up the time.
the sound is too loud, choose low. If
you feel the sounds is too quiet,
choose Hi.
The see the audio display when you

are finished adjusting the sound,
wait 5 seconds.
Audio System Lighting

(For some types)
You can use the Select/Reset knob
to adjust the illumination of the audio
system (see page122 ). The audio
system illuminates when the parking
lights are on, even if the radio is off.

05/10/03 20:02:09 32SEA630_285
Operating the CD Changer

UPPER DISPLAY
Your car’s audio system has an in-
dash CD changer that holds up to six
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
To load CDs or operate the CD

changer, the ignition switch must be
in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). AUDIO CD/AUX
DISPLAY BUTTON
Load and play only standard round BUTTON
discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in DISC BAR
the drive or cause other problems. PWR/VOL
You cannot load and play 8-cm KNOB
CD SLOT
(3-inch) discs in this system. LOAD BUTTON
For best results when using CD-R CD LOAD INDICATOR EJECT BUTTON
discs, use only high quality discs For some types

05/10/03 20:02:19 32SEA630_286
Loading CDs in the Changer 4. Repeat this until all six positions To load a single CD:
To load multiple CDs in one are loaded. The system will then
operation: begin playing the last CD loaded. 1. Press and release the LOAD
button.
1. Press and hold the LOAD button If you stop loading CDs before all six
until you hear a beep, then you see positions are filled, the system will 2. The disc number icon for an
‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper display. wait for ten seconds, then stop the empty position is highlighted on
load operation and begin playing the the Navigation System display and
2. Insert the disc into the CD slot. last CD loaded. the green CD load indicator comes
Insert it only about halfway; the on. When you see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the
drive will pull it in the rest of the upper display, insert the disc into
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the the CD slot. Insert it only about
display. The CD load indicator halfway; the drive will pull it in the
turns red and blinks as the CD is rest of the way.
loaded.
3. The system will load the CD, and
3. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again in begin playing it.
the display, insert the next disc
into the CD slot.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:02:26 32SEA630_287
If you press the LOAD button while

a CD is playing, the system will stop
playing that CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
You can also load a CD into an empty DISC ICONS

position while a CD is playing by
touching the appropriate disc icon.
Select an empty position (the disc CD/AUX
icon next to the disc number is dark), AUDIO BUTTON
DISPLAY
and touch the icon for that position BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
(1 − 6). The system will stop playing BAR
DISC BAR
the current CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded. CD SLOT
LOAD BUTTON EJECT
BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. For some types

05/10/03 20:02:34 32SEA630_288
Operation To move rapidly within a track, press Track Scan

Select the CD changer by pressing and hold the top or bottom of the When you touch the TRACK SCAN
the CD/AUX button. You will see SKIP bar. You will hear a beep and icon on the audio display, the first
‘‘CD’’ in the upper display. The the system will continue to move track of the current CD plays for
system will begin playing the last through the track. Press to about 10 seconds. You will see
selected disc in the CD changer. You move forward, or to move TRACK SCAN highlighted in the
will see the disc and track numbers backward. Release the bar when the display (or SCAN in the upper
displayed. system reaches the point you want. display). To hear the rest of the
track, touch TRACK SCAN again,
When that disc ends, the next disc in Each time you press and release the within 10 seconds. If you don’t, the
the CD changer is loaded and played. top of the SKIP bar, the system system advances to the next track,
After the last disc finishes, the skips forward to the beginning of the plays about 10 seconds of it, and
system returns to disc one. next track. Press and release the continues through the rest of the
bottom to skip backward to the tracks the same way.
To select a different disc, touch the beginning of the current track. Press
appropriate disc icon (1 − 6) or it again to skip to the beginning of
press the upper side (▲) or the the previous track.
lower side (▼) of the DISC bar next
to the audio display. If you select an
empty position in the CD changer,
the system will go into the loading
sequence (see page 283 ).
You can use the SKIP bar while a

disc is playing to select passages and
change tracks.

05/10/03 20:02:41 32SEA630_289
Disc Scan Track Repeat Random Play

When you touch the DISC SCAN When you touch the TRACK RPT When you touch the RANDOM icon
icon on the audio display, the first icon on the audio display, the system on the audio display, the system
track of the current CD plays for continuously replays the current plays the tracks of the current CD in
about 10 seconds. You will see DISC track. As a reminder, you will see random order, rather than in the
SCAN highlighted in the display (or TRACK REPEAT highlighted in the order they were recorded. As a
D-SCAN in the upper display). To display (or RPT in the upper display). reminder, you will see RANDOM
hear the rest of the CD, touch DISC To turn this feature off, touch highlighted in the display . To turn
SCAN again, within 10 seconds. If TRACK REPEAT again. this feature off, touch RANDOM
you don’t, the system advances to again, or select a different CD with
the next CD, plays about 10 seconds Disc Repeat one of the disc icons.
of its first track, and continues When you touch the DISC RPT icon
through the rest of the CDs the on the audio display, the system
same way. continuously replays the current CD.
As a reminder, you will see DISC
REPEAT highlighted in the display
(or D-RPT in the upper display). To
turn this feature off, touch Disc RPT
again.

05/10/03 20:02:47 32SEA630_290
To take the system out of CD mode,

press the AM/FM button. Each time
you press the AM/FM button, the
system changes to the next mode:
AM (LW), AM (MW), FM1, or FM2.
When you return to CD mode by
pressing the CD button, play will
continue at the same point that it left AM/FM
off. BUTTON
CD BUTTON
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or the ignition switch, play will DISC ICONS
continue at the same point when you
turn it back on.
PWR/VOL KNOB
For some types
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:02:54 32SEA630_291
Removing CDs from the Changer

To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the upper display
and the load indicator turns red and
blinks. When you remove the disc
from the slot, the system
automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
CD in that position. If you do not
load another CD, after 15 seconds, CD BUTTON
the system selects the previous
mode (AM/LW, AM/MW, FM1, or DISC BAR
FM2).
If you do not remove the disc from

the slot, the system will reload the EJECT
disc after 15 seconds and put the CD BUTTON
CD SLOT
changer in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button. For some types
To remove a different CD from the

changer, first select it with the
appropriate disc icon or the DISC bar.
When that CD begins playing, press
the eject button.

05/10/03 20:03:01 32SEA630_292
If you press the eject button while Protecting Compact Discs Operating the Optional MD
listening to the radio, or with the For information on how to handle Player/Changer
audio system turned off, the disc and protect compact discs, see page (For some types)
that was last selected is ejected. 291 . A MD player or changer is available
After that disc is ejected, pressing for your car as optional equipment.
the eject button again will eject the You can operate this MD player/
next disc in numerical order. By changer with the same controls used
doing this six times, you can remove for the audio system in the
all the CDs from the changer. Navigation System. Follow the
instructions that came with the unit.
In any mode, if you press the eject
button and hold it until you hear a
beep, the system will eject all of the
discs in the changer.
You can also eject discs when the

ignition switch is off by pressing the
eject button. The disc that was last
selected is ejected first. You can
eject all six discs, one at a time.

05/10/03 20:03:08 32SEA630_293

upper display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
to the right. If you cannot clear the FOCUS Error Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
error indication, take the car to your again. If the code does not disappear or the
dealer. CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Mechanical Error Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.
normal.

05/10/03 20:03:16 32SEA630_294
Protecting Compact Discs
Handle a CD by its edges; never When a CD is not being played, store A new CD may be rough on the
touch either surface. Do not place it in its case to protect it from dust inner and outer edges. The small
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. and other contamination. To prevent plastic pieces causing this roughness
These, along with contamination warpage, keep CDs out of direct can flake off and fall on the re-
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip sunlight and extreme heat. cording surface of the disc, causing
pens, can cause the CD to not play skipping or other problems. Remove
properly, or possibly jam in the drive. To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth. these pieces by rubbing the inner
Wipe across the disc from the centre and outer edges with the side of a
to the outside edge. pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in

the CD player or the magazine.

05/10/03 20:03:23 32SEA630_295

(Optional) RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
The cassette system features Dolby＊

ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Make AUDIO AM/FM
DISPLAY BUTTON
sure the tape opening on the cassette BUTTON CD/AUX
is facing to the right, then insert the BUTTON
CH/DISC BAR SEEK/SKIP
The system will pull it in the rest of BAR
PWR/VOL
＊
KNOB
For some types

05/10/03 20:03:29 32SEA630_296
The tape direction indicator will light Dolby noise reduction turns on when If you turn the system off while a
on the upper display to show you you insert a cassette. If the tape was tape is playing, either with the PWR/
which side of the cassette is playing. not recorded with Dolby noise reduc- VOL knob or by turning off the
The ▲ indicates the side you tion, push the AUDIO DISPLAY ignition, the cassette will remain in
inserted facing upward is now button to change to the audio display, the drive. When you turn the system
playing. If you want to play the other and turn it off by touching the NR back on, the cassette player will be in
side, push the AUDIO DISPLAY icon on the display. pause mode. To begin playing, push
button to change to the audio display, the AUDIO DISPLAY button to
and touch the PROG icon. Noise reduction remains off until you change to the audio display, and
turn it on by pressing the icon again. touch the PROG icon.
When the system reaches the end of To switch to the radio or CD

the tape, it will automatically reverse changer while a tape is playing, press
direction and play the other side. If the AM, FM, CD or AUX button. To
you want to remove the cassette change back to the cassette player,
from the drive, press the eject button push the CD or AUX button.

05/10/03 20:03:34 32SEA630_297
Tape Search Functions FF/REW − Fast Forward and Re- SKIP − The Skip function allows
(For some types) wind move the tape rapidly. To re- you to find the beginning of a song
With a cassette playing, you can use wind the tape, push the upper side or passage. To activate SKIP, press
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT (▲) of the CH DISC bar. You will the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the
function to find a desired program. see REW in the display. To fast for- side to advance to the
ward the tape, push the lower side beginning of the next song or
(▼) of the CH DISC bar. You will passage, or the side to return to
see FF displayed. Press either side of the beginning of the current song or
the CH DISC bar or touch the PROG passage. FF or REW will be shown in
icon in the audio display to take the the upper display as the tape moves.
system out of rewind or fast forward. When the system reaches the
When the system reaches the end of beginning of the next song or
the tape, it reverses direction and passage (FF), or the beginning of
begins to play. the current one (REW), it goes back
to PLAY mode.

05/10/03 20:03:38 32SEA630_298
REPEAT − The Repeat function The SKIP and REPEAT functions

continuously replays the current use silent periods on the tape to find
song or passage. Press the AUDIO the end of a song or passage. These
DISPLAY button to change to the features may not work to your
audio display, and touch the RPT satisfaction if there is almost no gap
icon in the display to activate it; you between selections, a high noise
will see RPT displayed in the upper level between selections, or a silent
display as a reminder. When the period in the middle of a selection.
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by touching the
icon again.

05/10/03 20:03:46 32SEA630_299
Audio System
Caring for the Cassette Player Look at the cassette before you On Audio systems without Navigation
The cassette player picks up dirt and insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten System
oxides from the tape. This contami- it by turning a hub with a pencil or If you see the error indication
nation builds up over time and your finger. ‘‘ ’’ flashing on the display,
causes the sound quality to degrade. press the TAPE eject button to
To prevent this, you should clean the If the label is peeling off, remove it remove the cassette from the unit.
player after every 30 hours of use. from the cassette or it could cause Make sure the tape is not damaged.
the cassette to jam in the player. If the cassette will not eject or the
If you do not clean the cassette Never try to insert a warped or error indication stays on after the
player regularly, it may eventually damaged cassette in the player. cassette ejects, take the car to your
become impossible to remove the dealer.
contamination with a normal When they are not in use, store
cleaning kit. cassettes in their cases to protect On Audio systems with Navigation
them from dust and moisture. Never System
Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes. place cassettes where they will be If you see the error indication
Cassettes longer than that use exposed to direct sunlight, high heat, ‘‘ ’’ on the upper display,
thinner tape that may break or jam or high humidity. If a cassette is press the TAPE eject button to
the drive. exposed to extreme heat or cold, let remove the cassette from the unit.
it reach a moderate temperature Make sure the tape is not damaged.
before inserting it in the player. If the cassette will not eject or the
error indication stays on after the
Never try to insert foreign objects cassette ejects, take the car to your
into the cassette player. dealer.

05/10/03 20:03:53 32SEA630_300
Audio System
Remote Audio Controls The MODE button changes the

MODE BUTTON
Three controls for the audio system mode. Pressing the button
are mounted in the steering wheel repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
hub. These let you control basic CD (if a CD is loaded), or a cassette
functions without removing your (if equipped).
hand from the wheel.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (＋) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
The VOL button adjusts the volume preset station.
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top
or bottom of the button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:03:57 32SEA630_301
Audio System
If you are playing a CD, the system

skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
(＋) of the CH button. Press the
bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
number in the display.
If you are playing a tape in the

optional cassette player, press the
top (＋) of the CH button to advance
to the next selection. Press the
bottom (−) to go back to the
previous selection. The system
senses a silent period, then goes
back to Play mode.

05/10/03 20:04:04 32SEA630_302
Security System (For some types)
The security system helps to protect To set the ultrasonic sensor along
your car and valuables from theft. with the security system, you should
The horn sounds (the beeping alarm lock the doors and the boot with the
on vehicles with ultrasonic sensor) key or the remote transmitter.
and the turn signal lights flash if
someone attempts to break into your When you lock the doors and the
car or remove the radio. This alarm boot with the key or the remote
continues for 30 seconds, then the transmitter, all outside turn signals
system resets. and both indicators in the
instrumental panel flash three times
To reset an alarming system before to verify the doors and the boot are
30 seconds have elapsed, unlock the SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR locked and the security system has
driver’s door with the ignition key or set. When you unlock them, these
the remote transmitter. The security system sets automati- lights flash once.
cally 15 seconds (25 seconds with
On cars with the ultrasonic sensor, the ultrasonic sensor activated) after Once the security system is set,
only the remote transmitter can you lock the doors, bonnet, and boot. opening any door (without using the
reset the security system. Unlocking For the system to activate, you must key or the remote transmitter), the
the driver’s door with the key cannot lock the doors and the boot from the bonnet or the boot will cause it to
reset the security system. outside with the key, lock tab, alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
master door lock switch, or remote removed from the dashboard or the
transmitter. The security system wiring is cut.
starts blinking immediately to show
you the system is setting itself.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:04:10 32SEA630_303
With the system set, you can still The security system will not set if Do not attempt to alter this system
open the boot with the remote the bonnet, boot, or any door is not or add other devices to it.
transmitter without triggering the fully closed. If the system will not set,
alarm. The alarm will sound if the check the Door and Boot Open
boot lock is forced, or the boot is Monitor on the instrument panel
opened with the boot release handle. (see page 89 ), to see if the doors
and boot are fully closed. Since it is
The alarm will also be activated if not part of the monitor display,
the passenger inside the locked car manually check the bonnet.
turns the ignition switch on.
On cars with super locking system

When you set the super locking
along with the security system, the
alarm is not activated if someone
tried to open a door with the lock
tabs or the master door lock switch
on the driver’s door.

05/10/03 20:04:17 32SEA630_304
Ultrasonic Sensor system set, only the ultrasonic Whether the ultrasonic sensor is
(For some types) sensor may activate. activated or not, the security system
can be reset by only the remote
transmitter, not the key.
If you set the security system with

the windows or the sunroof open, the
ultrasonic sensor may activate the
alarm unexpectedly when the system
senses strong impacts on the car or
loud sound.
You can set the security system

ULTRASONIC SENSOR without activating the ultrasonic
sensor. Remove the ignition key,
Ultrasonic sensor is only activated push the lock tab down with the
when the security system is set by driver’s door open, then close the
the key or the remote transmitter. A door. The security system indicator
sensor is located near the spotlights on the instrument panel comes on
on the front ceiling. It monitors the for three seconds, then starts
interior of the vehicle and activates blinking.
the alarm if someone attempts to get
into the passenger compartment
through a window or sunroof (if
equipped), or moves in the
compartment. With the security

05/10/03 20:04:25 32SEA630_305
Cruise Control (For some types)
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using Cruise Control 3. Press and release the DECEL/
a set speed above 40 km/h (25 mph) SET button on the steering wheel.
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON
without keeping your foot on the The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
RES/
accelerator pedal. It should be used ACCEL on the instrument panel comes on
for cruising on straight, open BUTTON to show the system is now
motorways. It is not recommended activated.
for conditions such as city driving,
winding roads, slippery roads, heavy The cruise control may not hold the
rain, or bad weather. You should set speed when you are going up and
have full control of the car under down hills. If your speed increases
those conditions. going down a hill, use the brakes to
DECEL/
SET slow down to the desired speed. This
CANCEL BUTTON BUTTON will cancel the cruise control. To
resume the set speed, press the
Improper use of the cruise 1. Push in the Cruise Control Master RESUME/ACCEL button. The
control can lead to a crash. Button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the
CRUISE MAIN indicator on the instrument panel comes on.
Use the cruise control only instrument panel comes on.
when travelling on open When climbing a steep hill, the
motorways in good weather. 2. Accelerate to the desired cruising automatic transmission may
speed above 40 km/h (25 mph). downshift to hold the set speed.

05/10/03 20:04:33 32SEA630_306
Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising Even with the cruise control turned
You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: on, you can still use the accelerator
speed in any of these ways: pedal to speed up for passing. After
Press and hold the DECEL/SET completing the pass, take your foot
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. The car will decelerate. off the accelerator pedal. The car
button. The car will accelerate. Release the button when you will return to the set cruising speed.
When you reach the desired reach the desired speed.
cruising speed, release the button. Resting your foot on the brake or
To slow down in very small clutch pedal will cause the cruise
To increase your speed in very amounts, tap the DECEL/SET control to cancel.
small amounts, tap the RES/ button repeatedly. Each time you
ACCEL button repeatedly. Each do this, your car will slow down
time you do this, your car will about 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
speed up about 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac- lightly with your foot. The
celerate to the desired cruising CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
speed and press the DECEL/SET the instrument panel will go out.
button. When the car slows to the desired
speed, press the DECEL/SET
button. The car will then maintain
the desired speed.

05/10/03 20:04:41 32SEA630_307
Cancelling the Cruise Control When you push the CANCEL button, Pressing the Cruise Control Master
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the Button turns the system completely
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the off and erases the previous cruising
instrument panel will go out and the speed from memory. To use the
car will begin to slow down. You can system again, refer to Using the
use the accelerator pedal in the Cruise Control.
normal way.
The system remembers the

previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above 40 km/h (25 mph), then press
CANCEL BUTTON and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
You can cancel the cruise control in comes on, and the car will accelerate
any of these ways: to the same cruising speed as before.
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the

steering wheel.
Press the Cruise Control Master

button on the steering wheel.

05/10/03 20:04:49 32SEA630_308
Adaptive Cruise Control (For some types)
ACC Components Models with ACC ACC WARNING INDICATOR (amber)

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) ACC INDICATOR (green)
consists of a radar sensor in the
front grille, the ACC buttons on the
steering wheel, and the ACC
functions of the multi-information
display.
RES/ACCEL BUTTON
When you turn the ignition switch to DECEL/SET
the ON (II) position, the ACC ACC BUTTON BUTTON
indicator (ACC/LKAS indicator) and
the ACC warning indicator (ACC/ MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY
LKAS warning indicator) come on
for several seconds. When you press
the ACC button, the ACC indicator
comes on. When there is a problem
with the ACC, the ACC warning
indicator comes on. Also, you will see
the symbol ‘‘ ( )’’ or
the symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
CANCEL BUTTON DISTANCE BUTTON
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:04:54 32SEA630_309
Model with ACC/LKAS ACC/LKAS WARNING INDICATOR (amber)

ACC/LKAS INDICATOR (green)
RES/ACCEL BUTTON
DECEL/SET
MAIN BUTTON BUTTON
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY
CANCEL BUTTON DISTANCE BUTTON

05/10/05 15:23:54 32SEA630_310
Overview If the vehicle ahead of you slows As with any system, there are limits
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) allows down suddenly, ACC alerts you by to ACC. Inappropriate use of ACC
you to maintain a set speed and keep sounding a beeper and displaying a can result in a serious accident. Use
the vehicle ahead of you at a safe message on the multi-information the brake pedal whenever necessary,
distance without having to use the display. and always keep a safe distance
accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. between your car and other vehicles.
The ACC radar sensor in the front
When the vehicle ahead of you slows grille can detect and monitor the Do not use ACC under these
down or speeds up, ACC senses the distance of a vehicle up to 100 conditions:
change in distance and compensates metres (328 feet) ahead of your car. In poor visibility.
by accelerating or braking your car In heavy traffic.
to reach the cruising speed you When you must slow down and
previously set. The distance between speed up repeatedly.
vehicles is based on your speed: the On winding roads.
faster you go, the longer the distance On steep downhills.
will be; the slower you go, the
shorter it will be.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:05:12 32SEA630_311
When you enter a toll gate, Operating Characteristics

interchange, service area, parking
area, etc. In these areas, there is
no vehicle ahead of you, but ACC
would still try to accelerate to your
set speed.
In bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

etc.)
On slippery roads (for example,

roads covered with ice or snow).
When there is no vehicle ahead within When a vehicle ahead is within ACC
Improper use of ACC can lead ACC range range and going slower than your set
to a crash. Your car will maintain a set cruising speed
speed. If the vehicle ahead of you is going
Use ACC only when slower than your set speed, your car
travelling on open will slow down to the speed of that
motorways in good weather. vehicle. Your car will then follow at a
constant distance until the vehicle
ahead changes speed again.

05/10/03 20:05:19 32SEA630_312
If the vehicle ahead of you slows

down abruptly, of if another vehicle
cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds
and a message appears on the multi-
information display to warn you.
When a vehicle ahead is within ACC If the vehicle ahead of you changes
range and going at a steady speed lanes, ACC no longer tracks it. Your
Your car follows the vehicle ahead of car will then return to your set speed.
it, keeping a constant distance. ACC
will not keep your car at a constant When the brakes are automatically
distance if the vehicle ahead of you applied, the system may make some
goes out of range of your set speed noise. However, it is not a
(above 180 km/h (112 mph) or malfunction.
below 30 km/h (20 mph)).

05/10/03 20:05:31 32SEA630_313
Limitations Radar Sensor Using the ACC

ACC does not work below 25 The radar sensor is located behind
ACC BUTTON
km/h (17 mph). It cannot bring the Honda emblem in the front grille.
your car to a complete stop. If the emblem is covered with mud,
dirt, wet snow, etc., or if a sticker is
ACC will not sound a beeper or on the emblem, the ACC will not
display a message on the multi- work. Also, the ACC warning
information display to warn you of indicator will come on and you will
vehicles going slower than 20 see the symbol ‘‘ ( )’’
km/h (13 mph) or vehicles that or the symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
are parked. In these cases, it is up SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
to you to maintain a safe distance information display.
by using the brake pedal. Models with ACC shown
Always keep the emblem clean. If it
ACC may not recognise gets dirty, clean it with water or a 1. Push the ACC button on the
motorcycles or other small mild detergent. Never use chemical steering wheel. The ACC indicator
vehicles ahead of your car. solvents or polishing powder. on the instrument panel comes on,
and you will see the symbol
ACC may react to vehicles beside Do not allow anything to impact the ‘‘ ( )’’ or the symbol
you or even buildings beside you radar sensor or the emblem. If the with an ‘‘ACC’’ message on the
by momentarily applying the front grille ever needs to be repaired, multi-information display.
brakes or sounding a beeper under consult a dealer first.
some conditions like the sudden 2. Accelerate to the desired speed
curve, the narrow lane, the abrupt above 30 km/h (20 mph).
operation of the steering wheel, or
the position of your car in the lane.

05/10/03 20:05:40 32SEA630_314
DECEL/SET BUTTON For some types
SET VEHICLE SPEED

SET VEHICLE DISTANCE
For some types
3. Press and release the DECEL/ When you speed reaches 25 km/h When the speed is set, it is shown
SET button on the steering wheel. (17 mph), ACC goes into wait mode, along with a car symbol and distance
and you will see an ‘‘ACC’’ or ‘‘ACC bars on the multi-information display.
If you press the DECEL/SET button STANDBY’’ message on the multi-
when the car speed is below information display. Refer to page 315 for how to set and
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph), change the set distance between
you will hear three beeps. This your car and the vehicle ahead of
means ACC is not activated, and you you.
cannot set your speed.
To change the speed unit
measurement, see page 107 .
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:05:49 32SEA630_315
Increasing the Set Speed

For some types RES/ACCEL BUTTON
INITIAL SPEED UNIT

For some types
INITIAL SPEED UNIT
PREVIOUSLY SET SPEED

If you change the speed unit If you cancel ACC by pressing the The set speed can be increased
measurement from the factory CANCEL button or by tapping the using the RES/ACCEL button or the
default setting, the initial speed unit brake pedal, the previously set accelerator pedal.
measurement is shown under the cruising speed is shown on the multi-
current unit. information display. To store this To increase the set speed with the
speed as your new cruising speed, RES/ACCEL button, do this:
press and release the RES/ACCEL
button. Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. The car will accelerate.
When you reach the speed you want,
release the button.

05/10/03 20:05:58 32SEA630_316
To increase your speed in small To increase the set speed with the Decreasing the Set Speed
amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL accelerator pedal, press the
button repeatedly. Each time you do accelerator pedal to increase to the DECEL/SET BUTTON
this, your car will speed up about 2 speed you want, then press the
mph (when you set the ACC display DECEL/SET button. The set speed
speed measure to km/h in the will be shown on the multi-
customizing setting, it is 5 km/h). information display.
While the car accelerates to the set If you do not press the DECEL/SET
speed, the set speed on the multi- button, your car will return to the
information display will flash. previously set speed. The ACC
beeper will not sound while you
If a vehicle ahead of you is driving at press the accelerator pedal, no Models with ACC shown
a slower speed than the speed you matter how close you get to the
want to set, your car will not vehicle ahead of you. The set speed can be decreased
accelerate; it will keep some distance using the DECEL/SET button or the
between your vehicles. brake pedal.
To decrease the set speed with the

DECEL/SET button, do this;
Press and hold the DECEL/SET

button. Release the button when you
reach the speed you want.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:06:05 32SEA630_317
To slow down in small amounts, tap To decrease the set speed with the Detecting a Vehicle Ahead of You
the DECEL/SET button repeatedly. brake pedal, do this:
Each time you do this, your car slows
down about 2 mph (when you set the Tap the brake pedal. When the car
ACC display speed measure to km/h slows down to the speed you want,
in the customizing setting, it is 5 press the DECEL/SET button. The
km/h). set speed will be shown on the multi-
information display. If you use the
The set cruising speed will be shown brake pedal to decrease speed, and
on the multi-information display. then press the RES/ACCEL button,
your car will return to the previously
On a steep downhill, the car speed set speed.
may exceed the set cruising speed.
When the system detects a vehicle

ahead of you, a solid-line vehicle icon
appears.
You can customize the ‘‘Pre-Running

Car Detect Beep’’ setting (see pages
100 and 107 ).

05/10/03 20:06:15 32SEA630_318
Changing Vehicle Distance To change the range, press the

DISTANCE button. Each time you
DISTANCE BUTTON press the button, the range changes
from Long, to Middle and then to
Short.
The higher your car speed is, the

longer the distance will be set as
shown below.
80 km/h 104 km/h

(50 mph) (65 mph)
Models with ACC shown Long 47 metres 61 metres
(154 feet) (200 feet)
If there is no vehicle ahead of you With ACC on, the distance between Middle 34 metres 42 metres
within ACC range, a dotted-line your car and the vehicle ahead of (111 feet) (173 feet)
vehicle icon will be on the multi- you is controlled and maintained. Short 26 metres 31 metres
information display. You can change this distance to one (85 feet) (101 feet)
of three ranges: long, middle or
To set the ACC beeper on or off, see short.
page 107 .
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:06:24 32SEA630_319
The distance you select is also Cancelling the ACC When you push the CANCEL button
shown on the multi-information or tap the brake pedal to cancel ACC,
display. CANCEL BUTTON the set cruising speed stays in
memory. When you turn on ACC
Long Range again, the speed is shown on the
multi-information display. To return
to that speed, accelerate to over 30
km/h (20 mph), then press the RES/
ACCEL button.
Middle Range If you cancel ACC by pressing the
ACC button, the previously set
Models with ACC shown cruising speed is erased from
memory.
ACC is cancelled whenever you do
any of these actions:
Short Range
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Tap the brake pedal.
Press the ACC button. The ACC
goes off.

05/10/03 20:06:34 32SEA630_320
Automatic ACC Cancellation If ACC is cancelled by any of these If you turn the ignition switch to the
When ACC is automatically conditions, wait until the condition ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
cancelled, the beeper sounds three improves, then press the RES/ position after ACC was automatically
times, and an ACC OFF message ACCEL button to restore ACC. cancelled, the set speed is erased,
appears on the multi-information When you do this, the car will and you must enter it again (see
display for 3 seconds. resume its set cruising speed. page 311 ).
Any of these conditions may cause

ACC to cancel:
The car speed decreases below
approximately 25 km/h (17 mph).
Poor weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
When the radar sensor in the front
grille gets dirty.
The vehicle ahead of you cannot
be detected.
An abnormal tyre condition is
detected or the tyres are skidding.
Driving on a mountainous road, or
driving off road for extended
periods.
Abrupt steering wheel movement.
When the ABS or VSA is activated.
When the VSA indicator comes on.

05/10/03 20:06:40 32SEA630_321
ACC Warning Indicator
ACC WARNING INDICATOR
This indicator comes on when there

is a problem with the ACC system.
You will see the symbol
‘‘ ( )’’ or the symbol
with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display. If
this happens, take the car to your
dealer to have it checked. The ACC
system cannot be used while this
indicator is on.

05/10/03 20:06:47 32SEA630_322
Messages on the Multi-

Information Display Message Description
The multi-information display shows
various messages related to ACC.
For a description of each ACC
message you may see, refer to the
chart on this and the following page. ACC is on.
ACC is suspended.
A cruising speed can be set by

pressing the DECEL/SET button.
ACC is on standby, and the previously

set cruising speed is in memory. The
previously set speed can be resumed
by pressing the RES/ACCEL button.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:06:55 32SEA630_323
Message Description Message Description
ACC has been automatically cancelled

because of poor weather or other
ACC detects a vehicle ahead of you. conditions.
You will hear three beeps.
Apply the brakes immediately. Your

ACC does not detect a vehicle ahead car is too close to the vehicle ahead of
of you. it.
You will hear a continuous beep.
ACC needs to be checked.

ACC has been automatically cancelled
because its radar sensor in the front Have your car checked by a dealer.
grille is dirty.

05/10/03 20:07:00 32SEA630_324
Message Description
Change up.
Change down.

05/10/03 20:07:05 32SEA630_325
Lane Keeping Assist System (For some types)
The Lane Keeping Assist System When the system detects that the The LKAS is not a substitute for
(LKAS) monitors the lane lines of a car is about to veer away from either driver’s steering operation. The
motorway or unwinding road in a line, the system applies torque to the driver’s operation of the steering
suburb, alerts you when your car steering and assists the driver’s wheel is essential.
starts veering off a lane, and assists steering operation to keep between
steering operation to help keep the the lines. The system does not work
car between the right and left lines. if the driver takes their hands off the
The LKAS operates when the car steering wheel or neglects steering
speed is 72−180 km/h (45−112 operation.
mph).

05/10/03 20:07:15 32SEA630_326
Operating the LKAS LKAS Camera
LKAS CAMERA
When travelling in a lane
When making a lane

change
: The LKAS is in operation

: The LKAS is suspended
When travelling in a lane When making a lane change The LKAS camera is attached
As the car becomes closer to either When you operate turn signals to behind the rear-view mirror.
the left or right lane line, the change lanes, the system is
steering torque that is applied by the suspended. Torque will not be For the camera’s proper operation;
system becomes stronger. As the car applied to the steering wheel. After Do not touch the lens.
starts to return to the centre of the you change lanes and the signals are Do not block the camera’s view.
lane, the torque becomes weaker. off, the LKAS resumes when the Keep the windscreen clean.
lanes are detected. Avoid bumping the camera.

05/10/03 20:07:24 32SEA630_327
LKAS Warning Indicator and LKAS Indicator Using the LKAS

Warning Display
MAIN BUTTON
LKAS BUTTON
When you turn the ignition switch to To activate the LKAS, press the
The LKAS warning indicator and the ON (II) position, the LKAS MAIN button, then the LKAS button.
warning display will turn on when indicator will come on for several
there is a problem with the system. seconds. The LKAS indicator is Even when the ignition switch is in
You will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or green. the ON (II) position and the LKAS is
the symbol with a ‘‘CHECK activated, the LKAS may be
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- suspended under certain conditions.
information display. The LKAS
warning indicator is amber. Have
your car checked by a dealer.

05/10/05 15:24:02 32SEA630_328
When the car speed is between 72 Cancelling the LKAS

km/h (45 mph) and 180 km/h (112
mph), and the lane lines to follow are MAIN BUTTON
successfully detected, the dotted
lane lines will turn solid and the
system will apply the steering torque.
When the car speed is not between
72 km/h (45 mph) and 180 km/h
(112 mph), the LKAS will be
suspended.
NOTE:
When the car speed is 30−180 km/h LKAS BUTTON
(20−112 mph), symbols of the ACC
Dotted lane lines appear on the will appear simultaneously. To cancel the LKAS only, press the
multi-information display when the (e.g. ACC STANDBY) LKAS button. To cancel the LKAS
LKAS is activated. and the ACC (Adaptive Cruise
Control) simultaneously, press the
MAIN button.

05/10/03 20:07:44 32SEA630_329
Operating Conditions of the The wiper switch is in the OFF, Important Safety Reminders
LKAS AUTO or MIST position. The LKAS is not a substitute for
driver’s steering operation and has
OFF, AUTO or MIST Even when the conditions are all met, limitations.
the LKAS may be left suspended or
not operate due to rain, hail, snow, If the boot or the rear seat is heavily
etc. loaded, the car tilts backward and
the LKAS may not work properly.
The LKAS will be suspended Also, it may not if the tyres are
automatically when it fails to detect overinflated or underinflated (for the
lane lines. Once the system correct tyre pressures, see the tyre
recognises the lines again, the pressure label on the driver’s
72 − 180 km/h
(45 − 112 mph) system resumes automatically. doorjamb).
The LKAS stays on when the wiper Do not use the LKAS when a trailer
The LKAS operates when all the switch is in the MIST position. is joined to the car.
conditions below are met. However, the LKAS will be
There are lane lines (the right and suspended if you do not release the Do not place an object on the
left), and the car runs in the switch, letting the wipers instrument panel. There is a danger
middle of a lane. continuously run. that the object may reflect onto the
The car runs at 72−180 km/h (45 windscreen, confuse the system and
−112 mph). prevent it from detecting lane lines
The car runs on a straight or properly.
gently curved road.
The turn signals are OFF.
The brake pedal is not pressed.

05/10/03 20:07:54 32SEA630_330
Do not alter the suspension on this When the car runs on a road
car. If the car’s height or the under construction or a limited
suspension is changed, there is a Under the following conditions, the lane.
danger that the system may not system may not be able to establish
work properly. the correct car position or the When the car runs on a lane with a
system will be suspended. guardrail or a block wall on the
If the car inclines toward either left side.
or right lane line due to the system When sections of the road have an
applying torque, stop using the increasing or decreasing number When a road still slightly shows
LKAS and have your car checked by of lane lines or the lane lines old lane lines.
a dealer. intersect complicatedly.
When the car runs on a curved
When driving a slip road such as road over the speed limit.
near a parking area, a rest area, a
toll gate, an interchange, etc.
When a vehicle ahead is too close

to lane lines.
When lane lines are not clearly

visible due to mud, snow, rain, fog
or worn lines.
A sudden change between light

and dark such as an entrance or
exit of a tunnel. CONTINUED

05/10/14 15:36:59 32SEA630_331
When the headlight lenses are Suspending of the LKAS The LKAS will be suspended under
dirty and the lights can’t illuminate any of the conditions below.
the road sufficiently. When the system fails to detect
When the windscreen is dirty or lane lines.
cloudy. When the car speed goes below 64
When a strong back light is km/h (40 mph).
reflected on the road surface. When the car speed goes over 180
When the road surface is wet and km/h (112 mph).
shiny such as after if it has been When the steering wheel is
raining and when there are quickly turned.
puddles on the road. When you do not operate the
When crash barriers are creating steering wheel.
shadows parallel to the lines on (See the next page.)
the road. When the car runs on a sharply
When the lane the car is in is too The LKAS will be suspended, the curved road.
narrow or too wide. dotted lane symbol will appear on the When you press the brake pedal.
When the lane the car is in is multi-information display and you When you operate the turn signals.
bumpy or distorted. will hear a beep. The system will
When the car is about to approach stop to apply the steering torque. After all of these conditions are
the top of a hill. cleared, the LKAS will resume
automatically.

05/10/03 20:08:16 32SEA630_332
Lane Departure Warning When the lane lines can’t be If the Steering Wheel is not in
detected, the LKAS buzzer does not Use
sound and the LKAS warning display
does not appear on the multi-
When the car is close to a lane line,

this warning will appear on the multi- Several seconds after you take your
information display and you will hear hands off the steering wheel;
a continuous beep. Operate the You will hear a beep.
steering wheel and drive in the The lane symbol will change to a
middle of the lane the car is in. dotted lane, and the steering
wheel symbol will blink.
The LKAS will be suspended, and
stop to apply the steering torque.
When you operate the steering

wheel, the LKAS resumes.

05/10/14 15:37:05 32SEA630_333
When the LKAS Camera is Hot or You should turn on the air
Cold conditioner, please wait until the
camera is cooled down.
If the LKAS camera gets extremely

hot or cold while the LKAS is in use,
the CAMERA TEMPERATURE and
LKAS OFF symbols will appear and
you will hear a beep. The LKAS will
be suspended, and stop to apply the
steering torque.
If you turn on the LKAS when the

LKAS camera is extremely hot or
cold, you will hear three beeps.

05/10/14 15:37:13 32SEA630_334
Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)
Optional on cars with navigation system Voice Control To use the HFT system, your phone
Your car is equipped with the Hands- HFT system recognizes simple voice must have approved Bluetooth
Free Telephone (HFT) system. HFT commands, such as phone numbers capability along with the Hands Free
system uses Bluetooth technology as and names. It uses these commands Profile. This type of phone is
a wireless link between it and your to automatically dial, receive, and available through many phone
Bluetooth compatible mobile phone. store numbers. For more makers and network operators.
When you are in your car and your information on voice control, see
phone is linked to the HFT system, Using Voice Control on page 333 . Incoming/Outgoing Calls
you’ll enjoy hands-free phone use. With a linked phone, the HFT
The HFT system is available in any Bluetooth Wireless Technology system allows you to send and
of the five languages; English, Bluetooth is a registered trademark receive calls in your car without
French, Italian, German, and Spanish. of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. holding the phone.
To change the language, see page Bluetooth is the wireless technology
346 . that links your phone to the HFT
system. The HFT system uses a
The available language is set to Class 3 Bluetooth, which means the
English as the default setting when maximum range between your
your car leaves the factory. The phone and car is 30 feet (10 metres).
voice of the HFT system is set to
female.
Here are the main features of the

HFT system. Instructions for using
the HFT system begin on page 333 .

05/10/14 15:37:22 32SEA630_335
Phonebook HFT Buttons Here is the function of each HFT

The HFT system can store up to 50 button:
names and phone numbers in its
phonebook. With a linked phone, you HFT Talk: This button is used
can then automatically dial any name before you give a command, to
or number in the phonebook. HFT answer incoming calls, and to
TALK confirm system information.
Here are the main components of BUTTON
the HFT system: HFT Back: This button is used to
end a call, go back to the previous
Microphone voice control command, and to
The HFT system microphone is on cancel an operation.
the ceiling console. The microphone HFT BACK BUTTON
is shared with the navigation system.
To operate the HFT, use the HFT
Audio System Talk and Back buttons on the left
When the HFT system is in use, the side of the steering wheel. Below the
sound comes through the car’s front HFT buttons is another set of voice
audio system speakers. If the audio control buttons for the navigation,
system is in use while making a call, climate control, and audio systems.
the HFT system over-rides the audio
system. To change the volume level,
use the audio system volume knob.

05/10/03 20:08:51 32SEA630_336
Information Display How to Use the HFT System Using Voice Control
(For some models) The HFT system is operated by the Here are some guidelines for using
When you are operating the HFT HFT Talk and Back buttons on the voice control:
you are dialing and receiving calls, left side of the steering wheel. The To enter a command, press the
you will see ‘‘TEL’’ on the navigation next few pages provide instructions Talk button. Then, after the beep,
system display. for all basic features of the HFT say your command in a clear,
system. natural tone.
‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed if
your phone is linked to the Bluetooth NOTE: All phones may not operate For best system operation, set the
compatible cell phone. identically, and some may cause climate control fan speed to low,
inconsistent operation of the HFT and direct the centre vents away
system. from the microphone in the ceiling.
If the HFT system does not

recognize a command, its
response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’ If it doesn’t
recognize the command a second
time, its response is, ‘‘Please
repeat.’’ If it doesn’t recognize the
command a third time, it plays the
Help prompt.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:09:01 32SEA630_337
To hear a list of available options the HFT system will time out and Setting Up the System
at any time, press the Talk button, stop its voice recognition. The The incoming notification of the
wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands next time you press the Talk HFT system can be set to a ring tone,
free link help.’’ button, the HFT system begins a prompt, or no notification.
listening from the point at which it
Many commands can be spoken timed out. To set up the system, do this:
together. For example, you can 1. Press and release the Talk button.
say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7890.’’ To end a command sequence at After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
any time, press and hold the Back HFT system response is, ‘‘System
To enter a string of numbers in a button, or press the Talk button, options are setup and clear.’’
Call or Dial command, you can say wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’
them all at once, or you can The next time you press the Talk 2. Press and release the Talk button.
separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7, button, the HFT system begins After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The
10, and 11. from its main menu. HFT system response is ‘‘Would
you like an audible notification of
To skip a voice prompt, press the When you finish a command an incoming call?’’
Talk button while the HFT system sequence, the HFT system goes
is speaking. The HFT system will back to its main menu. For
then begin listening for your next example, when you store the name,
command. ‘‘Eric,’’ the HFT system response
is, ‘‘Eric has been stored.’’ The
To go back one step in a command next time you press the Talk
process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press button, you will be at the main
the Back button. menu.
If nothing is said while the HFT
system is listening for a command,

05/10/03 20:09:11 32SEA630_338
3. Press and release the Talk button. Setting Your Password 4. Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the The HFT system will accept a After the beep, say the four-digit
HFT system response is, ‘‘Would numeric, four-digit password that password you want to use. For
you like a ring tone or a prompt?’’ you can use for security purposes. example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFT
If you say ‘‘No’’ after the beep, the system response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is
HFT system returns to its main To set your password, do this: this correct?’’
menu. Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in no 1. With the ignition switch in the ON
ring tone or prompt playback (II) position, press and release the 5. Press and release the Talk button.
during an incoming call. The audio Talk button on the steering wheel. After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
system will be mute, and a After the beep say ‘‘Security.’’ The HFT system response is ‘‘The new
message will be displayed. HFT system response is ‘‘Security password has been stored.
options are lock, unlock, and set Returning to the main menu.’’
4. Press and release the Talk button. password.’’
After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or Locking or Unlocking the HFT
‘‘Prompt.’’ If you choose ‘‘Ring 2. Press and release the Talk button. System
tone’’ you will hear a ring tone After the beep, say ‘‘Set password.’’ Once a password is set, you can lock
through the audio speakers to the HFT system so it only operates
announce an incoming call. If you 3. The HFT system response is after the password is entered, or you
choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you will hear ‘‘What is the new four-digit can unlock it so anyone using your
this message to announce an password?’’ (If you are changing car can also use the HFT system.
incoming call: ‘‘You have an the password, you will first be
incoming call.’’ asked for the current password.)
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:09:20 32SEA630_339
To lock or unlock the HFT system, do If you forget your password and you NOTE:
this: cannot activate the HFT system, HFT system does not allow you to
1. Press and release the Talk button. consult your dealer to cancel the pair your phone if the car is
After the beep, say ‘‘Security.’’ The password. moving.
HFT system response is ‘‘Security For pairing, your phone must be in
options are lock, unlock, and set Pairing Your Phone its Discovery mode.
password.’’ Your Bluetooth compatible phone Up to six phones can be paired to
with HandsFree Profile must be the HFT system.
2. Press and release the Talk button. paired to the HFT system before you The following procedure works for
After the beep, say ‘‘Lock’’ or can make and receive hands-free most phones. If you cannot pair
‘‘unlock.’’ Lock means the HFT calls. your phone to the HFT system
system will prompt you for your with this procedure, refer to your
password each time the ignition phone’s operating manual, talk to
switch is turned to the ON (II) your phone retailer, or contact the
position and you press the Talk Hands-Free Telephone System
button. You will only be asked for customer support.
the password once per ignition During the pairing process, turn
cycle. If the HFT system is locked, off any previously paired phones
its response is ‘‘System is locked. before pairing a new phone.
Each time the car is turned on, the
password will be required to use
the system.’’ If the HFT system is
unlocked, its response is ‘‘System
is unlocked. Returning to the main
menu.’’

05/10/14 15:37:31 32SEA630_340
1. With your phone on and the correct?’’ 6. When asked by the phone, enter
ignition switch in the the four-digit code from step 3 into
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) 4. Press and release the Talk button. your phone. The HFT response is
position, press and release the After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The ‘‘A new phone has been found.
Talk button. After the beep, say HFT system response is What would you like to name this
‘‘Phone set up.’’ The HFT system ‘‘Searching for a Bluetooth phone.’’ phone?’’
response is ‘‘Phone set up options
are status, pair, edit, delete, and NOTE: Steps 5 and 6 show a 7. Press and release the Talk button.
list.’’ common way to get your phone into After the beep, say the name you
its Discovery mode. If these steps do want to use. For example, say
2. Press and release the Talk button. not work on your phone, refer to the ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFT system
After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The phone’s operating manual. response is ‘‘Eric’s phone has been
HFT system response is ‘‘The successfully paired. Returning to
pairing process requires operation 5. Follow the prompts on your phone the main menu.’’
of your mobile phone. For safety, to get it into its Search mode. The
only perform this function while phone will search for the HFT 8. If you want to pair another phone,
the car is stopped. State a four- system. When it comes up, select repeat steps 1 through 7.
digit code for pairing. Note this Hands-Free Telephone System
code. It will be requested by the from the list of options displayed
phone.’’ on your phone.
3. Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say the four-digit
code you want to use. For example,
say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFT system
response is, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:09:40 32SEA630_341
To rename a paired phone, do this: menu.’’ 4. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ To delete a paired phone, do this: HFT system response is
The HFT system response is 1. Press and release the Talk button. ‘‘Preparing to delete Eric’s phone.’’
‘‘Phone setup options are status, After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ to continue. Otherwise,
pair, edit, delete, and list.’’ The HFT system response is, say ‘‘Go back,’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’
‘‘Phone setup options are status,
2. Press and release the Talk button. pair, edit, delete, and list.’’ 5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the
HFT system response is ‘‘Which 2. Press and release the Talk button. HFT system response is ‘‘The
phone would you like to edit?’’ After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The phone has been deleted. Returning
HFT system response is, ‘‘Which to the main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go
3. Press and release the Talk button. phone would you like to delete?’’ back,’’ or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will
After the beep, say the name of not be deleted.
the phone you want to rename. 3. Press and release the Talk button.
For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ After the beep, say the name of
The HFT system response is the phone you want to delete. For
‘‘What is the new name for Eric’s example say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The
phone?’’ HFT system response is ‘‘Would
you like to delete Eric’s phone?’’
After the beep, say the new name
of the phone. For example, say
‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFT system
response is, ‘‘The name has been
changed. Returning to the main

05/10/03 20:09:48 32SEA630_342
To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone being To change from the currently linked
1. Press and release the Talk button. used, do this: phone to another paired phone, do this:
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ 1. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button.
The HFT system response is After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’
‘‘Phone setup options are status, The HFT system response is The HFT system response is
pair, edit, delete, and list.’’ ‘‘Phone setup options are status, ‘‘Searching for the next phone.’’
pair, edit, delete, and list.’’ The HFT system then disconnects
2. Press and release the Talk button. the linked phone and searches for
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The 2. Press and release the Talk button. another paired phone. If no other
HFT system responds by listing After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An phones are found, the first phone
the name of each paired phone. example of the HFT system remains linked.
When all phones paired to the response is, ‘‘Eric’s phone is linked.
system have been read, the HFT Battery strength is three bars.
system response is ‘‘The entire list Signal strength is five bars, and
has been read. Returning to the the phone is roaming. Returning to
main menu.’’ the main menu.’’

05/10/03 20:09:57 32SEA630_343
Making a Call 2. Press and release the Talk button. To make a call using a name in the HFT
You can make calls using any phone After the beep, say the number system phonebook, do this:
number, or by using a name in the you want to call. For example, say 1. With your phone on and the
HFT system phonebook. You can ‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFT system ignition switch in the
also redial the last number called. response is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
During a call, the HFT system allows dial, or continue to add numbers.’’ position, press and release the
you to talk up to 30 minutes after you Talk button. After the beep, say
remove the key from the ignition 3. Press and release the Talk button. ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFT system
switch. After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ response is, ‘‘What name or
The HFT system response is number would you like to call/
To make a call using a phone number, ‘‘Calling’’ or ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once dial?’’
do this: connected, you will hear the
1. With your phone on and the person you called through the 2. Press and release the Talk button.
ignition switch in the audio speakers. To change the After the beep, say the name you
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) volume, use the audio system want to call. For example, say
position, press and release the volume knob. ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFT system response
Talk button. After the beep, say is ‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFT system 4. To end the call, press the Back
response is, ‘‘What name or button. 3. Press and release the Talk button.
number would you like to call/ After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
dial?’’ HFT system response is ‘‘Calling’’
or ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob.

05/10/03 20:10:07 32SEA630_344
4. To end the call, press the Back Sending Numbers or Names 3. Press and release the Talk button.
button. During a Call After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
The HFT system allows you to send dial tones will be sent, and the call
To redial the last number called by numbers or names during a call. This will continue.
the phone, press and release the is useful when you call a menu-
Talk button. After the beep, say driven phone system. You can also To send a name during a call, do this:
‘‘Redial.’’ The HFT system response program account numbers into the 1. Press and release the Talk button.
is, ‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, you HFT system phonebook for easy After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
will hear the person you called retrieval during menu-driven calls. HFT system response is, ‘‘What
through the audio speakers. To name or number would you like to
change the volume, use the audio To send a number during a call, do this: send?’’
system volume knob. 1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The 2. Press and release the Talk button.
HFT system response is, ‘‘What After the beep, say the name you
name or number would you like to want to send. For example, say
send?’’ ‘‘Account number.’’ The HFT
system response is ‘‘Would you
2. Press and release the Talk button. like to send account number?’’
After the beep, say the number
you want to send. For example, 3. Press and release the Talk button.
say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFT system After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
response is ‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or dial tones will be sent, and the call
continue to add numbers.’’ will continue.

05/10/03 20:10:15 32SEA630_345
Receiving a Call Transferring a Call

If you receive a call when you are not During a call, you can transfer it
on the phone, the HFT system from the HFT system to your phone,
interrupts the audio system (if it is or from your phone to the HFT
on), and plays the incoming call system.
notification, if activated. To answer
the call, press the Talk button and To transfer a call from the HFT system
begin speaking. If you don’t want to to your phone, do this:
answer the call, press the Back 1. Press and release the Talk button.
button. After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’
The audio switches from the HFT
If your phone has Call Waiting, and system to the phone.
you receive a call when you are on
the phone, press and release the To transfer a call from your phone to the
Talk button to answer it. When you HFT system, do this:
do this, the original call is placed on 2. Press and release the Talk button.
hold. To return to the original call, After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’
press the Talk button again. If you The audio switches from your
don’t want to answer the new call, phone to the HFT system.
disregard it, and continue with your
original call. If you want to hang up
the original call and answer the new
call, press the Back button.

05/10/03 20:10:26 32SEA630_346
Muting a Call Setting up the Phonebook To add a name, do this:

During a call, you can mute or The HFT system phonebook can 1. Press and release the Talk button.
unmute your voice to the person you store up to 50 names with their After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
are talking to. associated numbers. These can be The HFT system response is
any types of numbers. For example, ‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit,
To mute your voice, do this: you can store a phone number and delete, and list.’’
1. Press and release the Talk button. use it to make a call, or you can store
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The a name tag and use it to call. 2. Press and release the Talk button.
HFT system response is, ‘‘Mute is After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The
active.’’ HFT system response is, ‘‘What
name would you like to store?’’
To unmute your voice, do this:
2. Press and release the Talk button. 3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The After the beep, say the name you
HFT system response is, ‘‘Mute is would like to store. For example,
cancelled.’’ say ‘‘Eric’’. The HFT system
response is ‘‘What is the number
for Eric?’’

After the beep, say the number.
For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
The HFT system response is ‘‘123
456 7891.’’
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:10:38 32SEA630_347
5. Press and release the Talk button. 4. Press and release the Talk button. 3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The After the beep, say the new After the beep, say the name you
HFT system response is ‘‘Eric has number for Eric. For example, say would like to delete. For example,
been stored. Returning to the main ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFT system say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFT system
menu.’’ response is, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ response is ‘‘Do you want to delete
Eric?’’
To edit the number of a name, do this: 5. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The 4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ HFT system response is ‘‘The After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
The HFT system response is number has been changed. HFT system response is, ‘‘The
‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit, Returning to the main menu.’’ name has been deleted. Returning
delete, and list.’’ to the main menu.’’
To delete a name, do this:
2. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. To list all names in the phonebook, do
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ this:
HFT system response is, ‘‘What The HFT system response is, 1. Press and release the Talk button.
name would you like to edit?’’ ‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit, After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
delete, and list.’’ The HFT system response is,
3. Press and release the Talk button. ‘‘The Phonebook options are store,
After the beep, say the name you 2. Press and release the Talk button. edit, delete, and list.’’
would like to edit. For example, After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFT system HFT system response is, ‘‘What
response is ‘‘What is the new name would you like to delete?’’
number for Eric?’’

05/10/03 20:10:48 32SEA630_348
2. Press and release the Talk button. ‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’ After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The HFT system response is, ‘‘This
HFT system responds by listing 3. Press and release the Talk button. process will clear all paired phones,
the names in the phonebook. After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The clear all entries in the phonebook,
When the end of the list is HFT system response is ‘‘Calling.’’ and clear the password and
reached, the HFT system Once connected, you will hear the restore the defaults in the system
response is, ‘‘The entire list has person you called through the set up. Is this what you would like
been read. Returning to the main audio speakers. To change the to do?’’
menu.’’ volume, use the audio system
volume knob. 3. Press and release the Talk button.
To call a name from the phonebook list, After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
do this: Clearing the System HFT system response is
1. Press and release the Talk button. This operation clears the HFT ‘‘Preparing to clear all paired
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ system of your passcode, your paired phones, all phonebook entries, and
The HFT system response is phones, and all names in the HFT the password, and restore the
‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit, system phonebook. Clearing is defaults in the system set up. This
delete, and list.’’ recommended before you sell your may take up to 2 minutes to
vehicle. complete.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed,
2. Press and release the Talk button. otherwise say ‘‘Go back’’ or
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The To clear the system, do this: ‘‘Cancel.’’
HFT system responds by listing 1. Press and release the Talk button.
the names in the phonebook. After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The 4. If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a short
When it says the name you want to HFT system response is, ‘‘System period of time, the HFT system
call, for example, Eric, press the options are setup and clear.’’ response is, ‘‘System has been
Talk button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ cleared. Returning to the main
The HFT system response is, 2. Press and release the Talk button. menu.’’

05/10/03 20:10:56 32SEA630_349
Changing Language 3. Press and release the Talk button. 4. The HFT system response in the
To select any of the five languages; After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ in the selected language is, for example,
English, French, Italian, German, and selected language (in French in ‘‘What is the French name for ＜
Spanish, do this: this example). If there are no Paul’s phone＞?’’ Press and
paired phones without French release the Talk button. After the
For example, change from English to name tags, the HFT system beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone’’ in the
French. response in the selected language selected language. The HFT
is ‘‘The language has been system response is, ‘‘What is the
1. Press and release the Talk button. changed,’’ then ‘‘Returning to the French name for ＜Pat’s phone
After the beep, say ‘‘Change main menu.’’ After this response, ＞?’’ Press and release the Talk
language.’’ The HFT system the system recognizes your button. Say ‘‘Pat’s phone.’’ After all
response is English, French, commands in the selected paired phones missing a French
Italian, German, or Spanish？ language only. name tag are re-recorded, the
HFT system will prompt in the
2. Press and release the Talk button. If there are paired phones without selected language, ‘‘Returning to
After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ The French name tags, the HFT the main menu.’’
HFT system response is ‘‘You system response in the selected
have selected French. Name tags language is ‘‘For the system to
that were stored while in another identify phones that were paired
language will not be accessible in while in another language, the
French mode. Would you like to phone names need to be re-
continue？’’, then the system recorded.’’
repeats the response in the new
selected language. NOTE: If there are paired phones
without French name tags the
following prompts will continue.

05/10/03 20:11:04 32SEA630_350
To change from English to French, do paired phones without English English name for ＜Pat’s phone
this: name tags, the HFT system ＞?’’ Press and release the Talk
response is ‘‘The language has button. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’s
1. Press and release the Talk button. been changed. Returning to the phone.’’ After all paired phones
After the beep, say ‘‘Change main menu.’’ in the selected missing an English name tag are
language’’ in the currently selected language. re-recorded, the HFT system will
language. The HFT system say ‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
response in the currently selected If there are paired phones without
language is, ‘‘English, French, English name tags, the HFT system
German, Italian, or Spanish？’’ response is ‘‘The language has been
changed. For the system to identify
2. Press and release the Talk button. phones that were paired while in
After the beep, say ‘‘English’’ in another language, the phone names
the currently selected language. need to be re-recorded.’’
The HFT system response is,
‘‘You have selected English. Name NOTE: If there are paired phones
tags that were stored while in without English name tags the
French mode will not be following prompts will continue.
accessible in English mode. Would
you like to continue？’’, then the 4. The HFT system says, for
system repeats the response in the example, ‘‘What is the English
new selected language. name for ＜Paul’s phone＞?’’ Press
and release the Talk button. After
3. Press and release the Talk button. the beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone’’ in the
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ in the selected language. The HFT
selected language. If there are no system response is ‘‘What is the CONTINUED

05/10/14 15:37:41 32SEA630_351
Quick Language Selection HFT System Limitations For information of DoC

To select a language quickly, do the When using voice control, the HFT (Declaration of Conformance)
following. system call is placed on hold, or the
For example, change from English to HFT system stops its voice EU models
French. recognition. The HFT system call Hereby, Johnson Controls Automotive,
1. Press and release the Talk button. will continue when voice control declares that this Hands-Free
After the beep, say ‘‘French’’ in command is ended. To operate the Telephone System is in compliance
the selecting language. HFT system again, press the Talk with the essential requirements and
button. Then after the beep, say the other relevant provisions of Directive
2. The HFT system response in the appropriate, command. 1995/5/EC.
currently selected language is
‘‘You have selected French. Name In addition, you cannot use the HFT www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/EU
tags that were stored while in system while receiving a PTY alarm. DoC.pdf
another language will not be
accessible in French mode. Would Except EU models
you like to continue？’’ The For additional conformance
system also repeats the response information: www.jciblueconnect.
in the new selected language. com/faq
If you want to continue, follow

steps 3 and 4 on page346 .

05/10/03 20:11:18 32SEA630_352
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your car, General Precautions ...................... 350
you should know what fuel to use, Break-in Period .............................. 351
and how to check the levels of Fuel .................................................. 351
important fluids. You also need to Service Station Procedures .......... 352
know how to properly store luggage Filling the Fuel Tank ................. 352
or packages. The information in this Opening the Bonnet .................. 354
section will help you. If you plan to Oil Check ................................ 355
add any accessories to your car, Engine Coolant Check .......... 358
please read the information in this Fuel Cutoff System........................ 359
section first. Fuel Economy ................................ 360
Vehicle Condition ...................... 360
Driving Habits ............................ 360
Accessories and Modifications .... 361
Accessories................................. 361
Modifications ............................. 362
Additional Safety Precautions .. 363
Carrying Luggage .......................... 364
Load Limit .................................. 365
Carrying Items in the
Passenger Compartment ...... 365
Carrying Luggage in the
Boot or on a Roof Rack ......... 366
Boot Hooks ................................. 366
Before Driving 349

05/10/03 20:11:23 32SEA630_353
General Precautions
Type-S model
Your car is designed to give you
optimum handling and performance
on well-maintained roads. As part of
this design, your car has a minimum
of ground clearance.
Use caution if you should drive

your car on very rough or rutted
roads. You could damage the
suspension and underbody by
bottoming out. Going too fast over
parking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ can
also cause damage. Curbs and steep inclines could
damage the front and rear
bumpers. Low curbs that do not
affect the average vehicle may be
high enough to hit the bumper on
your car. The front or rear bumper
may scrape when trying to drive
onto an incline, such as a steep
driveway or trailer ramps.
350 Before Driving

05/10/03 20:11:32 32SEA630_354
Break-in Period, Fuel
Break-in Period You should follow these same re- Fuel

Help assure your car’s future commendations with an overhauled Petrol models
reliability and performance by paying or exchanged engine, or when the Your car is designed to operate on
extra attention to how you drive brakes are replaced. Premium/Super unleaded petrol
during the first 1,000 km (625 miles). with a Research Octane Number
During this period: (RON) of 95 or higher.
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid On Australian model, use premium

acceleration. unleaded petrol with a Research
Octane Number (RON) of 95 or
Avoid hard braking. New brakes higher.
need to be broken-in by moderate
use for the first 300 km (200 Use of a lower octane petrol can
miles). cause a persistent, heavy metallic
rapping noise in the engine that can
Do not change the oil until the lead to mechanical damage.
recommended time or distance
interval shown in the maintenance Using petrol containing lead will
schedule. damage your car’s emissions con-
trols and engine. This contributes to
air pollution.
CONTINUED
Before Driving 351

05/10/03 20:11:41 32SEA630_355
Fuel, Service Station Procedures
Diesel models Select the proper fuel according to Filling the Fuel Tank
Your car is designed to use only the regional or climate condition.
Diesel Fuel (also known as Use of inadequate fuel may reduce
Automotive gas oil and Derv). engine power. In this case, the glow Push
plugs indicator blinks.
Your car is not designed to use RME
(Rapeseed Methyl Ester). For more
information, ask your dealer.
Serious damage may occur if petrol
The quality of diesel fuel (Derv) can is used in diesel engines.
vary in different countries, and only
clean and good quality fuel should be
used.
You need to use the proper fuel for 1. Because the fuel fill cap is on the
EN590 and also vary the fuel left side of the car, park with that
depending on the season. side closest to the service station
pumps.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pushing

on the handle at the outside of the
driver’s seat.
352 Before Driving

05/10/03 20:11:49 32SEA630_356
Service Station Procedures
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
You may hear a hissing sound as nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
Fuel is highly flammable and pressure inside the tank escapes. not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave
explosive. You can be burned some room for the fuel to expand
or seriously injured when FUEL FILL CAP with temperature changes.
handling fuel.
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on,
Stop the engine and keep tighten it until it clicks more than
heat, sparks, and flame twice.
away.
Handle fuel only outdoors. 6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
Wipe up spills immediately. it latches.
TETHER ATTACHMENT
The fuel fill cap is attached to the

fuel filler with a tether to avoid
losing the cap. Put the attachment
on the fuel fill cap into the slit on
the fuel fill door.
Before Driving 353

05/10/03 20:11:55 32SEA630_357
Opening the Bonnet If you can open the bonnet without

lifting the bonnet latch handle, or the
BONNET RELEASE HANDLE bonnet latch handle moves stiffly or
does not spring back as before, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page 451 ).
LATCH
1. Shift to Park or Neutral and set 2. Standing in front of the car, put
the parking brake. Pull the bonnet your fingers between the front
release handle located under the edge of the bonnet and the front
lower corner of the dashboard. grille. The bonnet latch handle is
The bonnet will pop up slightly. above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this
handle up until it reaches the
bonnet. Lift the bonnet.
354 Before Driving

05/10/03 20:12:06 32SEA630_358
Oil Check
All engines consume oil as part of
GRIP SUPPORT ROD GRIP SUPPORT ROD their normal operation, therefore,
the engine oil level must be checked
regularly, for example when
refuelling. Always check the oil
before a long journey.
The amount of oil consumed

depends on how the vehicle is driven
and the climatic and road conditions
encountered. The rate of oil
Petrol models CLIP Diesel models CLIP consumption can be up to 1 litre per
1,000 km/625 miles. Consumption is
3. Pull the support rod out of its clip likely to be higher when the engine
by holding the grip and insert the is new.
end into the hole on the front right On Diesel models
side of the bonnet. Do not press the engine cover Make sure the engine is warmed up
forcibly. and parked on level ground. Turn off
To close the bonnet, lift it up slightly This may damage the engine cover the engine and wait approximately 3
to remove the support rod from the and component parts. minutes before checking the oil level.
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the bonnet to After closing the bonnet, make sure
about 30 cm (a foot) above the it is securely latched.
fender, then let it drop.
CONTINUED
Before Driving 355

05/10/03 20:12:12 32SEA630_359
DIPSTICK DIPSTICK
Petrol models Diesel models
1. Remove the dipstick (orange 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean

handle). cloth or paper towel.
356 Before Driving

05/10/03 20:12:19 32SEA630_360
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Petrol models Diesel models Petrol models
3. Insert it all the way back in its tube. 4. Remove the dipstick again and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,

see Adding Oil on page 418 on
petrol models and 423 on diesel
models.
CONTINUED
Before Driving 357

05/10/03 20:12:28 32SEA630_361
Engine Coolant Check On Diesel models

The coolant level in the expansion
RESERVE TANK MAX tank should be checked only when
the engine and the cooling system
are cold. Make sure it is between the
UPPER MAX and MIN lines. If it is below
MARK
the MIN line, see Adding Engine
Coolant on page 433 .
LOWER
MARK EXPANSION
TANK
Diesel models
Petrol models MIN
Remove the dipstick carefully, so
you do not spill the oil. Spilled oil On Petrol models
could damage components in the Look at the coolant level in the
engine compartment. radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is MAX
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
MIN
Engine Coolant on page 427 for Diesel models
information on adding the proper
coolant. Refer to Owner Maintenance
Checks on page 414 for information
on checking other items in your car.
358 Before Driving

05/10/03 20:12:35 32SEA630_362
Fuel Cutoff System (For some types)
FUEL CUTOFF SWITCH After the switch has activated, it

must be reset by pressing the button
before the engine can be restarted.
Leaking fuel can ignite or

explode, causing you to be
seriously or fatally injured.
Always check for fuel leaks

Petrol models FUEL CUTOFF SWITCH Diesel models before resetting the switch.
There is a fuel cutoff switch under In a collision or sudden impact, this

the steering wheel. switch automatically cuts off the fuel
supply to the engine.
To locate the switch, extend your
arm under the steering column on
the upper centre console side.
Before Driving 359

05/10/03 20:12:43 32SEA630_363
Fuel Economy
The condition of your car and your Driving Habits A cold engine uses more fuel than a
driving habits are the two most You can improve fuel economy by warm engine. It is not necessary to
important things that affect the fuel driving moderately. Rapid acceler- ‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it
consumption. ation, abrupt cornering, and hard idle for a long time. You can drive
braking use more fuel. away in about a minute, no matter
Vehicle Condition how cold it is outside. The engine
Always maintain your car according Always drive in the highest gear that will warm up faster, and you get
to the maintenance schedule. This allows the engine to run and acceler- better fuel economy. To cut down on
will keep it in top operating condition. ate smoothly. the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to
combine several short trips into one.
An important part of that mainte- Depending on traffic conditions, try
nance is the Owner Maintenance to maintain a constant speed. Every The air conditioning puts an extra
Checks (see page 414 ). For time you slow down and speed up, load on the engine which makes it
example, an underinflated tyre your car uses extra fuel. Use the use more fuel. Turn off the A/C to
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ cruise control (on some types), when cut down on air conditioning use.
which uses fuel. It also wears out appropriate, to increase fuel Use the flow-through ventilation
faster, so check the tyre pressure at economy. when the outside air temperature is
least monthly. moderate.
In winter, the build-up of snow on

your car’s underside adds weight and
rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning
helps your fuel consumption and re-
duces the chance of corrosion.
360 Before Driving

05/10/03 20:12:49 32SEA630_364
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your car, or installing Accessories

some non-Honda accessories, can Your dealer has genuine Honda
make your car unsafe. Before you accessories that allow you to Improper accessories or
make any modifications or add any personalize your car. These modifications can affect your
accessories, be sure to read the accessories have been designed and car’s handling, stability, and
following information. approved for your car. performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be
Non-Honda accessories are usually hurt or killed.
designed for universal applications.
Although aftermarket accessories Follow all instructions in this
may fit on your car, they may not owner’s manual regarding
meet factory specifications, and accessories and
could adversely affect your car’s modifications.
handling and stability (see
‘‘Modifications’’ on page 362 for
additional information).
CONTINUED
Before Driving 361

05/10/03 20:12:58 32SEA630_365
When properly installed, cellular Before installing any accessory: Modifications

phones, alarms, two-way radios, and Do not remove any original
low-powered audio systems should Make sure the accessory does not equipment or modify your car in any
not interfere with your car’s obscure any lights, or interfere way that would alter its design or
computer-controlled systems, such with proper car operation or operation. This could make your car
as the SRS and anti-lock brake performance. unsafe and illegal to drive.
system.
Be sure electronic accessories do For example, do not make any
However, if electronic accessories not overload electrical circuits modifications that would change the
are improperly installed, or exceed (see page 529 ). ride height of your car, or install
your car’s electrical system capacity, wheels and tyres with a different
they can interfere with the operation Have the installer contact your overall diameter.
of your car, or even cause the dealer for assistance before
airbags to deploy. installing any electronic accessory. Such modifications can adversely
affect handling, and interfere with
If possible, have your dealer inspect the operation of the car’s anti-lock
the final installation. brakes and other systems.
362 Before Driving

05/10/03 20:13:04 32SEA630_366
In addition, any modifications that Additional Safety Precautions On models equipped with side airbag or
decrease ground clearance increase Do not attach or place objects on side curtain airbag
the chance of undercarriage parts the front airbag covers. Any object On models with side airbags or
striking a curb, speed bump, or other attached to or placed on the covers side curtain airbags, do not attach
raised object, which could cause marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the hard objects on or near a front
your airbags to deploy. centre of the steering wheel and door. If a side airbag or a side
on top of the dashboard, could curtain airbag inflates, a cup
Do not modify your steering wheel interfere with the proper operation holder or other hard object
or any other part of your of the airbags. Or, if the airbags attached on or near the door could
Supplemental Restraint System. inflate, the objects could be be propelled inside the car and
Modifications could make the propelled inside the car and hurt hurt someone.
system ineffective. someone.
Do not place any objects over the
outside edge of a front seat-back.
Covering the outside edge of a
front seat-back, with a non-Honda
seat cover for example, could
prevent the airbag from inflating
properly.
Before Driving 363

05/10/03 20:13:10 32SEA630_367
Carrying Luggage
Your car has several convenient

storage areas so you can stow
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET luggage safely.
DRIVER’S SEAT-BACK POCKET＊ CENTRE POCKET The glove box, and the pockets in
the front doors and seat-backs, are
designed for small, lightweight items.
The boot is intended for larger,
heavier items. In addition, the back
seat can be folded down to allow you
to carry more luggage or longer
items.
However, carrying too much luggage,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your car’s handling, stability and
operation, and make it unsafe.
Before carrying any type of luggage,
be sure to read the following pages.
BOOT FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT-BACK POCKET GLOVE BOX

＊: For some types
364 Before Driving

05/10/03 20:13:18 32SEA630_368
Carrying Luggage
Load Limit Carrying Items in the Passenger

When you load luggage, the total Compartment
weight of the vehicle, all passengers, Overloading or improper Store or secure all items that could
luggage and hitch must not exceed loading can affect handling be thrown around and hurt
the maximum permissible weight. and stability and cause a someone during a crash.
The load for the front and rear axles crash in which you can be
also must not exceed the maximum hurt or killed. Do not put any items on top of the
permissible axle weight. rear shelf. They can block your
Refer to page 547 for the maximum Follow all load limits and view and be thrown around the car
permissible weight and maximum other loading guidelines in during a crash.
permissible axle weight. this manual.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, or with the proper
operation of the seats.
Do not stack items higher than the
back of the front seats.
Keep the glove box closed while

driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Before Driving 365

05/10/03 20:13:27 32SEA630_369
Carrying Luggage
Carrying Luggage in the Boot or If you carry large items that Boot Hooks
on a Roof Rack prevent you from closing the boot
Distribute luggage evenly on the lid, exhaust gas can enter the HOOK
floor of the boot, placing the passenger area. To avoid the
heaviest items on the bottom and possibility of carbon monoxide
as far forward as possible. poisoning, follow the instructions
Try to secure the items with rope on page 74 .
or cord so they will not shift while
you are driving. If you can carry any items on a
roof rack, be sure the total weight
If you fold down the back seat, tie of the rack and the items does not
down items that could be thrown exceed the maximum allowable
about the car during a crash or weight. Contact your dealer for HOOK
sudden stop. further information.
There are four hooks on the floor of
Try to secure the items with rope Concerning lashing means and the boot. They can be used to install
or cord so they will not shift while retaining devices offered on the a net for securing items.
you are driving. Do not stack accessory market, contact your
items higher than the back of the dealer.
front seats.
Refer to page 150 for folding rear

seat-back.
366 Before Driving

05/10/03 20:13:31 32SEA630_370
Driving
This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 368 The Braking System...................... 387
starting the engine under various Starting the Engine Brake Wear Indicators .............. 387
conditions, and how to operate the (Petrol models) ...................... 369 Brake System Design................ 388
5-speed and 6-speed manual Starting in Cold Weather Anti-lock Brakes ........................ 388
transmissions and automatic at High Altitude ..................... 370 Important Safety
transmission. It also includes Starting the Engine Reminders .......................... 389
important information on parking (Diesel models) ..................... 371 ABS Indicator ......................... 390
your car, the braking system, the Cold Climates ............................. 371 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
Vehicle Stability Assist System and Warming Up ............................... 371 System......................................... 391
facts you need if you are planning to Switching Off ............................. 371 Driving in Bad Weather ................ 394
tow a trailer. 5-speed Manual Transmission ..... 372 Towing a Trailer ............................ 396
Recommended Shift Points ...... 373
Maximum Allowable Speeds .... 373
6-speed Manual Transmission ..... 374
Recommended Shift Points ...... 375
Reverse Lockout ........................ 377
Automatic Transmission............... 378
Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 378
Shift Lever Positions ................. 379
Sequential SportShift Mode ..... 381
Shift Lock Release ..................... 385
Parking ............................................ 386
Parking Tips ............................... 386
Driving 367

05/10/03 20:13:44 32SEA630_371
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 5. Check the adjustment of the seat 10.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
and adjustments every day before (see page 145 ). Check the indicator lights in the
you drive your car. instrument panel.
6. Check the adjustment of the
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see 11.On petrol models
and outside lights are clean and pages 161 and 162 ). Start the engine (see page 369 ).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice. 7. Check the adjustment of the On diesel models
steering wheel (see page 129 ). Start the engine (see page 371 ).
2. Check that the bonnet and boot
are fully closed. 8. Make sure the doors are securely 12.When you start the engine, check
closed. the gauges and indicators in the
3. Visually check the tyres. If a tyre instrument panel, and the
looks low, use a gauge to check its 9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that messages on the multi-information
pressure. your passengers have fastened display (see pages 80 , 91 and 98 ).
their seat belts (see page 19 ).
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying with you inside are stored
properly or fastened down
securely.
368 Driving

05/10/03 20:13:52 32SEA630_372
Starting the Engine (Petrol models)
1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Without touching the accelerator 5. If the engine does not start within
pedal, turn the ignition key to the 15 seconds, or starts but stalls
2. In cold weather, turn off all START (III) position. If the engine right away, repeat step 4 with the
electrical accessories to reduce does not start right away, do not accelerator pedal pressed half-way
the drain on the battery. hold the key in START (III) for down. If the engine starts, release
more than 15 seconds at a time. pressure on the accelerator pedal
3. Manual transmission: Pause for at least 10 seconds so the engine does not race.
Push the clutch pedal down all the before trying again.
way and shift the transmission to 6. If the engine still does not start,
neutral. press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
Automatic transmission: The immobilizer System protects starting in order to clear flooding.
Make sure the shift lever is in your car from theft. If an improperly- As before, keep the ignition key in
Park. Press on the brake pedal. coded key (or other device) is used, the START (III) position for no
the engine’s fuel system is disabled. more than 15 seconds. Return to
See Immobilizer System on page step 5 if the engine does not start.
131 . If it starts, lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal so the engine
does not race.
Driving 369

05/10/03 20:13:59 32SEA630_373
Starting the Engine (Petrol models)
Starting in Cold Weather at High 3. If the engine fails to start in step 2,

Altitude (Above 2,400 metres/ push the accelerator pedal to the
8,000 feet) floor and hold it there while you
An engine is harder to start in cold try to start the engine for no more
weather. The thinner air found at than 15 seconds. If the engine
high altitude above 2,400 meters does not start, return to step 2.
(8,000 feet) adds to the problem.
Use the following procedure: If the outside temperature is below
freezing, or if your car has not been
1. Turn off all electrical accessories driven for several days, warm up the
to reduce the drain on the battery. engine for a few minutes before
driving (prohibited in Germany! §30
2. Push the accelerator pedal half- StVO).
way to the floor and hold it there
while starting the engine. Do not
hold the ignition key in the
START (III) position for more
than 15 seconds. When the engine
starts, release the accelerator
pedal gradually as the engine
speeds up and smooths out.
370 Driving

05/10/03 20:14:10 32SEA630_374
Starting the Engine (Diesel models)
1. Apply the parking brake. 5. Without touching the accelerator Warming Up

pedal, turn the ignition key to the In the interests of fuel economy, it is
2. Turn off all electrical accessories START (III) position. If the engine advisable to start driving straight
to reduce the drain on the battery. does not start right away, do not away, remembering that harsh
hold the key in START (III) for acceleration or labouring the engine
3. Push the clutch pedal down all the more than 15 seconds at a time (20 before the normal operating
way and shift the transmission to seconds in cold weather). Pause temperature has been reached can
neutral. for at least 20 seconds before damage the engine.
trying again.
4. Turn the ignition key to the ON
(II) position. Wait until the glow Cold Climates
plugs indicator turns off. In very cold climates the battery The engine must not be run above
charging and oil pressure indicators fast idle speed until the oil pressure
may take several seconds to warning indicator goes off. This will
extinguish. Similarly, engine ensure that the engine and
The immobilizer System protects cranking times will also increase. turbocharger bearings are properly
your car from theft. If an improperly- lubricated before being run at
coded key (or other device) is used, If you start the engine in cold normal driving speeds.
the engine’s fuel system is disabled. weather or at high altitude, the glow
See Immobilizer System on page plugs indicator may also remain on Switching Off
131 . longer than normal operation. To avoid the possibility of damaging
the turbocharger bearings through
inadequate lubrication, ALWAYS
allow the engine to idle for 10
seconds before switching off.
Driving 371

05/10/03 20:14:16 32SEA630_375
5-speed Manual Transmission
Come to a full stop before you shift

into Reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into Rapid slowing or speeding-
Reverse with the car moving. Push up can cause loss of control
down the clutch pedal, and pause for on slippery surfaces. If you
a few seconds before shifting into crash, you can be injured.
Reverse, or shift into one of the
forward gears for a moment. This Use extra care when driving
stops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’ on slippery surfaces.
When slowing down, you can get

extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
2.0 engine models braking can help you maintain a safe
The manual transmission is syn- speed and prevent your brakes from
chronized in all forward gears for overheating while going down a
smooth operation. It has a lockout so steep hill. Before downshifting,
you cannot shift directly from fifth to make sure the engine speed will not
reverse. When shifting up or down, go into the tachometer’s red zone in
make sure you push the clutch pedal the lower gear. Refer to the
down all the way, shift to the next Maximum Allowable Speeds Chart.
gear, and let the pedal up gradually.
When you are not shifting, do not
rest your foot on the clutch pedal.
This can cause excessive clutch wear.
372 Driving

05/10/03 20:14:23 32SEA630_376
Recommended Shift Points Maximum Allowable Speeds Before downshifting, make sure the
Drive in the highest gear that lets The speeds in this table are the car will not exceed the maximum
the engine run and accelerate maximum allowable speeds in each allowable speed specified by the
smoothly. This will give you the best gear. If you exceed these speeds, the chart for the lower gear to avoid
fuel economy and effective emis- engine speed will enter into the engine damage.
sions control. The following shift tachometer’s red zone. If this occurs,
points are recommended: you may feel the engine cut in and
out. This is caused by a limiter in the Gear Maximum
2.0 engine model engine’s computer controls. The allowable speeds
engine will run normally when you
Shift up Normal acceleration reduce the RPM below the red zone. 1st 54 km/h (34 mph)
2nd 100 km/h (62 mph)
1st to 2nd 25 km/h (15 mph) 3rd 147 km/h (91 mph)
2nd to 3rd 40 km/h (25 mph) 4th 183 km/h (114 mph)
3rd to 4th 65 km/h (40 mph)
4th to 5th 80 km/h (50 mph)
Driving 373

05/10/03 20:14:30 32SEA630_377
This can cause excessive clutch wear.
Come to a full stop before you shift Rapid slowing or speeding-

into Reverse. You can damage the up can cause loss of control
transmission by trying to shift into on slippery surfaces. If you
Reverse with the car moving. Push crash, you can be injured.
down the clutch pedal, and pause for
a few seconds before shifting into Use extra care when driving
Reverse, or shift into one of the on slippery surfaces.
forward gears for a moment. This
stops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’
On cars with aluminum shift lever
When slowing down, you can get If you leave the vehicle parked
2.4 engine models and diesel extra braking from the engine by outside for a long time on a hot day,
models shifting to a lower gear. This extra be careful before moving the shift
The manual transmission is synchro- braking can help you maintain a safe lever. Because of the heat, the shift
nized in all forward gears for smooth speed and prevent your brakes from lever may be extremely hot.
operation. It has a lockout so you overheating while going down a
cannot shift directly from Fifth to steep hill. Before downshifting,
Reverse instead of Sixth (see page make sure the engine speed will not
377 ). When shifting up or down, go into the tachometer’s red zone in
make sure you push the clutch pedal the lower gear. Refer to the
down all the way, shift to the next Maximum Allowable Speeds Chart.
gear, and let the pedal up gradually.
When you are not shifting, do not
rest your foot on the clutch pedal.
374 Driving

05/10/03 20:14:36 32SEA630_378
Recommended Shift Points 2.4 engine models Diesel models

Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate Shift up Normal acceleration Shift up Normal acceleration
smoothly. This will give you the best
fuel economy and effective emis- 1st to 2nd 27 km/h (17 mph) 1st to 2nd 15 km/h (9 mph)
sions control. The following shift 2nd to 3rd 46 km/h (29 mph) 2nd to 3rd 35 km/h (22 mph)
points are recommended: 3rd to 4th 59 km/h (37 mph) 3rd to 4th 55 km/h (34 mph)
4th to 5th 69 km/h (43 mph) 4th to 5th 70 km/h (44 mph)
5th to 6th 79 km/h (49 mph) 5th to 6th 85 km/h (53 mph)
Driving 375

05/10/03 20:14:43 32SEA630_379
Maximum Allowable Speeds 2.4 engine models Diesel models

The speeds in this table are the
maximum allowable speeds in each Gear Maximum Gear Maximum
gear. If you exceed these speeds, the allowable speeds allowable speeds
engine speed will enter into the
tachometer’s red zone. If this occurs, 1st 52 km/h (32 mph) 1st 40 km/h (25 mph)
you may feel the engine cut in and 2nd 99 km/h (62 mph) 2nd 77 km/h (45 mph)
out. This is caused by a limiter in the 3rd 137 km/h (85 mph) 3rd 119 km/h (74 mph)
engine’s computer controls. The 4th 181 km/h (112 mph) 4th 161 km/h (100 mph)
engine will run normally when you 5th 225 km/h (140 mph) 5th 202 km/h (126 mph)
reduce the RPM below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the

car will not exceed the maximum
allowable speed in the lower gear to
avoid engine damage.
376 Driving

05/10/03 20:14:50 32SEA630_380
Reverse Lockout 2. If you are still unable to shift to

The 6-speed manual transmission Reverse, apply the parking brake
has an electric lockout so you cannot and turn the ignition key to
accidentally shift from Fifth to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).
Reverse instead of Sixth. If you
cannot shift to Reverse when the car 3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift
is stopped: to Reverse.
4. With the clutch pedal still de-

pressed, start the engine.
If you need to use this procedure to

shift to Reverse, your car may be
1. With the clutch pedal depressed, developing a problem. Have the car
move the shift lever to the First/ checked by your dealer.
Second gear side of the Neutral
gate, then shift to Reverse.
Driving 377

05/10/03 20:14:58 32SEA630_381
Automatic Transmission
Your car’s transmission has five Shift Lever Position Indicator The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
forward speeds, and is electronically few seconds when you turn the
controlled for smoother shifting. It ignition switch to ON (II). If it
also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter flashes while driving (in any shift
for better fuel economy. You may position), it indicates a possible
feel what seems like another shift problem in the transmission.
when the converter locks.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
lever is in. In the Sequential possible problem with the
SportShift Mode, the ‘‘M’’ indicator transmission, you will see the symbol
next to the ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on, ‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with a
and the illuminated number shows ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on the
you the gear you have selected. multi-information display.
378 Driving

05/10/03 20:15:05 32SEA630_382
Shift Lever Positions To select the Sequential SportShift To shift from: Do this:
Mode, slide the shift lever toward P to R Press the brake pedal and
RELEASE the driver’s side from the ‘‘D’’ press the release button.
BUTTON SHIFT
LEVER
position. R to P
In this mode the shift lever allows N to R Press the release button.
you to shift up and down manually. D to D3
D3 to D
D to N Move the lever.
N to D
R to N
SEQUENTIAL
SPORTSHIFT You cannot shift out of Park with the
MODE
POSITION brake pedal depressed when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or
The shift lever has six positions. It ACCESSORY (I) position.
must be in Park or Neutral to start
the engine. When you are stopped in
D, D3, N, R, or the Sequential
SportShift Mode, press firmly on the
brake pedal and keep your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
CONTINUED
Driving 379

05/10/03 20:15:11 32SEA630_383
Park (P) − This position mechani- Reverse (R) − To shift to Reverse

cally locks the transmission. Use from Park, see the explanation under
Park whenever you are turning off or Park. To shift to Reverse from
starting the engine. To shift out of Neutral, come to a complete stop and
Park, you must press on the brake then shift. Press the release button
pedal and have your foot off the before shifting into Reverse from
accelerator pedal. Press the release Neutral.
button on the side of the shift lever
to move it.
If you have done all of the above and

still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
385 .
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
380 Driving

05/10/03 20:15:17 32SEA630_384
Neutral (N) − Use Neutral if you Sequential SportShift Mode − With

need to restart a stalled engine, or if the shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position, you
it is necessary to stop briefly with can select the Sequential SportShift (＋)
Upshift
the engine idling. Shift to Park posi- Mode to shift gears; much like a
tion if you need to leave the car for manual transmission, but without a (−)
any reason. Press on the brake pedal clutch pedal. Downshift
when you are moving the shift lever
from Neutral to another gear. To enter the Sequential SportShift
Mode, move the shift lever further to
Drive (D) − Use this position for the driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D’’,
your normal driving. The transmis- move the shift lever to the
sion automatically selects a suitable passenger’s side.
gear (1 through 5) for your speed
and acceleration. You may notice the When you move the shift lever from
transmission shifting up at higher ‘‘D’’ to the Sequential SportShift In the Sequential SportShift Mode,
speeds when the engine is cold. This Mode, the display shows the each time you push forward on the
helps the engine warm up faster. selected gear and the ‘‘M’’ indicator shift lever, the transmission shifts to
comes on. a higher gear. Pull back on the lever
to downshift. The number of the
gear selected is displayed next to the
‘‘M’’ indicator (see page 378 ).
Driving 381

05/10/03 20:15:26 32SEA630_385
When you accelerate away from a The transmission may automatically The transmission will also shift
stop, the transmission will be in first downshift from the higher gear to automatically as the car comes to a
gear. The transmission will not the lower gear under the following complete stop. It will downshift to
automatically upshift. Watch the conditions: first gear when the car speed is
tachometer and upshift manually under 10 km/h (6 mph).
before the engine reaches redline. The vehicle speeds drops below.
5 → 4: 52 km/h (32 mph) If you try to manually downshift at a
The transmission remains in the 4 → 3: 32 km/h (20 mph) speed that would cause the engine to
selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There exceed the redline in a lower gear,
is no automatic downshift when you If you drive uphill between. the transmission will not downshift.
push the accelerator pedal to the 5 → 4: 72 − 52 km/h (45 − 32
floor. mph) The gear indicator will flash the
4 → 3: 52 − 32 km/h (32 − 20 number of the lower gear several
mph) times, then return to the higher gear.
If you press the brake pedal as you If the car speed slows to below the
drive downhill. redline of the selected lower gear
position while the indicator is
Downshifting gives you more power flashing, the transmission will
when climbing or provides engine downshift and the display will
braking when going down a steep hill. show the selected lower gear.
382 Driving

05/10/03 20:15:35 32SEA630_386
If the transmission temperature is If the automatic transmission fluid

below −10 °C (14 °F), you may not To shift form Speed range temperature increases and exceeds
be able to use the Sequential the specified limit, the transmission
SportShift mode. 2→1 under 50 km/h will also automatically downshift to
(31 mph) the first gear. This prevents the
The table shows the speed ranges automatic transmission from
for upshifting and downshifting. 3→2 under 100 km/h overheating. In this case, the gear
(63 mph) position ‘‘1’’ next to the ‘‘M’’ indicator
in the instrument panel blinks for
To shift form Speed range 4→3 under 150 km/h about five seconds, then it stays on.
(94 mph)
1→2 over 0 km/h Starting in Second Gear
(0 mph) 5→4 under 210 km/h When you are in Sequential
(131 mph) Sportshift Mode, and the car is
2→3 over 10 km/h stopped, push forward on the shift
(6 mph) lever to shift to second gear. You will
see ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting out in
3→4 over 32 km/h second gear will help to reduce
(20 mph) wheelspin in deep snow or on a
slippery surface.
4→5 over 52 km/h
(32 mph)
CONTINUED
Driving 383

05/10/03 20:15:41 32SEA630_387
Drive (D3) − To shift to D3 from D, Maximum Allowable Speeds

press the release button on the side The speeds in this table are the Position Maximum
of the shift lever. This position is maximum allowable speeds in each allowable speeds
similar to D, except only the first position. If you exceed these speeds,
three gears are selected. Use D3 the engine speed will enter into the D3 140 km/h (87 mph)
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain, tachometer’s red zone. If this occurs,
or to provide engine braking when you will feel the engine cut in and
going down a steep hill. D3 can also out. This is caused by a limiter in the
keep the transmission from cycling engine’s computer controls. The
between third and fourth gears in engine will run normally when you
stop-and-go driving. reduce the RPM below the red zone.
For faster acceleration when in D3 or Before downshifting, make sure the

D, you can get the transmission to vehicle will not exceed the maximum
automatically downshift by pushing allowable speed in the chart for the
the accelerator pedal to the floor. lower gear to avoid engine damage.
The transmission will shift down one,
two or three gears, depending on
your speed.
384 Driving

05/10/03 20:15:51 32SEA630_388
Shift Lock Release SHIFT LOCK RELEASE

This allows you to move the shift RELEASE SLOT BUTTON
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
1. Set the Parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.
COVER
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift
Lock Release slot cover next to 4. Insert the key in the Shift Lock 6. Remove the key from the Shift
the shift lever. Use a small flat- Release slot. Lock Release slot, then reinstall
tipped screwdriver or small metal the cover. Make sure the notch on
plate (neither are included in the 5. Push down on the key while you the cover is on the driver’s side.
tool kit) to remove the cover. press the release button on the Depress the brake pedal and
Carefully pry off the edge of the shift lever and move the shift lever restart the engine.
cover. out of Park to neutral.
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your car is
developing a problem. Have the car
checked by your dealer.
Driving 385

05/10/03 20:16:01 32SEA630_389
Parking
Always use the parking brake when If the car is facing uphill, turn the Parking Tips
you park your car. The indicator on front wheels away from the curb. If Make sure the sunroof (if
the instrument panel shows that the you have a manual transmission, put equipped) and the windows are
parking brake is not fully released; it it in first gear. closed.
does not indicate that the parking
brake is firmly set. Make sure the If the car is facing downhill, turn the Turn off the lights.
parking brake is set firmly or your front wheels toward the curb. If you
car may roll if it is parked on an have a manual transmission, put it in Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
incline. reverse gear. in the boot or take them with you.
If your car has an automatic Make sure the parking brake is fully Lock the doors with the key or the
transmission, set the parking brake released before driving away. remote transmitter.
before you put the transmission in Driving with the parking brake
Park. This keeps the car from partially set can overheat or damage On cars with security system
moving and putting pressure on the the rear brakes. Check the indicator on the
parking mechanism in the instrument panel to verify that the
transmission − making it easier to security system is set.
move the shift lever out of Park
when you want to drive away. Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The catalytic converter
gets very hot, and could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
386 Driving

05/10/03 20:16:08 32SEA630_390
The Braking System
Your car is equipped with disc Constant application of the brakes Brake Wear Indicators
brakes at all four wheels. A power when going down a long hill builds All four brakes have audible brake
assist helps reduce the effort needed up heat and reduces their effective- wear indicators.
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps ness. Use the engine to assist the
you retain steering control when brakes by downshifting to a lower When the brake pads need replacing,
braking very hard. gear and taking your foot off the you will hear a distinctive metallic
accelerator pedal. ‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply
Put your foot on the brake pedal only the brakes. If you do not have the
when you intend to brake. Resting Check your brakes after driving brake pads replaced, they will begin
your foot on the pedal keeps the through deep water. Apply the screeching all the time.
brakes applied lightly, causing them brakes moderately to see if they feel
to build up heat. Heat build-up can normal. If not, apply them gently and Your brakes may sometimes squeal
reduce how well your brakes work. It frequently until they do. Since a or squeak when you apply them
also keeps your brake lights on all longer distance is needed to stop lightly. Do not confuse this with the
the time, confusing drivers behind with wet brakes, be extra cautious brake wear indicators. The
you. and alert in your driving. indicators make a very audible
‘‘screeching.’’
Driving 387

05/10/03 20:16:15 32SEA630_391
The Braking System
Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes The ABS also balances the front-to-
The hydraulic system that operates Your car has an Anti-lock Brake rear braking distribution according
the brakes has two separate circuits. System (ABS) as standard to vehicle loading.
Each circuit works diagonally across equipment. ABS helps to prevent the
the vehicle (the left-front brake is wheels from locking up and skidding
connected with the right-rear brake, during hard braking, allowing you to
etc.). If one circuit should develop a retain steering control.
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels. When the front tyres skid, you lose
steering control; the car continues
straight ahead even though you turn
the steering wheel. The ABS helps to
prevent lock-up and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
Front brakes rapidly; much faster than a
person can do it.
388 Driving

05/10/03 20:16:23 32SEA630_392
The Braking System
You should never pump the Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
brake pedal; this defeats the ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or
purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS distance it takes to stop the car; it uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
work for you by always keeping firm, only helps with steering control snow, than a vehicle without anti-
steady pressure on the brake pedal during braking. You should always lock. Slow down and allow a greater
as you steer away from the hazard. maintain a safe following distance distance between vehicles under
This is sometimes referred to as from other vehicles. those conditions.
‘‘stomp and steer.’’
ABS will not prevent a skid that
You will feel a pulsation in the brake results from changing direction
pedal when the ABS activates, and abruptly, such as trying to take a
you may hear some noise. This is corner too fast or making a sudden
normal; it is the ABS rapidly lane change. Always drive at a safe,
pumping the brakes. prudent speed for the road and
weather conditions.
Activation varies with the amount of
traction your tyres have. On dry pave- ABS cannot prevent a loss of
ment, you will need to press on the stability. Always steer moderately
brake pedal very hard before you ac- when you are braking hard. Severe
tivate the ABS. However, you may or sharp steering wheel movement
feel the ABS activate immediately if can still cause your car to veer into
you are trying to stop on snow or ice. oncoming traffic or off the road.
CONTINUED
Driving 389

05/10/21 11:54:04 32SEA630_393
The Braking System
ABS Indicator When the ABS indicator comes on, which could cause the rear wheels to
you will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
ABS INDICATOR the symbol with a ‘‘CHECK control.
information display. On some types, the VSA system
indicator will come on along with the
If the ABS indicator and the brake ABS indicator if there is a problem
system indicator come on together, with the anti-lock brake system. You
and the parking brake is fully will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the
released, the front-to-rear braking symbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’
distribution system may also shut message on the multi-information
down. display.
If this happens, you will see the

The ABS is self-checking. If anything symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with
goes wrong, the ABS indicator on a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message, and
the instrument panel comes on (see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ (on some
page 85 ). This means the anti-lock types) or the symbol with a ‘‘CHECK
function of the braking system has SYSTEM’’ message (on some types)
shut down. The brakes still work like on the multi-information display.
a conventional system without anti-
lock, providing normal stopping Test your brakes as instructed on
ability. You should have the dealer page 466 . If the brakes feel normal,
inspect your car as soon as possible. drive slowly and have your car
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
390 Driving

05/10/03 20:16:40 32SEA630_394
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System (For some types)
The Vehicle Stability Assist system The VSA system cannot enhance the VSA Activation Indicator
helps to stabilize the car during vehicle’s driving stability in all
cornering if the car turns more or situations and does not control your VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
less than desired. It also assists you car’s entire braking system. It is still
in maintaining traction while your responsibility to drive and
accelerating on loose or slippery corner at reasonable speeds and to
road surfaces. It does this by leave a sufficient margin of safety.
regulating the engine’s output, and
by selectively applying braking.
When VSA activates, you may notice

that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink. When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink.
CONTINUED
Driving 391

05/10/03 20:16:49 32SEA630_395
VSA System Indicator If the VSA system indicator comes VSA Off Switch
on while driving, pull to the side of
VSA SYSTEM INDICATOR the road when it is safe and turn off
the engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine, and watch the
VSA system indicator. If the
indicator remains on, or comes back
on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
If the indicator does not come on

when the ignition switch is turned to
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR ON (II), there may be a problem
with the VSA system. Have your
The VSA system indicator (see page dealer inspect your car as soon as This switch is under the driver’s side
86 ) and the VSA activation indicator possible. vent. Press it to turn the Vehicle
(see page 86 ) come on when there is Stability Assist system on and off.
a problem with the VSA system. You Without VSA, your car will have
will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the normal braking and cornering ability, When VSA is off, the VSA activation
symbol with a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ but it will not have VSA traction and indicator comes on as a reminder.
message on the multi-information stability enhancement. Pressing the switch again turns the
display. system back on.
392 Driving

05/10/03 20:16:55 32SEA630_396
VSA is turned on every time you VSA and Tyre Sizes

start the engine, even if you turned it Driving with varying tyre or wheel
off the last time you drove the car. sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tyres,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tyres (see
page 470 ).
Deactivate the VSA system if you

need to drive with the compact spare
tyre installed (see page 504 ).
If you install winter tyres, make sure

they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
car. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your car was not equipped with VSA.
Driving 393

05/10/03 20:17:00 32SEA630_397
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving Technique − Always drive Exercise extra caution when driving

slower than you would in dry in rain after a long dry spell. After
weather. It takes your car longer to months of dry weather, the first
react, even in conditions that may rains bring oil to the surface of the
seem just barely damp. Apply roadway, making it slippery.
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard
application of the brakes can cause
loss of control in wet weather. Be
extra cautious for the first few
kilometres (miles) of driving while
you adjust to the change in driving
Rain, fog, and snow conditions re- conditions. This is especially true in
quire a different driving technique snow. A person can forget some
because of reduced traction and snow-driving techniques during the
visibility. Keep your car well- summer months. Practice is needed
maintained and exercise greater to relearn those skills.
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control (on
some types) should not be used in
these conditions.
394 Driving

05/10/03 20:17:07 32SEA630_398
Driving in Bad Weather
Visibility − Being able to see Traction − Check your tyres

clearly in all directions and being frequently for wear and proper
visible to other drivers are important pressure. Both are important in
in all weather conditions. This is preventing ‘‘aquaplaning’’ (loss of
more difficult in bad weather. To be traction on a wet surface). In the
seen more clearly during daylight winter, mount snow tyres on all four
hours, turn on your headlights. wheels for the best handling.
Inspect your windscreen wipers and Watch road conditions carefully,

washers frequently. Keep the wind- they can change from moment to
screen washer reservoir full of the moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
proper fluid. Have the windscreen pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have
wiper blades replaced if they start to patches of ice. Driving conditions
streak the windscreen or leave parts can be very hazardous when the Be very cautious when passing, or
unwiped. Use the demister and air outside temperature is near freezing. being passed by other vehicles. The
conditioning to keep the windows The road surface can become spray from large vehicles reduces
from fogging up on the inside (see covered with areas of water puddles your visibility, and the wind buffeting
pages 183 and 191 ). mixed with areas of ice, so your can cause you to lose control.
traction can change without warning.
CAUTION: Do not drive on the road
Be careful when downshifting. If where water is deep. Driving
traction is low, you can lock up the through deep water will cause
drive wheels for a moment and cause damage to the engine and electrical
a skid. equipment and the vehicle will break
down.
Driving 395

05/10/03 20:17:13 32SEA630_399
Towing a Trailer
Your car has been designed Load Limits

primarily to carry passengers and
their luggage. You can use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
The total weight of the trailer and a trailer weight of less than 750 kg
towbar (with/without brakes) plus (1,653 lbs)/600 kg (1,323 lbs) on
its luggage must not exceed the Australian model, as a rule of
maximum towing weight. See page thumb, the trailer nose load
511 . should be 10 percent of the total
trailer package.
The ‘‘trailer nose load’’ should
never exceed 75 kg (165 lbs)/
60 kg (132 lbs) on Australian
model. This is the amount of
weight the trailer puts on the
towbar when it is fully-loaded. For
396 Driving

05/10/03 20:17:19 32SEA630_400
Towing a Trailer
For example, if the trailer and its The maximum permissible weight Towing a load that is too heavy can
load weigh 225 kg (500 lbs), the must not exceed the specified limit seriously affect your car’s handling
trailer nose load should be 22.5 kg as shown on page 547 . and performance. It can also damage
(50 lbs). Adjust trailer’s luggage to the engine and drivetrain.
change the trailer nose load. Start by The maximum permissible weight
putting approximately 60 percent of is total weight of the car, driver,
the luggage toward the front and passengers, luggage and towbar.
40 percent toward the rear. With a Exceeding load limits or
trailer package of more than 750 kg The maximum loaded vehicle improperly loading your car
(1,653 lbs)/600 kg (1,323 lbs) on weight must not exceed the and trailer can cause a crash
Australian model, you may need to specified limit as shown on page in which you can be seriously
adjust the luggage weight toward the 547 . injured or killed.
rear. Never load the trailer so the
back is heavier than the front. This Please consider that the instal- Check the loading of your car
takes weight off your car’s rear axle lation of optionals (and trailer nose and trailer carefully before
and reduces traction. load when towing a trailer) will starting to drive.
reduce the loading capacity.
Driving 397

05/10/03 20:17:27 32SEA630_401
Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads Towing Equipment and Towbars

The best way to confirm that vehicle Accessories Any towbar used on your car must
and trailer weights are within limits Towing can require a variety of be properly bolted to the underbody.
is to have them checked at a public equipment, depending on the size of
scale. your trailer, how it will be used, and Refer to page 546 for the towbar
how much load you are towing. mounting points.
Using a suitable scale or a special
trailer nose load gauge, check the Discuss your needs with your trailer Safety Chains
total weight, the weight at each axle sales or rental agency, and follow the Always use safety chains. Make sure
and the trailer nose load the first guidelines in the rest of this section. they are secured to both the trailer
time you set up a towing combination Also make sure that all equipment is and towbar, and that they cross
(a fully-loaded vehicle and trailer), properly installed and that it meets under the trailer nose so they can
then recheck the loads whenever the the country’s regulations where you catch the trailer if it becomes
conditions change. are driving. unhitched. Leave enough slack to
allow the trailer to turn corners
easily, but do not let the chains drag
on the ground.
398 Driving

05/10/03 20:17:37 32SEA630_402
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights Wiring Colour Code for Lighting

If you are thinking of getting a trailer You can get an optional trailer
that has brakes, be sure they are lighting connector for your car from Applicable Wiring
electronically actuated. Do not your dealer. Light Colour
attempt to tap into your car’s
hydraulic system. No matter how If you use a converter, you can get Tail-light Red/Black
successful it may seem, any attempt an optional connector and pins that
to attach trailer brakes to your car’s mate with the connector in your car Brake Light White/Black
hydraulic system will lower braking from your dealer.
effectiveness and create a potential Back-up Green
hazard. Since lighting and wiring vary in Light
trailer type and brand, you should
See your trailer dealer for more also have a qualified technician Right Turn Brown
information on installing electric install a suitable connector between Signal
brakes. the car and the trailer.
Left Turn Red/Blue
Always consult your dealer before Signal
connecting the trailer lights to your
car’s lighting system. Ground Black
(For some types)

Your car has a trailer lighting
connector located in the boot by the
left tail-light. Refer to the following
table for the wiring colour code.
CONTINUED
Driving 399

05/10/03 20:17:46 32SEA630_403
Towing a Trailer
Additional Trailer Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist Your car’s tyres and spare are
There may be laws requiring special When preparing to tow, and before properly inflated, and the trailer
outside mirrors when you are towing driving away, be sure to check the tyres and spare are inflated as
a trailer. Check the local laws in the following: recommended by the trailer
country. Even if there are no legal maker.
requirements, you should install The car has been properly
special mirrors if you cannot clearly serviced, and the tyres, brakes, Be sure to check regulations
see behind you, or if the trailer suspension, and cooling system concerning the maximum speed or
creates a blind spot. are in good operating condition. driving restrictions for vehicles
towing trailers. If you are driving
Ask your trailer sales or rental All weights and loads are within across several countries, check
agency if any other items are limits (see pages 396 and 397 ). each country’s requirements
recommended or required for your before leaving home, because
towing situation. The towbar, safety chains, and any regulations may vary.
other attachments are secure.
Operating speed when towing a
All items on and in the trailer are trailer is restricted to 100 km/h
properly secured and cannot shift (62 mph).
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your car

and the trailer are working
properly.
400 Driving

05/10/03 20:17:55 32SEA630_404
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer Towing Speeds and Gears When towing a trailer in the
The added weight, length, and Drive slower than normal in all Sequential SportShift mode, select
height of a trailer will affect your car’s driving situations, and obey posted Fourth, Third, Second, or First gear;
handling and performance, so speed limits for vehicles with trailers. depending on the vehicle speed and
driving with a trailer requires some If you have an automatic road condition. Do not use Fifth gear.
special driving skills and techniques. transmission, use the D position The recommended speed range for
when towing a trailer on level roads. each gear position is shown in the
For your safety and the safety of D3 is the proper shift lever position table.
others, take time to practice driving to use when towing a trailer in hilly
manoeuvres before heading for the terrain. (See ‘‘Driving on Hills’’ in the
open road, and follow the guidelines following column for additional gear Gear position Speed range
discussed below. information.)
1 0 − 60 km/h
(0 − 37 mph)
2 30 − 100 km/h
(19 − 62 mph)
3, 4 over 60 km/h
(over 38 mph)
CONTINUED
Driving 401

05/10/03 20:18:04 32SEA630_405
Towing a Trailer
If the automatic transmission fluid Driving on Hills On cars with the automatic
temperature increases and exceeds When climbing hills, closely watch transmission, select the Sequential
the specified limit, the transmission your temperature gauge. If it nears SportShift mode and shift down to
will also automatically downshift to the red mark, turn the air 1st gear when driving up steep hills.
the first gear even with the conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
Sequential Sportshift Mode. This necessary, pull to the side of the Driving on an uphill road of more
prevents the automatic transmission road to let the engine cool. than 12% slope is not recommended
from overheating. In this case, the for your car.
gear position ‘‘1’’ next to the ‘‘M’’ If the automatic transmission shifts
indicator in the instrument panel frequently within 3rd, 4th, and 5th We recommend that you tow a
blinks about for five seconds, then it gears while going up a hill, shift to trailer on the road recommended by
stays on. D3. the trailer association.
Making Turns and Braking If you must stop when facing uphill,
Make turns more slowly and wider use the foot brake or parking brake.
than normal. The trailer tracks a Do not try to hold the car in place by
smaller arc than your car, and it can pressing on the accelerator, as this
hit or run over something the car can cause the automatic
misses. Allow more time and transmission to overheat.
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the When driving down hills, reduce
trailer to jackknife or turn over. your speed and shift down to 2nd
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember it will take longer to slow
down and stop when towing a trailer.
402 Driving

05/10/03 20:18:11 32SEA630_406
Towing a Trailer
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting Parking

Crosswinds and air turbulence Follow all normal precautions when
caused by passing trucks can disrupt parking, including firmly setting the
your steering and cause trailer parking brake and putting the
swaying. When being passed by a transmission in Park (automatic) or
large vehicle, keep a constant speed in 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,
and steer straight ahead. Do not try place wheel chocks at each of the
to make quick steering or braking trailer’s tyres.
corrections.
On Diesel models only
Backing Up You should keep the engine idling
Always drive slowly and have for about 2 minutes before turning
someone guide you when backing up. off the ignition switch. (Idling the
Grip the bottom of the steering engine is prohibited in some
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left countries. Always follow the legal
to get the trailer to move to the left, requirements of the countries in
and turn the wheel right to move the which you will drive.)
trailer to the right.
Driving 403

05/10/03 20:18:13 32SEA630_407
404

05/10/03 20:18:18 32SEA630_408
Maintenance
Regularly maintaining your car is the Recommended Oil ..................... 423 Spark Plugs (Petrol models) ........ 453
best way to protect your investment. Additives ..................................... 424 Replacement ............................... 453
You will be rewarded with safer, Changing the Oil and Filter ...... 424 Specifications ............................. 455
more economical, trouble-free Cooling System (Petrol models) .. 427 Battery ............................................ 456
driving. This section lists items that Adding Engine Coolant ............. 427 Wiper Blades .................................. 459
need to be checked regularly and Replacing Engine Coolant ........ 429 Air Conditioning System ............... 461
explains how to check them. It also Cooling System Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 462
details some simple maintenance (Diesel models) ..................... 433 Drive Belt ........................................ 464
tasks you can do yourself. The Adding Engine Coolant ............. 433 Tyres ............................................... 465
maintenance schedules show you Replacing Engine Coolant ........ 435 Inflation ....................................... 465
when these things need to be done. Windscreen Washers .................... 440 Inspection ................................... 466
Transmission Fluid ........................ 441 Maintenance ............................... 467
Automatic Transmission........... 441 Tyre Rotation ............................. 468
5-speed Manual Replacing Tyres and Wheels ... 469
Transmission.......................... 443 Wheels and Tyres ...................... 470
Maintenance Schedule .................. 406 6-speed Manual Winter Tyres .............................. 471
Required Maintenance Record .... 413 Transmission.......................... 444 Tyre Chains ................................ 471
Owner Maintenance Checks ........ 414 Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 447 Lights .............................................. 473
Fluid Locations............................... 416 Brake System ............................. 447 Headlight Aiming ...................... 475
Engine Oil (Petrol models)........... 418 Clutch System ............................ 448 Headlights with High Voltage
Adding Oil................................... 418 Power Steering Fluid..................... 449 Discharge Tubes ................... 475
Recommended Oil ..................... 419 Air Cleaner Element ...................... 450 Replacing a Headlight Bulb ...... 475
Additives ..................................... 420 Bonnet Latch .................................. 451 Storing Your Car ............................ 491
Changing the Oil and Filter ...... 420 Fuel Filter ....................................... 452 Priming the Fuel System
Engine Oil (Diesel models) .......... 423 Draining Water (Diesel models only) ............. 492
Adding Oil................................... 423 (Diesel models only) ............. 452
Maintenance 405

05/10/03 20:18:29 32SEA630_409
Maintenance Schedule
The Required Maintenance Schedule In New Zealand, follow the On Petrol models
specifies all maintenance required to Maintenance Schedule in the Service Always use the recommended
keep your car in peak operating Maintenance and Warranty Book petrol only (see page 351 ).
condition. Maintenance work should that came with your car.
be performed in accordance with the On Diesel models
standards and specifications of The services and time or distance Always use the recommended
Honda by properly trained and intervals shown in the maintenance diesel fuel only (see page 352 ).
equipped technicians. Your author- schedule assume you will use your
ized dealer meets all of these car as normal transportation for We recommend the use of genuine
requirements. passengers and their possessions. Honda parts and fluids or their
You should also follow these equivalent whenever you have
The Maintenance Schedule in this recommendations: maintenance done. These are the
owner’s manual should be applied same high-quality items that went
except in Australia, New Zealand and Avoid exceeding your car’s load into your car when it was new, so
EU countries (see pages 407 and limit. This puts excess strain on you can be sure they fit and perform
410 ). the engine, brakes, and many flawlessly.
other parts of your car.
In EU countries, follow the
Maintenance Schedule in the Service Operate your car on reasonable
Book that came with your car. roads within the legal speed limit. On Diesel models
Do not press the engine cover
In Australia, follow the Maintenance Drive your vehicle regularly over a forcibly.
Schedule in the Owner’s Warranty distance of several kilometres This may damage the engine cover
and Service Manual that came with (miles). and component parts.
your car.
406 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:18:45 32SEA630_410
Maintenance Schedule for Petrol models (Except EU, Australia and New Zealad)
Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 This Maintenance Schedule
or time − whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0 outlines the minimum required
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
maintenance that you should
Replace engine oil＊1 Normal Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 year
perform to ensure the trouble-
M A I N T E N A N C E
Severe Every 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months
Replace engine oil filter＊1 Normal free operation of your car. Due
Severe Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months to regional and climatic
Clean air cleaner element Dry type only Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) differences, some additional
Replace air cleaner element Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) servicing may be required.
Inspect valve clearance Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) Please consult your warranty
Replace fuel filter＊2
handbook for a more detailed
Replace spark plugs 2.0 engine (Normal type) Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles)
2.4 engine (Iridium type) Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
description.
Inspect drive belts
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant At 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years, thereafter
100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years
Replace transmission fluid M/T Normal
Severe
S C H E D U L E
A/T Normal
Severe
CONTINUED
Maintenance 407

05/10/03 20:18:59 32SEA630_411
Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
or time − whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Inspect front and rear brakes Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
S C H E D U L E
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years

Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter (if equipped)
Rotate tyres (Check tyre inflation and condition at Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
least once per month)
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluid
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
＊1 : Only severe schedule is required in some countries: refer to local warranty booklet.
＊2 : Refer to page 452 for replacement information under driving conditions.
408 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:19:05 32SEA630_412
NOTE:
The following items must be used for ‘‘Service condition’’ indicated on
schedule.
Severe Conditions:
A: Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip or, in freezing temperatures,
driving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.
B: Driving in extremely hot [over 35°C (95°F)] conditions.
C: Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.
D:Trailer towing, driving with a roof rack, or driving in mountainous
conditions.
E: Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.
Items Condition
S C H E D U L E
Engine oil and oil filter A, B, C, D, E
Transmission fluid B, D
M/T, A/T
Maintenance 409

05/10/03 20:19:16 32SEA630_413
Maintenance Schedule for Diesel models (Except EU, Australia and New Zealad)
Severe Driving Conditions
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
S C H E D U L E
Replace engine oil and oil filter Normal Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 year
Severe Every 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months
Replace air cleaner element Normal Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles)
(Wet Type) Severe Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
Replace fuel filter
Inspect drive belts
Replace engine coolant
Replace manual transmission fluid Normal
Severe
410 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:19:28 32SEA630_414
Maintenance Schedule for Diesel models (Except EU, Australia and New Zealad)
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Inspect front and rear brakes Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter (if equipped)
Rotate tyres (Check tyre inflation and condition at Rotate tyres every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
least once per month)
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
S C H E D U L E
Maintenance 411

05/10/21 11:54:10 32SEA630_415
Maintenance Schedule for Diesel models (Except EU, Australia and New Zealand)
NOTE:
The following items must be used for ‘‘Service condition’’ indicated on
S C H E D U L E
schedule.
Severe Conditions:
A: Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip or, in freezing temperatures,
driving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.
B: Driving in extremely hot [over 35°C (95°F)] conditions.
C: Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.
D:Trailer towing, driving with a roof rack, or driving in mountainous
conditions.
E: Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.
Items Condition
Engine oil and oil filter A, B, C, D, E
Transmission fluid B, D
M/T, A/T
Air cleaner element D, E
412 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:19:40 32SEA630_416
Required Maintenance Record (Except EU)
Have your servicing dealer record all Required Maintenance below. Keep receipts for all work done on your car.
20,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 120,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
12,500 Mi. 75,000 Mi.
(or 12 Mo.) (or 72 Mo.)
Date Date
25,000 Mi. 87,500 Mi.
(or 24 Mo.) (or 84 Mo.)
Date Date
37,500 Mi. 100,000 Mi.
(or 36 Mo.) (or 96 Mo.)
Date Date
50,000 Mi. 112,500 Mi.
(or 48 Mo.) (or 108 Mo.)
Date Date
62,500 Mi. 125,000 Mi.
(or 60 Mo.) (or 120 Mo.)
Date Date
Maintenance 413

05/10/03 20:19:51 32SEA630_417
Owner Maintenance Checks
You should check the following Engine oil level − Windscreen wipers − Check the
items at the use or specified intervals. Check every time you fill the fuel wiper condition monthly. If the
tank. See page 355 . wipers do not wipe the windscreen
securely, check them for wear,
Engine coolant level − cracks, and other damage.
On Petrol models
Check the radiator reserve tank Automatic transmission − Check
every time you fill the fuel tank. the fluid level monthly. See page
See page 358 . 441 .
On Diesel models Brakes and clutch − Check the

Check the expansion tank every fluid level monthly. See page 447 .
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 358 . Brake pedal − Check the brake
pedal for smooth operation.
Windscreen washer fluid − Check
the level in the reservoir monthly. Parking brake − Check the
If weather conditions cause you to parking brake lever for smooth
use the washers frequently, check operation.
the reservoir each time you stop
for fuel. See page 440 .
414 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:19:58 32SEA630_418
Owner Maintenance Checks
Tyres − Check the tyre pressure Lights − Check the operation of

monthly. Examine the tread for the headlights, position lights, tail-
wear and foreign objects. See page lights, high-mount brake light,
465 . turn signals, brake lights and
licence plate lights monthly. See
Battery − Check its condition and page 473 .
the terminals for corrosion
monthly. See page 456 . Doors − Check the boot lid and
all doors including the rear doors
Air conditioning system (on some for smooth opening/closing and
types) − Check its operation secure locking.
weekly. See page 461 .
Horn − Check the horn operation.
Windscreen demister − Operate
the heater and air conditioning
and check the demister vents
monthly.
Maintenance 415

05/10/03 20:20:02 32SEA630_419
Fluid Locations (Petrol models)
BRAKE FLUID CLUTCH FLUID

(Black cap) (Manual Transmission
only)
(Light gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK

(Orange handle)
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
WASHER FLUID AUTOMATIC

(Blue cap) TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)＊ RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
＊ : Except for cars with Electric Power Steering (EPS) system
416 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:20:07 32SEA630_420
Fluid Locations (Diesel models)
BRAKE FLUID CLUTCH FLUID

(Black cap) (Light gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK

(Orange handle)
ENGINE OIL
POWER STEERING FILL CAP
FLUID (Red cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
EXPANSION
TANK
Maintenance 417

05/10/03 20:20:15 32SEA630_421
Engine Oil (Petrol models)
Adding Oil Pour the oil slowly and carefully so Select the proper SAE/ACEA
you do not spill any. Clean up any viscosity oil for your car according to
spills immediately. Spilled oil could this chart:
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Recommended Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade deter-
gent oil. It is highly recommended
that you use genuine Honda Motor
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Oil, ‘‘ACEA A1/B1,’’ or ‘‘ACEA
A3/B3’’ in your car for as long as you
To add oil, unscrew and remove the own it. Ambient Temperature
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the Always use genuine Honda Motor oil
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely. or a fuel-efficient oil that says
Let the engine warm up and turn off ‘‘ACEA A1/B1’’ or ‘‘ACEA A3/B3.’’
the engine, let it sit for This oil is formulated to help your
approximately 3 minutes, then check engine use less fuel.
the oil level. Do not fill above the
upper mark; you could damage the
engine.
418 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:20:21 32SEA630_422
(Except European models) Select the proper SAE viscosity oil Additives
Oil is a major contributor to your for your car according to this chart: Your car does not require any oil
engine’s performance and longevity. additives. Additives may adversely
Always use a premium-grade deter- affect your engine’s or transmission’s
gent oil. It is highly recommended performance and durability.
that you use genuine Honda Motor
Oil in your car for as long as you own
it.
Ambient Temperature
Always use a fuel-efficient oil that

says ‘‘API Service SJ or SL.’’ This oil
is formulated to help your engine use
less fuel.
Maintenance 419

05/10/03 20:20:25 32SEA630_423
Changing the Oil and Filter Changing the oil and filter requires
Always change the oil and filter special tools and access from
according to the time and distance underneath the car. The car should Repeated, prolonged
(kilometres/miles) recommenda- be raised on a service station-type exposure to used motor oil
tions in the maintenance schedule. hydraulic lift for this service. Unless may cause skin cancer.
The oil and filter collect contami- you have the knowledge and proper
nants that can damage your engine if equipment, you should have this Wash your hands thoroughly
they are not removed regularly. maintenance done by a skilled with strong soap as soon as
technician. possible after handling used
oil.
420 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:20:33 32SEA630_424
1. Run the engine until it reaches 2. Open the bonnet and remove the OIL DRAIN BOLT
normal operating temperature, engine oil fill cap.
then shut it off.
The oil, engine components

and the exhaust system are
hot and can burn you.
Use caution and wear

protective clothing while WASHER
working in the engine BOLT
compartment. LID Remove the oil drain bolt and
washer from the bottom of the en-
3. Remove the bolt with a wrench, gine. Drain the oil into an appropri-
then remove the maintenance lid ate container.
under the car.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 421

05/10/03 20:20:43 32SEA630_425
OIL FILTER 7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, 11. Turn off the engine, let it sit for
then reinstall the drain bolt. approximately 3 minutes, then
Tighten it to: check the oil level. If necessary,
add oil to bring the level to the
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m , 33 lbf·ft) upper mark on the dipstick.
8. Refill the engine with the recom- 12. Install the maintenance lid and
mended oil. tighten the bolt securely.
Engine oil change capacity

(including filter):
Improper disposal of engine oil can
4.2 (4.4 US qt , 3.7 Imp qt) be harmful to the environment. If
4. Remove the oil filter and let the you change your own oil, please
remaining oil drain. A special 9. Replace the engine oil fill cap. dispose of the used oil properly. Put
wrench (available from your Start the engine. The oil pressure it in a sealed container and take it to
dealer) is required to remove the indicator light should go out within a recycling centre. Do not discard it
filter. five seconds. If it does not, turn off in a waste bin or dump it on the
the engine and check your work. ground.
5. Check the oil filter to make sure
its gasket did not stick to the 10. Run the engine until warmed up,
engine block. A stuck gasket could then check the drain bolt and oil
cause an oil leak. filter for leaks.
6. Install a new oil filter according to

instructions that come with it.
422 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:20:50 32SEA630_426
Engine Oil (Diesel models)
Adding Oil Pour the oil slowly and carefully so Recommended Oil
you do not spill any. Clean up any Always use a synthetic motor oil that
spills immediately. Spilled oil could meets the ACEA specifications, and
damage components in the engine is the proper weight as shown in the
compartment. following chart. When using
synthetic oil, you must follow the oil
and filter change intervals given in
the maintenance schedule.
It is highly recommended that you

use genuine Honda Motor oil or
0W-30 synthetic motor oil meeting
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP the minimum specification: ACEA
A1/B1.
To add oil, unscrew and remove the
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.
Let the engine warm up and turn off
the engine, let it sit for
approximately 3 minutes, then check
the oil level. Do not fill above the
upper mark; you could damage the
engine.
Maintenance 423

05/10/03 20:20:57 32SEA630_427
You can select the proper ACEA Additives Changing the Oil and Filter
viscosity oil for your car according to Your car does not require any oil Always change the oil and filter
this chart: additives. Additives may adversely according to the time and distance
affect your engine’s or transmission’s (kilometres/miles) recommenda-
performance and durability. tions in the maintenance schedule.
The oil and filter collect contami-
nants that can damage your engine if
they are not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires

special tools and access from
underneath the car. The car should
be raised on a service station-type
hydraulic lift for this service. Unless
Ambient Temperature you have the knowledge and proper
equipment, you should have this
＊NOTE: Using oils other than those maintenance done by a skilled
of preferred viscosity may technician.
adversely affect fuel
consumption.
424 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:21:05 32SEA630_428
2. Open the bonnet and remove the

engine oil fill cap.
Repeated, prolonged
exposure to used motor oil
may cause skin cancer.
Wash your hands thoroughly

with strong soap as soon as
possible after handling used
oil.
WASHER OIL DRAIN BOLT

1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature, LID BOLT Remove the oil drain bolt and
then shut it off. washer from the bottom of the en-
3. Remove the bolt with a wrench, gine. Drain the oil into an appropri-
then remove the maintenance lid ate container.
under the car.
The oil, engine components
and the exhaust system are
hot and can burn you.
Use caution and wear

protective clothing while
working in the engine
compartment. CONTINUED
Maintenance 425

05/10/03 20:21:16 32SEA630_429
OIL FILTER 5. Check the oil filter to make sure engine and check your work.
its gasket did not stick to the
engine block. A stuck gasket could 10. Run the engine until warmed up,
cause an oil leak. then check the drain bolt and oil
filter for leaks.
6. Install a new oil filter according to
instructions that come with it. 11. Turn off the engine, let it sit for
approximately 3 minutes, then
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, check the oil level. If necessary,
then reinstall the drain bolt. add oil to bring the level to the
Tighten it to: upper mark on the dipstick.
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m , 29 lbf·ft) 12. Install the maintenance lid and
4. Remove the oil filter and let the tighten the bolt securely.
remaining oil drain. A special 8. Refill the engine with the recom-
wrench (available from your mended oil.
dealer) is required to remove the
filter. Engine oil change capacity Improper disposal of engine oil can
(including filter): be harmful to the environment. If
When removing the oil filter, put a you change your own oil, please
damp rag over any other 5.9 (6.2 US qt , 5.2 Imp qt) dispose of the used oil properly. Put
compartment near the filter, so that it in a sealed container and take it to
oil doesn’t spill. 9. Replace the engine oil fill cap. a recycling centre. Do not discard it
Start the engine. The oil pressure in a waste bin or dump it on the
If you are not sure how to replace indicator should go out within 5 ground.
the oil filter, contact your dealer. seconds. If it does not, turn off the
426 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:21:24 32SEA630_430
Cooling System (Petrol models)
Adding Engine Coolant Always use genuine Honda All

Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 % Removing the radiator cap
antifreeze and 50 % water. It does not while the engine is hot can
require any additional mixing. The cause the coolant to spray
cooling system contains many out, seriously scalding you.
aluminium components that can
corrode if an improper antifreeze is Always let the engine and
used. Some antifreeze, even though radiator cool down before
labelled as safe for aluminium parts, removing the radiator cap.
may not provide adequate protection.
RESERVE TANK If the reserve tank is completely

empty, you should also check the
If the coolant level in the reserve coolant level in the radiator.
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
The coolant you add should always
be a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and
50 % water. Never add straight
antifreeze or plain water.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 427

05/10/03 20:21:33 32SEA630_431
5. Put the radiator cap back on.

Tighten it fully.
RADIATOR CAP
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or

other additives to your car’s cooling
system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or engine compo-
RESERVE TANK nents.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator 4. The coolant level should be up to
are cool. the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
2. Turn the radiator cap anticlock-
wise, without pressing down on it, Pour the coolant slowly and
until it stops. This relieves any carefully so you do not spill any.
pressure remaining in the cooling Clean up any spills immediately.
system. Spilled coolant could damage
components in the engine
3. Remove the radiator cap by compartment.
pushing down and turning
anticlockwise.
428 Maintenance

05/10/04 17:07:57 32SEA630_432
Replacing Engine Coolant 1. Open the bonnet. Make sure the

The cooling system should be engine and radiator are cool to the
completely drained and refilled with touch.
new coolant according to the time
and distance recommendations in On cars with Manual A/C or without
the maintenance schedule. Only use A/C
genuine Honda All Season Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Turn the temperature control dial all
the way clockwise. Turn off the
Draining the coolant requires access ignition and remove the key.
to the underside of the car. Unless
you have the tools and knowledge, On cars with Climate Control System
you should have this maintenance Turn the ignition switch to the ON
done by a skilled technician. (II) position. Make sure the DUAL 2. Remove the radiator cap.
indicator is off. Turn the driver’s side
temperature control dial to
‘‘ ’’. Turn off the ignition and
remove the key.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 429

05/10/03 20:21:48 32SEA630_433
RESERVE TANK 6. When the coolant stops draining,

tighten the drain plug at the
bottom of the radiator.
DRAIN PLUG MOUNTING BOLTS HOLDER
3. Loosen the drain plug on the 4. Remove the two reserve tank
bottom of the radiator. The mounting bolts with a wrench.
coolant will drain through the
splash guard. Drain the coolant 5. Remove the reserve tank from its
into an appropriate container. holder by pulling it straight up.
Drain the coolant into an
appropriate container, then put the
tank back in its holder. Install the
mounting bolts securely.
430 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:21:56 32SEA630_434
FILLER NECK The cooling system capacity is: 8. Start the engine and let it run for
about 30 seconds. Then turn off
2.0 engine model the engine.
With 5-speed manual transmission:
4.5 (1.19 US gal , 0.99 Imp gal) 9. Fill the radiator with coolant up to
the base of the filler neck.
With automatic transmission:
4.4 (1.16 US gal , 0.97 Imp gal)
2.4 engine model

With 6-speed manual transmission:
Fill up to here 5.4 (1.43 US gal , 1.19 Imp gal)
7. Pour genuine Honda All Season With automatic transmission:

Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into 5.3 (1.40 US gal , 1.17 Imp gal)
the radiator up to the base of the
filler neck. This coolant is a
mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Pre-mixing
is not required.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 431

05/10/03 20:22:04 32SEA630_435
13. Remove the radiator cap. Pour

coolant into the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck and into the
reserve tank up to the MAX mark.
14. Start the engine and hold it at

1,500 rpm until the cooling fan
comes on. Turn off the engine.
Check the coolant level in the
radiator and add coolant if needed.
RESERVE TANK 15. Install the radiator cap, and

tighten it fully.
10. Fill the reserve tank to the MAX
mark. Install the reserve tank cap. 16. If necessary, fill the reserve tank
to the MAX mark. Install the
11. Install the radiator cap, and reserve tank cap.
tighten it to the first stop.
12. Start the engine and let it run until

the radiator cooling fan comes on
at least twice. Then stop the
engine.
432 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:22:10 32SEA630_436
Cooling System (Diesel models)
Adding Engine Coolant Always use genuine Honda All

Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
EXPANSION TANK This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 % Removing the expansion
antifreeze and 50 % water. It does not tank cap while the engine is
require any additional mixing. The hot can cause the coolant to
cooling system contains many spray out, seriously scalding
aluminium components that can you.
corrode if an improper antifreeze is
used. Some antifreeze, even though Always let the engine and
labelled as safe for aluminium parts, radiator cool down before
may not provide adequate protection. removing the expansion tank
cap.
MAX LINE MIN LINE
If the coolant level in the expansion

tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
The coolant you add should always
be a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and
50 % water. Never add straight
antifreeze or plain water.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 433

05/10/03 20:22:19 32SEA630_437
5. Put the expansion tank cap back

on. Tighten it fully.
EXPANSION TANK CAP EXPANSION TANK
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your car’s cooling
system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or engine compo-
nents.
MAX LINE
1. Make sure the engine and radiator 4. The coolant level should be up to
are cool. the MAX line. Add coolant if it is
low.
2. Loosen the expansion tank cap by
turning it 1/8 turn anticlockwise. Pour the coolant slowly and
This will relieve any remaining carefully so you do not spill any.
pressure in the cooling system. Clean up any spills immediately.
Spilled coolant could damage
3. Remove the expansion tank cap by components in the engine
pushing down and turning compartment.
anticlockwise.
434 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:22:28 32SEA630_438
Replacing Engine Coolant EXPANSION O-RING

The cooling system should be TANK CAP
completely drained and refilled with
new coolant according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. Only use
genuine Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
BLEEDER
Draining the coolant requires access PLUG
to the underside of the car. Unless
you have the tools and knowledge,
you should have this maintenance
done by a skilled technician. 2. Remove the expansion tank cap. 3. Remove the bleeder plug on the
expansion tank by using the
1. Open the bonnet. Make sure the ratchet.
engine and radiator are cool to the
touch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position. Make sure the DUAL
indicator is off. Turn the driver’s
side temperature control dial to
‘‘ ’’. Turn off the ignition
and remove the key.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 435

05/10/03 20:22:36 32SEA630_439
NUTS NUTS DRAIN BOLT

DRAIN PLUG
ENGINE COVER
4. Remove the four nuts with a 5. Loosen the drain plug on the 6. If possible, remove the drain bolt
wrench, then remove the engine bottom of the radiator. The and washer on the back of the
cover on the engine. coolant will drain through the engine block and drain the coolant
splash guard. Drain the coolant into an appropriate container.
into an appropriate container.
Do not press the engine cover

forcibly.
This may damage the engine cover
and component parts.
436 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:22:42 32SEA630_440
7. When the coolant stops draining, Put a new washer on the drain bolt, BLEEDER BOLT
tighten the drain plug at the and then reinstall the drain bolt on
bottom of the radiator securely. the back of the engine block
Tighten it to: securely. Tighten it to:
2.0 N·m (0.2 kgf·m , 1.4 lbf·ft) 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m , 29 lbf·ft)
8. Loosen the bleeder bolt on top of

the cylinder head.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 437

05/10/03 20:22:50 32SEA630_441
EXPANSION TANK
The cooling system capacity is:
(Including the coolant in the engine
block, the heater and the expansion
ENGINE
BLOCK tank)
When the drain bolt on the engine block

is removed:
Over 6.8 (1.80 US gal , 1.50 Imp gal)
MAX
Line When the drain bolt on the engine block
is not removed:
RADIATOR 6.3 (1.66 US gal , 1.39 Imp gal)
9. Pour genuine Honda All Season Pour the coolant over the MAX
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into line as shown in the illustration to
the expansion tank. fill the engine block with the
coolant.
This coolant is a mixture of 50 %

antifreeze and 50 % water. Pre-
mixing is not required.
438 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:22:59 32SEA630_442
10. Tighten the bleeder bolt on the 12. Put a new O-ring on the bleeding EXPANSION TANK
cylinder head when the coolant plug, then reinstall the bleeding
comes out in a steady stream with plug on the expansion tank
no bubbles. Tighten it to: securely. Tighten it to:
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m , 7 lbf·ft) 2.0 N·m (0.2 kgf·m , 1.4 lbf·ft)
11. Reinstall the engine cover and 13. Install the expansion tank cap and
tighten the four nuts with washers tighten it slightly.
securely.
14. Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator cooling fan comes on
at least twice. Do not operate the
air conditioning system. Then stop
the engine. 15. Adjust the coolant level in the
expansion tank to the MAX line
Make sure to warm up the engine after warming up the engine.
to bleed the remaining air in the
engine block. 16. Install the expansion tank cap and
tighten it fully.
Maintenance 439

05/10/03 20:23:06 32SEA630_443
Windscreen Washers
Check the level in the windscreen LEVEL GAUGE When you refill the reservoir, clean
washer reservoir at least monthly the edges of the windscreen wiper
during normal usage. In bad weather, blades with windscreen washer fluid
when you use the washers often, on a clean cloth. This will help to
check the level every time you stop condition the blade edges.
for fuel.
The windscreen washer reservoir is

located behind the right headlight. Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
LEVEL GAUGE windscreen washer reservoir.
Diesel models
Antifreeze can damage your car’s
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality paint, while a vinegar/water solution
windscreen washer fluid. This can damage the windscreen washer
increases the cleaning capability and pump.
prevents freezing in cold weather.
Use only commercially-available
windscreen washer fluid.
Petrol models
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by

removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
440 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:23:16 32SEA630_444
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission 4. Remove the dipstick, and check

the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
5. If the level is below the lower

mark, add fluid into the dipstick
tube to bring it to the upper mark.
DIPSTICK
GUIDE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
UPPER MARK so you do not spill any. Clean up
LOWER MARK
any spills immediately. Spilled
DIPSTICK fluid could damage components in
the engine compartment.
Check the fluid level with the engine 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
at normal operating temperature. the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
1. Park the car on level ground. Shut Make sure the notch in the rubber
off the engine. cap fits in the dipstick guide and
that you push the dipstick in all
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) the way.
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 441

05/10/03 20:23:22 32SEA630_445
Transmission Fluid
Always use genuine Honda The transmission should be drained

ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission and refilled with new fluid according
Fluid). If it is not available, you to the time and distance recommen-
may use a DEXRON III dations in the maintenance schedule.
automatic transmission fluid as a
temporary replacement. However, If you are not sure how to add fluid,
continued use can affect the shift contact your dealer.
quality. Have the transmission
flushed and refilled with genuine
Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is
convenient.
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back

into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the notch fits in the

dipstick guide and the dipstick is
down all the way.
442 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:23:31 32SEA630_446
Transmission Fluid
5-speed Manual Transmission Put the under cover back in place.

FILLER BOLT If genuine Honda MTF is not
available, you may use an API
service SJ or higher grade motor oil
with a viscosity of SAE 10W-30 or
10W-40 as a temporary replacement.
However, motor oil does not contain
the proper additives and continued
use can cause stiffer shifting.
Replace as soon as it is convenient.
BOLT Correct level The transmission should be drained

and refilled with new fluid according
2.0 engine model Remove the transmission filler bolt to the time and distance recommen-
Check the fluid level with the and carefully feel inside the bolt hole dations in the maintenance schedule.
transmission at normal operating with your finger. The fluid level
temperature and the car sitting on should be up to the edge of the bolt If you are not sure how to check and
level ground. hole. If it is not, add genuine Honda add fluid, contact your dealer.
Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
To check the transmission fluid level, until it starts to run out of the hole.
remove the bolt, then pull down the Reinstall the filler bolt securely.
left part of the under cover. Tighten it to:
39−49 N·m (4−5 kgf·m , 29−36
lbf·ft)
CONTINUED
Maintenance 443

05/10/03 20:23:42 32SEA630_447
Transmission Fluid

CHECK BOLT FILLER BOLT
BOLT
BOLT UNDER COVER
2.4 engine model Remove the check bolt and look for If no fluid comes out, remove the
Check the fluid level with the transmission fluid coming out of the filler bolt. Slowly add genuine Honda
transmission at normal operating bolt hole. If a small amount of fluid Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
temperature and the vehicle sitting drips out of the bolt hole, reinstall until it starts to run out of the check
on level ground. the check bolt. Tighten it to: bolt hole. Let the fluid run out until it
9.8−14 N·m (1−1.4 kgf·m , 7−10 stops, then reinstall the check bolt
To check the transmission fluid level, lbf·ft) and the filler bolt. Tighten them to:
remove the two bolts, then pull down (Check bolt)
the left part of the under cover. See previous column.
(Filler bolt)
39−49 N·m (4−5 kgf·m , 29−36
lbf·ft)
444 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:23:52 32SEA630_448
Transmission Fluid
After checking and adding the fluid, The transmission should be drained 6-speed Manual Transmission
put the under cover back in place and refilled with new fluid according
and tighten the bolts securely. to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
Pour the fluid into the filler hole
slowly and carefully so you do not If you are not sure how to check and
spill any. Clean up any spills add fluid, contact your dealer.
immediately. Spilled fluid could
HOLDING
compartment. CLIP
If genuine Honda MTF is not BOLTS

available, you may use an API BOLTS UNDER COVER
with a viscosity of SAE 10W-30 or Diesel models
10W-40 as a temporary replacement. Check the fluid level with the
However, motor oil does not contain transmission at normal operating
the proper additives and continued temperature and the vehicle sitting
use can cause stiffer shifting. on level ground.
Replace as soon as it is convenient.
To check the transmission fluid level,
remove the four bolts and the eight
holding clips, then pull off the under
cover.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 445

05/10/03 20:24:02 32SEA630_449
Transmission Fluid
After checking and adding the fluid,

put the under cover back in place
CHECK BOLT FILLER BOLT and tighten the bolts securely.
Pour the fluid into the filler hole

slowly and carefully so you do not
spill any. Clean up any spills
compartment.
If genuine Honda MTF is not

available, you may use an API
Remove the check bolt and look for If no fluid comes out, remove the with a viscosity of SAE 10W-30 or
transmission fluid coming out of the filler bolt. Slowly add genuine Honda 10W-40 as a temporary replacement.
bolt hole. If a small amount of fluid Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) However, motor oil does not contain
drips out of the bolt hole, reinstall until it starts to run out of the check the proper additives and continued
the check bolt. Tighten it to: bolt hole. Let the fluid run out until it use can cause stiffer shifting.
9.8−14 N·m (1−1.4 kgf·m , 7−10 stops, then reinstall the check bolt Replace as soon as it is convenient.
lbf·ft) and the filler bolt. Tighten them to:
(Check bolt)
See previous column.
(Filler bolt)
39−49 N·m (4−5 kgf·m , 29−36
lbf·ft)
446 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:24:11 32SEA630_450
Brake and Clutch Fluid
The transmission should be drained Brake and Clutch Fluid Brake System
and refilled with new fluid according Check the fluid level in the reser-
to the time and distance recommen- voirs monthly. There are up to two
dations in the maintenance schedule. reservoirs, depending on the model.
They are:
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer. Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission only)
The brake fluid should be replaced

according to the time recommenda-
MAX MIN
tion in the maintenance schedule. Petrol models
Always use genuine Honda Brake The fluid level should be between
Fluid or an equivalent from a sealed the MIN and MAX marks on the side
container that is marked DOT3 or of the reservoir. If the level is at or
DOT4 only. Brake fluid marked below the MIN mark, your brake
DOT5 is not compatible with your system needs attention. Have the
car’s braking system. brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
compartment.
Maintenance 447

05/10/03 20:24:19 32SEA630_451
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Clutch System
CLUTCH FLUID
MAX RESERVOIR
MAX
MAX
MIN MIN MIN
Diesel models Petrol models Diesel models
The fluid level should be between Low fluid level can indicate a leak in
the MIN and MAX marks on the side the clutch system. Have this system
of the reservoir. If it is not, add inspected as soon as possible.
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
448 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:24:27 32SEA630_452
Power Steering Fluid
Except for cars with Electric Power UPPER LEVEL UPPER LEVEL
Steering (EPS)
You should check the fluid level in
the power steering reservoir at least
once a year. Check the level when
the engine is cold. Look at the side
of the reservoir. The fluid should be
between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the
LOWER LEVEL, add power steering
fluid to the UPPER LEVEL.
Petrol models LOWER LEVEL Diesel models LOWER LEVEL
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills A low power steering fluid level can
immediately. Spilled fluid could indicate a leak in the system. Check
damage components in the engine Using automatic transmission fluid the fluid level frequently, and have
compartment. or another brand of power steering the system inspected as soon as
fluid will damage the system. Use possible.
only genuine HONDA Power
Steering Fluid (V, II or S).
Turning the steering wheel to full

left or right lock and holding it there
can damage the power steering
pump.
Maintenance 449

05/10/03 20:24:38 32SEA630_453
Air Cleaner Element
The air cleaner element should be Replacement

replaced according to the time and
distance recommendations in the BOLTS SOCKET BOLT
maintenance schedule.
Cleaning
On some models with dry type air
cleaner element AIR
The air cleaner element should also CLEANER
HOUSING
be cleaned according to the BOLTS
maintenance schedule under severe
conditions. BOLTS
Clean the air cleaner element by Petrol models Diesel models
blowing compressed air through it in
the opposite direction to normal air The air cleaner element is inside the On Diesel models
flow. If you do not have access to air cleaner housing on the left side of Loosen the four bolts, and pull up
compressed air (such as a service the engine compartment. the front of the air cleaner housing
station), ask your dealer to do this To replace it: cover.
service.
1. On Petrol models Make sure to locate the air cleaner
Follow the replacement procedure Loosen the four bolts, and remove housing bolts as shown. Do not
for removal and reinstallation. the air cleaner housing cover. loosen the socket bolt holding the air
flow meter.
450 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:24:48 32SEA630_454
Air Cleaner Element, Bonnet Latch
Bonnet Latch
LATCH ASSEMBLY
AIR
CLEANER
ELEMENT
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

2. Remove the old air cleaner 4. Place the new air cleaner element Clean the bonnet latch assembly
element. in the air cleaner housing. with a mild cleaner, then lubricate it
with a multipurpose grease.
3. Carefully clean the inside of the 5. On Petrol models Lubricate all the moving parts (as
air cleaner housing with a damp Reinstall the air cleaner housing shown), including the pivot. If you
rag. cover, and tighten the four bolts. are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your dealer.
On Diesel models
Pull down the front of the air
cleaner housing cover and tighten
the four bolts securely.
Maintenance 451

05/10/03 20:24:55 32SEA630_455
Fuel Filter
The fuel filter should be replaced Draining Water After the car has been stored for an
according to the time and distance (Diesel models only) extended period, the engine may not
recommendations in the mainte- If you see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or start. This may be caused by air in
nance schedule. the symbol with a ‘‘WATER IN the fuel system. In this case, follow
FUEL FILTER’’ message appears on the procedure for Priming the Fuel
It is recommended to replace the the multi-information display, ask a System (see page 492 ).
fuel filter every 40,000 km (25,000 dealer immediately to drain the fuel
miles), or 2 years (except EU, filter of water.
Australia and New Zealand) if the
fuel you are using is suspected to be
contaminated with dust, etc. because
the filter may be clogged sooner.
Have a qualified technician change

the fuel filter. Since the fuel system
is under pressure, fuel can spray out
and create a hazard if all fuel line
connections are not handled
correctly.
452 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:25:03 32SEA630_456
Spark Plugs (Petrol models)
Spark Plugs 2.4 engine model Replacement

(Petrol models only) The spark plugs in your car are a
2.0 engine model special iridium-tipped design for BOLT COIL BOLT
COVER
The spark plugs in your car should longer life. The spark plugs should
be replaced according to the distance be replaced according to the time or
recommendation in the maintenance distance recommendations in the
schedule. maintenance schedule.
NUTS
1. Remove the two nuts and the two

bolts with a wrench, then remove
the coil cover.
2. Clean off any dirt and oil that have

collected around the ignition coils.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 453

05/10/03 20:25:12 32SEA630_457
BOLT CONNECTOR
IGNITION COIL LOCK TAB
3. Use a wrench to remove the bolt 5. Remove the ignition coil. 8. Torque the spark plug. (If you do
holding the ignition coil. Pull the not have a torque wrench, tighten
ignition coil up slightly. 6. Remove the spark plug with a 16 the spark plug 2/3 of a turn after it
mm (5/8 inch) spark plug socket. contacts the cylinder head.)
4. Disconnect the wire connector Tightening torque:
from the ignition coil by pushing 7. Put the new spark plug into the 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m , 13 lbf·ft)
on the lock tab and pulling on the socket, then screw it into the hole.
connector. Pull on the plastic Screw it in by hand so you do not
connector, not the wires. crossthread it.
454 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:25:22 32SEA630_458
9. Install the ignition coil into the Specifications:

hole.
Tighten the spark plugs carefully. A 2.4 engine model
spark plug that is too loose can 10. Connect the wire connector to the NGK: IZFR6K-11
overheat and damage the engine. ignition coil. Make sure it locks in DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11
Overtightening can cause damage to place.
the threads in the cylinder head. 2.0 engine model
11. Push the ignition coil down all the NGK: ZFR6K-11
way. Install the bolt. DENSO: KJ20DR-M11
12. Repeat this procedure for the Spark Plug Gap:

other three spark plugs. 1.1 mm (0.04 in) ＋−00.1 mm
13. Reinstall the coil cover, and Check the type of the spark plugs
tighten the two nuts and the two installed on your car or ask your
bolts securely. dealer for replacement.
Maintenance 455

05/10/03 20:25:27 32SEA630_459
Battery
Check the condition of your car’s bat-

tery monthly. You should check the
colour of the test indicator window, The battery gives off The battery contains sulfuric
and for corrosion on the terminals. explosive hydrogen gas acid (electrolyte) which is
during normal operation. A highly corrosive and
spark or open flame can poisonous.
cause the battery to explode
with enough force to kill or Getting electrolyte in your
seriously hurt you. eyes or on your skin can
cause serious burns. Wear
Keep all sparks, open flames, protective clothing and eye
and smoking materials away protection when working on
from the battery. or near the battery.
Wear protective clothing and Swallowing electrolyte can

a face shield, or have a skilled cause fatal poisoning if
technician do the battery immediate action is not
maintenance. taken.
KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF

CHILDREN
See Emergency Procedures on the

next page.
456 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:25:35 32SEA630_460
Battery
Emergency Procedures TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Eyes − Flush with water from a cup

or other container for at least 15
minutes. (Water under pressure can
damage the eye.) Call a physician
immediately.
Skin − Remove contaminated

clothing. Flush the skin with large
quantities of water. Call a physician
immediately. Petrol models Diesel models
Swallowing − Drink water or milk. Check the battery condition by Check the battery terminals for
Call a physician immediately. looking at the test indicator window corrosion (a white or yellowish
on the battery. The label on the powder). To remove it, cover the
battery explains the test indicator’s terminals with a solution of baking
colours. soda and water. It will bubble up and
turn brown. When this stops, wash it
off with plain water. Dry off the
battery with a cloth or paper towel.
Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 457

05/10/03 20:25:41 32SEA630_461
Battery
If you need to connect the battery to

a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damage to the car’s Charging the battery with the cables
electrical system. connected can seriously damage
your car’s electronic controls.
If your car’s battery is disconnected Detach the battery cables before
or goes dead, the AUTO feature of connecting the battery to a charger.
the driver’s window will be disabled.
You should reset the AUTO feature
(see page 157 ).
Petrol model is shown. When the battery is disconnected,

the clock setting in the audio system
If the terminals are severely cor- will be cancelled. You will need to
roded, clean them with baking soda reset the clock according to the
and water. Then use a wrench to instructions of the audio system.
loosen and remove the cables from
the terminals. Always disconnect the
negative (−) cable first and recon-
nect it last. Clean the battery termi-
nals with a terminal cleaning tool or
wire brush. Reconnect and tighten
the cables, then coat the terminals
with grease.
458 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:25:51 32SEA630_462
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS

blades at least every six months. BLADE ASSEMBLY
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
TAB
To replace the blade: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly

from the wiper arm:
1. Raise the wiper arm off the Press and hold the lock tab.
windscreen. Slide the blade assembly toward
Raise the driver’s side first, then the lock tab until it release from
the passenger’s side. the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade,

make sure not to drop the wiper
Do not open the bonnet when the blade or wiper arm down on the
wiper arms are raised, or you will windscreen.
damage the bonnet and the arms.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 459

05/10/03 20:26:01 32SEA630_463
Wiper Blades
5. Install the new blade onto the

REINFORCEMENT blade assembly:
STRIP Pull back either end of the blade
assembly.
Place the side of the blade not
labelled ‘‘LOCK’’ on the end of
the blade assembly, and slide
the blade onto the assembly
until it is fully installed.
WIPER BLADE 6. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
3. Remove the blade from the blade 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
assembly: they have no plastic or metal rein- 7. Reinstall the cover.
Find the side of the blade forcement along the back edge,
labelled ‘‘LOCK.’’ This is the remove the metal reinforcement 8. Make sure the blade is completely
side you pull out. strips from the old wiper blade and installed and that its edge is not
Pull back the end of the blade install them in the slots along the bunched up.
assembly on the ‘‘LOCK’’ side of edge of the new blade.
the blade. Then grad the end of 9. Lower the wiper arm down against
the blade, and slide it out. the windscreen, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
460 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:26:08 32SEA630_464
Air Conditioning System
Your car’s air conditioning is a sealed Periodically check the engine’s If the air conditioning does not get as
system. Any major maintenance, radiator and air conditioning cold as before, have your dealer
such as recharging, should be done condenser for leaves, insects, and check the system. Recharge the
by a qualified technician. You can do dirt stuck to the front surface. These system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
a couple of things to make sure the block the air flow and reduce cooling (R-134a).
air conditioning works efficiently. efficiency. Use a light spray from a
hose or a soft brush to remove them.
Whenever you have the air condi-

tioning system serviced, make sure
The condenser and radiator fins the service facility uses a refrigerant
bend easily. Only use a low-pressure recycling system. This system
spray or soft-bristle brush to clean captures the refrigerant for reuse.
them. Releasing refrigerant into the
atmosphere can damage the environ-
Run the air conditioning at least once ment.
a week during the cold weather
AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER months. Run it for at least 10
minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil con-
tained in the refrigerant.
Maintenance 461

05/10/03 20:26:17 32SEA630_465
Dust and Pollen Filter (For some types)
The dust and pollen filter removes system becomes less than usual.
pollen and dust that is brought in
from the outside through the heating Replacement
and cooling system/climate control The dust and pollen filter is located
system. behind the glove box. Push
To replace it: STOP Push
This filter should be replaced during
scheduled maintenance. On 1. Open the glove box.
Australia model, refer to the Owner’s
Warranty and Service Manual, on
New Zealand model, refer to the
Service Maintenance and Warranty
Book, on EU models, refer to the
maintenance schedule in the Service 2. Push the stop on the passenger’s
Book that came with your car. On side of the glove box to detach it
other models, see the maintenance from the glove box.
schedules in this owner’s manual.
3. Disengage the tabs by pushing on
The dust and pollen filter should be each side panel, then pivot the
replaced at short intervals if you glove box out of the way.
drive primarily in urban areas that
have high concentrations of soot in
the air from industry and diesel-
powered vehicles. Replace it more
often if air flow from the heating and
cooling system/climate control
462 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:26:24 32SEA630_466
Dust and Pollen Filter (For some types)
7. Install the case. Make sure both

tabs ‘‘click’’ into place.
8. Install the glove box stop, and

close the glove box.
If you are not sure how to replace

the dust and pollen filter, have it
replaced by your dealer.
4. Push in the tabs on the corners of 5. Remove the filter from the case.
the dust and pollen filter case. Pull
out the case. 6. Install the new filter in the case.
Make sure the arrows of the ‘‘AIR
FLOW’’ marks on the filter point
to the air flow direction
(downward).
Maintenance 463

05/10/03 20:26:30 32SEA630_467
Drive Belt
POINTER POINTER
Proper Range
Petrol models Diesel models Proper Range
Check the condition of the drive belt. If the pointer is out of this range or
Examine the edges of the belt for you see signs of wear, have the drive
cracks or fraying. belt replaced by your dealer as soon
as possible.
An auto-tensioner adjusts the tension
of the drive belt. The pointer on the
auto-tensioner should be in the
proper range. It should be checked
according to the time and distance
recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.
464 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:26:38 32SEA630_468
Tyres
To safely operate your car, your Inflation Use a gauge to measure the air
tyres must be the proper type and Keeping the tyres properly inflated pressure at least once a month. Even
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of tyres that are in good condition may
tread, and correctly inflated. The handling, tread life, and riding lose 10 to 20 kPa (0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ,
following pages give more detailed comfort. Underinflated tyres wear one to two psi) per month.
information on how and when to unevenly, adversely affect handling Remember to check the spare tyre at
check air pressure, how to inspect and fuel economy, and are more the same time you check all the
your tyres for damage and wear, and likely to fail from being overheated. other tyres.
what to do when your tyres need to Overinflated tyres can make your car
be replaced. ride more harshly, are more prone to Check the pressure in the tyres
damage from road hazards, and wear when they are cold. This means the
unevenly. car has been parked for at least
three hours. If you have to drive the
Using tyres that are We recommend that you visually car before checking the tyre
excessively worn or check your tyres every day. If you pressure, the tyres can still be
improperly inflated can cause think a tyre might be low, check it considered ‘‘cold’’ if you drive less
a crash in which you can be immediately with a tyre gauge. than 1.6 km (1 mile).
seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this

owner’s manual regarding
tyre inflation and
maintenance.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 465

05/10/03 20:26:46 32SEA630_469
Tyres
If you check the pressure when the Recommended Tyre Pressures Inspection
tyres are hot [the car has been The recommended cold tyre Every time you check inflation, you
driven several kilometres (miles)], pressures are given on the tyre should also examine the tyres for
you will see readings 30 to 40 kPa information label on the driver’s damage, foreign objects, and wear.
(0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm , 4 to 6 psi) higher doorjamb. You should look for:
than the cold reading. This is normal.
Do not let air out to match the Tubeless tyres have some ability to Bumps or bulges in the tread or
specified cold pressure. The tyre will self-seal if they are punctured. side of the tyre. Replace the tyre if
be underinflated. However, because leakage is often you find either of these conditions.
very slow, you should look closely
You should get your own tyre for punctures if a tyre starts losing Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
pressure gauge and use it whenever pressure. of the tyre. Replace the tyre if you
you check your tyre pressures. This can see fabric or cord.
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tyre Excessive tread wear.
problem and not due to a variation
between gauges.
466 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:27:00 32SEA630_470
Tyres
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS Maintenance Make sure the installer balances the
In addition to proper inflation, wheels when you have new tyres
correct wheel alignment helps to installed. This increases riding
decrease tyre wear. If you find a tyre comfort and tyre life. Your car’s
is worn unevenly, have your dealer original tyres were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’
check the wheel alignment. balanced at the factory. For best
results, have the installer perform a
The tyres were properly balanced by dynamic balance.
the factory. They may need to be
rebalanced at some time before they
are worn out. Have your dealer
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS check the tyres if you feel a consis- (Only on cars equipped with aluminium
tent vibration while driving. A tyre wheels)
Your car’s tyres have wear indicators should always be rebalanced if it is Improper wheel weights can damage
moulded into the tread. When the removed from the wheel for repair. your car’s aluminium wheels. Use
tread wears down to that point, you only genuine Honda wheel weights
will see a 12.7 mm (1/2 inch) wide for balancing.
band running across the tread. This
shows there is less than 1.6 mm
(1/16 inch) of tread left on the tyre.
A tyre that is this worn gives very
little traction on wet roads. You
should replace the tyre if you can see
the tread wear indicator in three or
more places around the tyre.
Maintenance 467

05/10/03 20:27:08 32SEA630_471
Tyres
Tyre Rotation spare tyre. For non-directional tyres and wheels
Front When shopping for replacement Front

tyres, you may find that some tyres
are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they
are designed to rotate only in one
direction. If you use directional tyres,
they should be rotated only front-to-
back.
Refer to the illustrations in the next (Left-hand (Right-hand

(For non-directional (For directional
column when the normal spare tyre drive type) drive type)
tyres and wheels) tyres and wheels) is also rotated.
For directional tyres and wheels
To help increase tyre life and
distribute wear more evenly, you Front
should have the tyres rotated every
10,000 km (6,250 miles). Move the
tyres to the positions shown in the
charts each time they are rotated.
The above illustration shows how
the tyres should be rotated on the
vehicles equipped with a compact
spare tyre, when the normal spare (Left-hand (Right-hand
tyre is not included in the tyre drive type) drive type)
rotation, or the vehicles without
468 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:27:14 32SEA630_472
Tyres
Replacing Tyres and Wheels It is best to replace all four tyres at

The tyres that came with your car the same time. If that is not possible
were selected to match the perform- Installing improper tyres on or necessary, then replace the two
ance capabilities of the car while your car can affect handling front tyres or the two rear tyres as a
providing the best combination of and stability. This can cause a pair. Replacing just one tyre can
handling, ride comfort, and long life. crash in which you can be seriously affect your car’s handling.
You should replace them with radial seriously hurt or killed.
tyres of the same size, load range,
speed rating, and maximum cold tyre
pressure rating (as shown on the
tyre’s sidewall). Mixing radial and
bias-ply tyres on your car can reduce
its braking ability, traction, and
steering accuracy.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 469

05/10/03 20:27:22 32SEA630_473
Tyres
The ABS and VSA (if equipped) Wheels and Tyres See the tyre information label on the
works by comparing the speed of the Wheels: driver’s doorjamb or ask your dealer
wheels. When replacing tyres, use 15 x 6 JJ for information on the proper size of
the same size originally supplied with 16 x 6 1/2 JJ the tyres on your car.
the vehicle. Tyre size and 17 x 7 JJ
construction can affect wheel speed
and may cause the system to work Tyres:
inconsistently. 195/65R15 91V
205/55R16 91V
If you ever need to replace a wheel, 225/45R17 91W
make sure the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheel The sizes of wheels and tyres
that came on your car. Replacement installed on your vehicle vary
wheels are available at your dealer. depending on models.
Consult your dealer before replacing
tyres.
470 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:27:28 32SEA630_474
Tyres
Winter Tyres On European models Tyre Chains

Because of the limited winter Install the winter tyres according to Use snow chains only in an
qualification of summer tyres we the remarks in the registration paper. emergency or when they are legally
recommend the use of winter tyres According to the EEC Directive for required for driving through a
(M＋S tyres) on snowy and icy roads. tyres, when winter tyres are used, it certain area. Install the snow chains
If M＋S tyres are installed, all 4 is necessary to affix a sticker with on the front wheels. Use greater
wheels should be equipped to insure the allowable max. speed of the caution when driving with snow
safe driving. Use only tyres of the winter tyres clearly in the field of chains on snow or ice. They may
same brand with the same profile. view of the driver, if the max. have less-predictable handling than
Pay attention to the tyre size, load designed speed of the car is higher good winter tyres without chains.
capacity and speed class when than the allowed max. speed of the Some snow chains may damage the
buying. winter tyre. A sticker is obtainable car’s tyres, wheels, suspension and
from your tyre dealer. If any body. Choose only fine linked chains
questions arise, please discuss these which guarantee enough free space
with one of our dealers. between the tyre and the other
vehicle parts in the wheelhouse. Pay
attention to the sectional assembly
view and other directions from the
chain manufacturer. Consult your
dealer before purchasing any type of
chains for your car.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 471

05/10/03 20:27:34 32SEA630_475
Tyres
When you have installed tyre chains, (EU models)

drive at less than 30 km/h (19 mph) Use only the specified chains or their equivalents for your tyres as listed.
on roads covered with snow or ice.
To minimize tyre and chain wear, Tyre Size Chain Type
avoid driving on cleared roads with
chains installed. 195/65R15 RUD KANTENSPUR 46182 or equivalents
205/55R16 RUD KANTENSPUR 46184 or equivalents
Note that the tyre chain cannot be installed on the tyre of 225/45R17 size.
Replace the tyre with the winter tyre or the tyre of 205/55R16 size that can
be equipped with the chain.
472 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:27:39 32SEA630_476
Lights
Check the operation of your car’s

exterior lights at least once a month. HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT
A burned out bulb can create an
unsafe condition by reducing your
car’s visibility and the ability to
signal your intentions to other
drivers.
SIDE TURN
SIGNAL LIGHT
FRONT FOG LIGHT

FRONT TURN POSITION LIGHT
SIGNAL LIGHT
CONTINUED
Maintenance 473

05/10/03 20:27:45 32SEA630_477
Lights
Check the following:

STOP/TAIL-LIGHT TAIL-LIGHT HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
Headlights (low and high beam)
Position lights
Tail-lights
Brake lights
Turn signals
Side turn signals
Back-up lights
Hazard light function
Licence plate lights
High-mount brake light
Rear fog light (for some types)
Front fog lights (for some types)
If you find any bulbs are burned out,

replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page 551 to
determine what type of replacement
BACK-UP LIGHT/ bulb is needed.
REAR FOG LIGHT＊2
REAR TURN LICENCE PLATE LIGHTS
SIGNAL LIGHT
REAR FOG LIGHT＊1/BACK-UP LIGHT
＊1 : Left-hand drive type
＊2 : Right-hand drive type (except Australian model)
Petrol model is shown.
474 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:27:53 32SEA630_478
Lights
Headlight Aiming Headlights with High Voltage Replacing a Headlight Bulb

The headlights were properly aimed Discharge Tubes Your car has two bulbs on each side,
when your car was new. If you (For some types) four in total. Make sure you are
regularly carry heavy items in the The low beam headlight bulbs are a replacing the bulb that is burned out.
boot or pull a trailer, readjustment type of high voltage discharge tube. Your car uses halogen headlight
may be required. Adjustment of the High voltage can remain in the bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
headlights should be performed by a circuit even with the light switch off it by its plastic case and protect the
qualified technician. and the key removed. Because of glass from contact with your skin or
this, you should not attempt to hard objects. If you touch the glass,
On cars with headlight adjuster examine or change a low beam clean it with denatured alcohol and a
The vertical angle of the headlights headlight bulb yourself. If a low clean cloth.
can be adjusted. For complete beam headlight bulb fails, take the
information, see page 154 . car to your dealer to have it replaced.
On cars with high voltage discharge Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
type low beam headlights when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a
Your car is equipped with an scratch on the glass can cause the
automatic headlight adjusting bulb to overheat and shatter.
system that adjusts the vertical angle
of the headlights (low beam)
automatically. Refer to page 154 for
more information.
Maintenance 475

05/10/03 20:27:59 32SEA630_479
Lights
FASTENER FASTENER BULB
AIR INTAKE COVER AIR INTAKE COVER

Petrol models Diesel models Petrol models PLASTIC COVER
1. Open the bonnet. If you need to On cars with halogen type low beam
change a bulb on the left side, headlights
undo the three fasteners by To replace a low beam headlight
pushing on the centre of each bulb, remove the plastic cover by
fastener’s head and remove the air turning it anticlockwise.
intake cover.
476 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:28:08 32SEA630_480
Lights
PLASTIC BULB WEATHER BULB WEATHER

COVER SEAL SEAL
HOLD-DOWN WIRE CONNECTOR HOLD-DOWN WIRE CONNECTOR

Diesel models Petrol models Diesel models
On cars with high voltage discharge 2. Remove the electrical connector 4. Unclip the end of the hold-down
type low beam headlights from the bulb by pulling the wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
To replace a high beam headlight connector straight back. the way and remove the bulb.
bulb, follow the procedure of
replacing halogen type high beam 3. To replace a halogen type high 5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
headlight bulb. beam headlight bulb, remove the making sure the tabs are in their
rubber weather seal by pulling on slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
the tab. back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 477

05/10/03 20:28:21 32SEA630_481
Lights
6. Install the rubber seal over the Replacing a Front Turn Signal
back of the headlight assembly. Light Bulb
Make sure it is right side up; it is
marked ‘‘TOP.’’
7. Push the electrical connector onto

the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely.
Turn on the headlights to test the

new bulb.
8. On the left side, reinstall the air SOCKET SOCKET

intake cover. Reinstall the three BULB BULB
fasteners and secure them by
pushing on the heads until they 1. Open the bonnet. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
lock. socket.
2. Remove the socket from the Push the new bulb straight into
After replacing the high beam headlight assembly by turning it the socket until it bottoms.
headlight bulb, put the cover back one-quarter turn anticlockwise.
in place and turn it clockwise 4. Insert the socket back into the
securely. headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Turn on the lights to make sure

the new bulb is working.
478 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:28:29 32SEA630_482
Lights
Replacing a Front Position Light HOLDING CLIPS

Bulb
1. If you are changing the bulb on
the left side, start the engine, turn
the steering wheel all the way to
the right, and turn off the engine.
If you are changing the bulb on
the right side, turn the steering
wheel to the left.
BULB
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to 5. Pull the bulb straight out of its

remove the two holding clips from socket.
the inner fender. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
3. Pull the inner fender cover back.
4. Remove the socket from the

headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn anticlockwise.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 479

05/10/03 20:28:39 32SEA630_483
Lights
6. Insert the socket back into the Replacing Rear Bulbs

headlight assembly. Turn it (in Fenders)
clockwise to lock it in place.
BULB
7. Turn on the position lights to
make sure the new bulb works.
8. Put the inner fender cover in place.

Install the holding clips. Lock each
one in place by pushing on the
centre.
COVER BULB
1. Open the boot. 3. Remove the socket for that bulb

by turning it one-quarter turn
Remove the light assembly cover anticlockwise.
by pulling its outside edge.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
2. Determine which of the two bulbs socket.
is burned out: stop/tail-light or Push the new bulb straight into
turn signal light. the socket until it bottoms.
480 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:28:49 32SEA630_484
Lights
5. Reinstall the socket into the light Replacing Rear Bulbs (in Boot
assembly by turning it clockwise Lid)
until it locks.
BULBS
7. Install the light assembly cover.

Make sure it snaps into place.
FASTENERS
1. Open the boot. 4. Determine which bulb is burned

out: tail-light, rear fog light (on
2. To replace a bulb on the left side, some types), or back-up light.
remove the screws in the centre of
each of the two fasteners. On the
right side, remove the screw of the
fastener.
3. Pull the lining back carefully.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 481

05/10/03 20:28:56 32SEA630_485
Lights
5. Remove the socket by turning it 9. Reinstall the boot lid trim. Make Side Turn Signal Light
one-quarter turn anticlockwise. sure it is installed under the edge Each side turn signal light is
of the boot lid seal. installed in each outside mirror. It
6. Pull the bulb straight out of its should be replaced by your dealer.
socket. Push the new bulb in until 10. Put each trim clip in the hole on
it bottoms in the socket. the boot lid trim and push on the
centre until it locks (the centre is
7. Insert the socket back into the flush with the head).
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.

482 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:29:04 32SEA630_486
Lights
Replacing a High-mount Brake 3. Reinstall the socket. Turn it

Light Bulb clockwise until it locks.

BULB
SOCKET
1. Open the boot and remove the

socket from the light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn anti-
clockwise.

socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Maintenance 483

05/10/03 20:29:11 32SEA630_487
Lights
Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb BOLT

Your car uses halogen light bulbs.
When replacing a bulb, handle it by Halogen light bulbs get very hot
its plastic case and protect the glass when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a
from contact with your skin or hard scratch on the glass can cause the
objects. If you touch the glass, clean bulb to overheat and shatter.
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
BOLT CLIP
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to

remove the two mounting bolts
and remove the holding clip with a
flat-tipped screwdriver.
2. Carefully pull downward the side

under cover from the bumper.
484 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:29:18 32SEA630_488
Lights
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole

and turn it one-quarter turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
BULB
6. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
7. Turn on the front fog lights to test

the new bulb.
8. Reinstall the side under cover.

Make sure it is installed under the
3. Remove the electrical connector edge of the bumper.
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then 9. Reinstall the two mounting bolts
slide the connector off the bulb. on the side under cover and
tighten them securely. Put the
4. Remove the bulb by turning it holding clip back on the side
approximately one-quarter turn under cover and push on the
anticlockwise. centre until it locks (the centre is
flush with the head).
Maintenance 485

05/10/03 20:29:25 32SEA630_489
Lights
Replacing a Rear Licence Plate

Bulb
LICENCE PLATE GARNISH
1. Open the boot. Put a cloth on the 2. Remove the licence plate garnish 3. Remove the licence light assembly
edge of the licence plate garnish. while pulling out the four snap by carefully prying on the left
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to fasteners. edge of the lens with a flat-tip
pry carefully on the edge of the screwdriver and pulling the
licence plate garnish until it pops assembly out.
out.
486 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:29:33 32SEA630_490
Lights
6. Turn on the position lights and

check that the new bulb is
working.
7. Put the lens back on the bulb

holder and push it until it latches.
8. Slide the left side of the light

assembly into the hole. Push on
the right side to latch the
assembly into place.
9. Align and pop the snap fasteners

BULB in place and reinstall the licence
plate garnish.
4. Remove the lens from the bulb
holder by pulling the lens while If you are not sure how to replace
squeezing the tabs on both sides the bulbs, have them replaced by
of the holder. your dealer.

bulb holder. Push the new bulb in
until it bottoms in the bulb holder.
Maintenance 487

05/10/03 20:29:40 32SEA630_491
Lights
Replacing Bulbs in the Interior CEILING LIGHT FRONT DOOR LIGHT

Lights
The ceiling light, spotlight, door light
BULB
and vanity mirror light come apart
the same way, but they do not use
the same type of bulb.
1. Remove the lens by carefully BULB

prying on the edge of it with a
fingernail file or a small flat-tip
screwdriver. Do not pry on the
edge of the housing around the
lens.
Ceiling light: Door light:
Pry on the front edge of the lens Pry on the top left or right of the lens.
near both sides.
488 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:29:47 32SEA630_492
Lights
SPOTLIGHTS SPOTLIGHTS VANITY MIRROR LIGHT
BULB BULB
BULB BULB
BULB
On cars with sunroof On cars without sunroof
Spotlights: 2. Remove the bulb by pulling it

Pry on the inner edge of both straight out of its metal tabs.
spotlights.
3. Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs. Carefully snap the lens back
in place.
Maintenance 489

05/10/03 20:29:53 32SEA630_493
Lights
Replacing the Boot Light Bulb 3. Put the light assembly back into
the hole, left side first. Push on
the right side until it snaps into
BULB place.
1. Open the boot. 2. Pull the bulb straight out of the

holder. Push the new bulb straight
Put a cloth on the right side edge into the holder until it bottoms.
of the boot light assembly.
Remove the boot light assembly
by using a small flat-tipped
screwdriver to pry carefully on the
right edge of the assembly.
490 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:30:05 32SEA630_494
Storing Your Car
If you need to park your car for an Block the rear wheels. Nonporous materials, such as
extended period (more than one plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
month), there are several things you If the car is to be stored for a which can damage the paint.
should do to prepare it for storage. longer period, it should be
Proper preparation helps prevent supported on jackstands so the If possible, run the engine for a
deterioration and makes it easier to tyres are off the ground. while periodically (preferably once
get your car back on the road. If a month).
possible, store your car indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if
the car is being stored indoors). On Diesel models only
Fill the fuel tank. Ask a dealer to drain the fuel filter
Disconnect the battery. of water.
Change the engine oil and filter
(see page 420 on petrol models Support the front wiper blade
and page 424 on diesel models). arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windscreen.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely. To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
Clean the interior. Make sure the and boot seals. Also, apply a
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are vehicle body wax to the painted
completely dry. surfaces that mate with the door
and boot seals.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in reverse Cover the car with a ‘‘breathable’’
(manual) or Park (automatic). cover, one made from a porous
material such as cotton. CONTINUED
Maintenance 491

05/10/03 20:30:14 32SEA630_495
Storing Your Car
If you store your car for 12 months Priming the Fuel System FUEL HAND PRIMER
or longer, have your dealer perform (Diesel models only)
the inspections called for in the If your car runs out of fuel, the
24 months/40,000 km (25,000 miles) malfunction indicator lamp will come
maintenance schedule＊ as soon as on, or the glow plugs indicator will
you take it out of storage (see page blink, and the engine will not restart
406 ). The replacements called for in after refueling the fuel tank with the
the maintenance schedule are not appropriate fuel (see pages 524 and
needed unless the car has actually 525 ).
reached that time or distance.
In this case, air may have entered
＊ : For EU countries, Australia and the fuel system. The system requires
New Zealand, see the separate priming to start the engine. Prime
service information booklet. the fuel system as follows: 3. Squeeze the fuel hand primer until
you feel the strong resistance.
1. Refuel the fuel tank (minimum 5
litre).
2. Open the bonnet. Do not press the engine cover

forcibly.
This may damage the engine cover
and component parts.
492 Maintenance

05/10/03 20:30:22 32SEA630_496
Storing Your Car
4. Start the engine (see page 371 ). If To turn off the indicator, restart
the engine does not start right and turn off the engine at least
away, do not hold the ignition key three times at intervals of
in START (III) for more than 10 approximately 30 seconds.
seconds at a time. This will
damage the fuel pump and the If this procedure is performed
engine starter. during normal driving, the indicator
will be turned off.
5. If the engine fails to start, return
to step 3. If you are not sure how to bleed the
air, contact your dealer.
6. After the engine restarts, press
the accelerator pedal slightly and If the engine fails to restart after
hold it at approximately 1,500 rpm priming the fuel system, there is a
for about 30 seconds. This will problem in the fuel system. You
complete the air bleeding in the should have the car inspected by
fuel system. your dealer.
7. The engine runs normally, but the

malfunction indicator lamp or the
glow plugs indicator remains lit.
Maintenance 493

05/10/03 20:30:24 32SEA630_497
494

05/10/03 20:30:28 32SEA630_498
Appearance Care
Regular cleaning and polishing of

your car helps to keep it ‘‘new’’
looking. This section gives you
information on how to clean your car
and preserve its appearance: the
paint, brightwork, wheels and
interior. Also included are several
things you can do to help prevent
corrosion.
Exterior Care.................................. 496

Washing ...................................... 496
Waxing ........................................ 497
Aluminum Wheels ..................... 497
Paint Touch-up ........................... 498
Interior Care ................................... 499
Carpeting .................................... 499
Floor Mats .................................. 499
Fabric .......................................... 500
Vinyl ............................................ 500
Leather ........................................ 500
Windows ..................................... 500
Seat Belts .................................... 501
Air Fresheners ........................... 501
Corrosion Protection ..................... 502
Appearance Care 495

05/10/03 20:30:36 32SEA630_499
Exterior Care
Washing Rinse the car thoroughly with cool When you have washed and rinsed
Frequent washing helps preserve water to remove loose dirt. the whole exterior, dry it with a
your car’s appearance. Dirt and grit chamois or soft towel. Letting it
can scratch the paint, while tree sap Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix air-dry will cause dulling and water
and bird droppings can permanently in a product made especially for spots.
ruin the finish. car-washing.
As you dry the car, inspect it for
Wash your car in a shady area, not in Wash the car using the water and chips and scratches that could allow
direct sunlight. If the car is parked in detergent solution and a soft- corrosion to start. Repair them with
the sun, move it into the shade and bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth. touch-up paint (see page 498 ).
let the exterior cool down before you Start at the top and work your way
start. down. Rinse frequently.
Only use the solvents and cleaners Check the body for road tar, tree
recommended in this Owner’s sap, etc. Remove these stains with
Manual. tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
off immediately so it does not
harm the finish. Remember to re-
wax these areas, even if the rest of
Chemical solvents and strong the car does not need waxing.
cleaners can damage the paint, metal,
and plastic on your car.
496 Appearance Care

05/10/03 20:30:44 32SEA630_500
Exterior Care
Waxing Polishes − Polishes and cleaner/ Aluminium Wheels

Always wash and dry the whole car waxes can restore the shine to paint (For some types)
before waxing it. You should wax that has oxidized and lost some of its Clean your car’s aluminium alloy
your car, including the metal trim, shine. They normally contain mild wheels as you do the rest of the
wherever water tends to sit on the abrasives and solvents that remove exterior. Wash them with the same
surface in large patches. It should the top layer of the finish. You solution, and rinse them thoroughly.
form into beads or droplets after should use a polish on your car if the
waxing. finish does not have its original shine The wheels have a protective clear-
You should use a quality liquid or after using a wax. coat that keeps the aluminium from
paste wax. Apply it according to the corroding and tarnishing. Using
instructions on the container. In Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with harsh chemicals, including some
general, there are two types of removers also takes off the wax. commercial wheel cleaners or stiff
products: Remember to re-wax those areas, brushes, can damage this clear-coat.
even if the rest of the car does not Only use a mild detergent and soft
Waxes − A wax coats the finish and need waxing. brush or sponge to clean the wheels.
protects it from damage by exposure
to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
should use a wax on your car when it
is new.
Appearance Care 497

05/10/03 20:30:49 32SEA630_501
Exterior Care
Paint Touch-up
Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match your car’s colour. The colour
code is printed on a sticker on the
driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to
your dealer so you are sure to get
the correct colour.
Inspect your car frequently for chips

or scratches in the paint. Repair
them right away to prevent corrosion
of the metal underneath. Use the
touch-up paint only on small chips
and scratches. More extensive paint
damage should be repaired by a
professional.
498 Appearance Care

05/10/03 20:30:56 32SEA630_502
Interior Care
Carpeting Floor Mats If you remove the driver’s floor mat,

Vacuum the carpeting frequently to If equipped make sure to re-anchor it when you
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make put it back in your car.
the carpet wear out faster.
Periodically shampoo the carpet to If you replace it, use a genuine
keep it looking new. Use one of the Honda floor mat that is designed to
foam-type carpet cleaners on the be used with the floor mat anchors in
market. Follow the instructions that your car.
come with the cleaner, applying it
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep If you use a non-Honda floor mat in
the carpeting as dry as possible by the driver’s footwell, make sure it
not adding water to the foam. fits properly and that it can be used
with the floor mat anchor.
Do not put additional floor mats on

The genuine Honda driver’s floor top of the anchored mat, otherwise
mat was designed to hook over the the additional mats may slide
floor mat anchors. This keeps the forward and interfere with the pedals.
floor mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.
Appearance Care 499

05/10/03 20:31:05 32SEA630_503
Interior Care
Fabric Leather Windows

Vacuum dirt and dust out of the (For some types) Clean the windows, inside and out,
material frequently. For general Vacuum dirt and dust from the with a commercially-available glass
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap leather frequently. Pay particular cleaner. You can also use a mixture
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry. attention to the pleats and seams. of one part white vinegar to 10 parts
To clean off stubborn spots, use a Clean the leather with a soft cloth water. This will remove the haze that
commercially-available fabric cleaner. dampened with clear water, then builds up on the inside of the
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
first, to make sure it does not bleach further cleaning is needed, use a towels to clean all glass and clear
or stain the fabric. Follow the soap specifically for leather, such as plastic surfaces.
instructions that come with the saddle soap. Apply this soap with a
cleaner. damp, soft cloth. Wipe down and
buff as described above.
Vinyl The rear window demister and
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum If you use a leather cleaner, wipe it antenna wires are bonded to the
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft off quickly with a soft and dry cloth. inside of the glass. Wiping vigorously
cloth dampened in a solution of mild Never leave a cloth soaked with up-and-down can dislodge and break
soap and water. Use the same leather cleaner on any part of the these wires. When cleaning the rear
solution with a soft-bristle brush on interior. If left for a long time, some window, use gentle pressure and
more difficult spots. You can also use leather cleaners may cause wipe side-to-side.
commercially-available spray or discolouration or cracking of interior
foam-type vinyl cleaners. trim or fabric.
500 Appearance Care

05/10/03 20:31:12 32SEA630_504
Interior Care
Seat Belts Air Fresheners

If your seat belts get dirty, you can LOOP If you want to use an air freshener/
use a soft brush with a mixture of deodorizer in the interior of your car,
mild soap and warm water to clean it is best to use a solid type. Some
them. Do not use bleach, dye, or liquid air fresheners contain chemi-
cleaning solvents. They can weaken cals that may cause parts of the
the belt material. Let the belts air- interior trim and fabric to crack or
dry before you use the car. discolour.
If you use a liquid air freshener,

make sure you fasten it securely so it
does not spill as you drive.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat

belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Appearance Care 501

05/10/03 20:31:20 32SEA630_505
Corrosion Protection
Two factors normally contribute to Many corrosion-preventive measures Use a high-pressure spray to clean
causing corrosion in your car: are built into your car. You can help the underside of your car. This is
keep your car from corroding by especially important in areas that
1. Moisture trapped in body cavities. performing some simple periodic use road salt in winter. It is also a
Dirt and road salt that collects in maintenance: good idea in humid climates and
hollows on the underside of the areas subject to salt air. Be careful
car stays damp, promoting Repair chips and scratches in the of the ABS wheel sensors and
corrosion in that area. paint as soon as you discover them. wiring at each wheel.
2. Removal of paint and protective Inspect and clean out the drain Have the corrosion-preventive
coatings from the exterior and holes in the bottom of the doors coatings on the underside of your
underside of the car. and body. car inspected and repaired
periodically.
Check the floor coverings for
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
502 Appearance Care

05/10/03 20:31:24 32SEA630_506
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more- Compact Spare Tyre...................... 504 Fuses ............................................... 529
common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tyre .................... 505 Checking and Replacing ........... 530
experience with their vehicles. It If Your Engine Won’t Start ........... 512 Fuse Locations
gives you information about how to Nothing Happens or the Starter (Petrol models) .......................... 533
safely evaluate the problem and what Motor Operates Very Fuse Locations
to do to correct it. If the problem has Slowly ...................................... 512 (Diesel models).......................... 538
stranded you on the side of the road, The Starter Operates Emergency Towing ....................... 541
you may be able to get going again. Normally ................................. 513
If not, you will also find instructions Jump Starting ................................. 514
on getting your car towed. If Your Engine Overheats
(Petrol models) .......................... 517
If Your Engine Overheats
(Diesel models).......................... 519
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 521
Charging System Indicator........... 522
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Petrol models) .......................... 523
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Diesel models).......................... 524
Glow Plugs Indicator
(Diesel models).......................... 525
Brake System Indicator ................ 526
Closing the Sunroof ....................... 528
Taking Care of the Unexpected 503

05/10/03 20:31:34 32SEA630_507
Compact Spare Tyre (For some types)
Your car has a compact spare tyre Do not mount snow chains on the INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
that takes up less space. Use this compact spare.
spare tyre as a temporary replace-
ment only. Get your regular tyre The wheel of the compact spare
repaired or replaced and put it back tyre is designed especially to fit
on your car as soon as you can. your vehicle. Do not use your
spare tyre on another vehicle
Check the inflation pressure of the unless it is the same make and
compact spare tyre every time you model.
check the other tyres. It should be Do not use more than one
inflated to: compact spare tyre at the same
420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm , 60 psi) time. TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow these precautions whenever The compact spare tyre is smaller The compact spare tyre has a
you are using the compact spare than the regular tyre. Your car’s shorter tread life than a regular tyre.
tyre: ground clearance reduces when Replace it when you can see the
the compact spare tyre is installed. tread wear indicator bars. The
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) Driving over road debris or bumps replacement should be the same size
under any circumstances. could possibly damage the and design tyre, mounted on the
underside of your car. same wheel. The compact spare tyre
This tyre gives a harsher ride and is not designed to be mounted on a
less traction on some road sur- On cars with VSA system regular wheel, and the compact
faces than the regular tyre. Use Turn off the VSA system (see wheel is not designed for mounting a
greater caution while driving on page 392 ). regular tyre.
this tyre. Driving with the compact spare
tyre may activate the VSA system.
504 Taking Care of the Unexpected

05/10/03 20:31:42 32SEA630_508
Changing a Flat Tyre
On cars with spare tyre 1. Park the car on firm, level and
If you have a flat tyre while driving, non-slippery ground away from
stop in a safe place to change it. The car can easily roll off the traffic. Put the transmission in
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder jack, seriously injuring Park (automatic) or Reverse
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive anyone underneath. (manual). Apply the parking brake.
slowly along the shoulder until you
get to an exit or an area to stop that Follow the directions for If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
is far away from the traffic lanes. changing a tyre exactly, and the trailer.
never get under the car when
it is supported only by the 2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
jack. and turn the ignition switch to
Use the jack that came with your car. LOCK (0). Have all the
If you try to raise another car with passengers get out of the car while
this jack or use another jack to raise you change the tyre.
your car, the car or jack can be
damaged.
If the turning direction of the flat

tyre is different from the direction
indicated on the spare tyre, you
should repair the flat tyre as soon as
possible and reinstall it on the
original position.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:31:50 32SEA630_509
Model with a compact spare tyre Model with a normal spare tyre 5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
BOOT FLOOR JACK the spare tyre out of the boot.
SPARE TYRE BOOT FLOOR
6. Place blocks in front and back of
the wheel diagonally opposite the
tyre you are changing.
JACK
SPARE TYRE TOOL KIT CASE TOOL
3. Open the boot. 4. Take the tool kit case out of the
boot.
Raise the boot floor by lifting up
on the back edge. On cars with normal spare tyre,
the tool kit is stored in the tool kit
cases on both sides of the boot
floor. Take the tool kit out of the
cases.

05/10/03 20:31:56 32SEA630_510
JACK LID
JACK
7. Take the jack out of the tool kit On cars with normal spare tyre
case. Remove the lid on the right side of
the boot floor, then take the jack out.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:32:03 32SEA630_511
WHEEL WRENCH JACKING POINT WHEEL WRENCH EXTENSION
8. Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2 9. Locate the jacking point nearest 10. Use the extension and wheel
turn with the wheel wrench. the tyre you need to change. Place wrench as shown to raise the car
the jack under the jacking point. until the flat tyre is off the ground.
Turn the end bracket clockwise
until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point. Make sure the
jacking point tab is resting in the
jack notch.

05/10/03 20:32:10 32SEA630_512
WHEEL NUTS
HUB
WHEEL
NUTS WHEEL COVER
11. Remove the wheel nuts and wheel 12. Remove the flat tyre. Temporarily 13. Before mounting the spare tyre,
cover (on some types). Handle the place the flat tyre on the ground wipe any dirt off the mounting
wheel nuts carefully; they may be with the outside surface of the surface of the wheel and hub with
hot from driving. The wheel cover wheel facing up. You could scratch a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
cannot be removed without first the wheel if you put it face down. carefully, it may be hot from
removing the wheel nuts. Do not driving.
attempt to forcibly pry the wheel
cover off with a screwdriver or
other tool.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:32:17 32SEA630_513
14. Put on the spare tyre. Put the 15. Lower the car to the ground and 16. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
wheel nuts back on finger-tight, remove the jack. the same crisscross pattern. Have
then tighten them in a crisscross the wheel nut torque checked at
pattern with the wheel wrench the nearest automotive service
until the wheel is firmly against facility.
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully. Tighten the wheel nuts to:
108 N·m (11 kgf·m , 80 lbf·ft)

05/10/03 20:32:28 32SEA630_514
WING BOLT 21. Store the tools and jack in the tool
kit case.
SPACER
CONE 22. Store the tool kit case.
On cars with normal spare tyre,

put the jack in the tool kit case on
For For the right side in the boot.
spare normal
tyre tyre
CENTRE CAP Loose items can fly around

the interior in a crash and
17. On some types, remove the centre 18. Place the flat tyre face down in the could seriously injure the
cap before storing the flat tyre in spare tyre well. occupants.
the boot well.
19. If your car has a compact spare Store the wheel, jack, and
tyre, remove the spacer cone from tools securely before driving.
the wing bolt, turn it over, and put
it back on the bolt.
23. Store the wheel cover or centre
20. Secure the flat tyre by screwing cap in the boot. Make sure it does
the wing bolt back into its hole. not get scratched or damaged.
24. Lower the boot floor, then close

the boot lid.

05/10/03 20:32:37 32SEA630_515
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why your engine won’t Nothing Happens or the Starter Turn the ignition switch to the
start falls into two areas, depending Motor Operates Very Slowly START (III) position. If the
on what you hear when you turn the When you turn the ignition switch to headlights do not dim, check the
key to the START (III) position: the START (III) position, you do not condition of the fuses. If the fuses
hear the normal noise of the engine are OK, there is probably
You hear nothing, or almost trying to start. You may hear a something wrong with the
nothing. The engine’s starter clicking sound or series of clicks, or electrical circuit for the ignition
motor does not operate at all, or nothing at all. switch or starter motor. You will
operates very slowly. Check these things: need a qualified technician to
determine the problem (see
You can hear the starter motor If your car is equipped with an Emergency Towing on page 541 ).
operating normally, or the starter automatic transmission, check the
motor sounds like it is spinning position of the shift lever. It must If the headlights dim noticeably or
faster than normal, but the engine be in Park or Neutral. go out when you try to start the
does not start up and run. engine, either the battery is dis-
Turn the ignition switch to the ON charged or the connections are
(II) position. Turn on the corroded. Check the condition of the
headlights and check their battery and terminal connections
Do not keep turning the ignition brightness. If the headlights are (see page 457 ). You can then try
switch to START (III) for more than very dim or don’t light at all, the jump starting the car from a booster
15 seconds. battery is discharged. See Jump battery (see page 514 ).
Starting on page 514 .

05/10/03 20:32:47 32SEA630_516
If Your Engine Won’t Start
The Starter Operates Normally working, so you were not Ask a dealer to drain the fuel filter
In this case, the starter motor’s reminded to fill the tank. of water.
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the There may be an electrical On all models
ignition switch to the START (III) problem, such as no power to the If you find nothing wrong, you will
position, but the engine does not run. fuel pump. Check all the fuses need a qualified technician to find
(see page 529 ). the problem. See Emergency
Your car has the Immobilizer Towing on page 541 .
System. You should use a On cars with a fuel cutoff system,
properly-coded ignition key to the fuel cutoff switch may be
start the engine (see page 131 ). A activated. If the switch is activated,
key that is not properly coded will it must be reset before starting the
cause the immobilizer system engine (see page 359 ).
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly. On Diesel models only
If your car runs out of fuel,
Are you using the proper starting priming the fuel system is
procedure? Refer to Starting the required to restart the engine (see
Engine on page 369 on petrol page 492 ).
models and page 371 on diesel
models. After you have stored your vehicle
for an extended period, air may
Do you have fuel? Turn the have entered the fuel system (see
ignition switch to ON (II) for a Priming the Fuel System on
minute and watch the fuel gauge. page 492 ).
The low fuel indicator may not be

05/10/03 20:32:55 32SEA630_517
Jump Starting
If your car’s battery has run down,

you may be able to start the engine
by using a booster battery. Although
this seems like a simple procedure,
you should take several precautions.
A battery can explode if you

do not follow the correct
BOOSTER
procedure, seriously injuring BATTERY
anyone nearby. Petrol models Diesel models BOOSTER BATTERY
Keep all sparks, open flames, The numbers in the illustration show
and smoking materials away you the order to connect the jumper
from the battery. cables. Make sure to disconnect the
cables in the reverse order.
You cannot start a car with

automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.

05/10/03 20:33:04 32SEA630_518
Jump Starting
To jump start your car, follow these

directions closely:
1. Open the bonnet and check the

physical condition of the battery
(see page 456 ). In very cold
weather, check the condition of
the electrolyte. If it seems slushy
or like ice, do not try jump starting
until it thaws.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the 3. Connect one jumper cable to the
electrolyte inside can freeze. positive (＋) terminal on your
Attempting to jump start with a Honda’s battery. Connect the
frozen battery can cause it to rupture. other end to the positive (＋)
terminal on the booster battery.
2. Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:33:11 32SEA630_519
Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start your car. If the starter motor

still operates slowly, check the
jumper cable connections to make
sure they have good metal-to-
metal contact.
7. Once your car is running, discon-

Petrol models Diesel models nect the negative cable from your
car, then from the booster battery.
4. Connect the second jumper cable Disconnect the positive cable from
to the negative (−) terminal on your car, then the booster battery.
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap Keep the ends of the jumper
as shown. Do not connect this cables away from each other and
jumper cable to any other part of any metal on the car until all are
the engine. disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.

05/10/03 20:33:20 32SEA630_520
If Your Engine Overheats (Petrol models)
The pointer of your car’s tempera- 3. If you do not see steam or spray,
ture gauge should stay in the mid- leave the engine running and
range under most conditions. It may Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
go higher if you are driving up a long overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading
steep hill on a very hot day. If it seriously scald you. (climbing a long, steep hill on a
climbs to the red mark, you should hot day with the A/C running, for
determine the reason. Do not open the bonnet if example), the engine should start
steam is coming out. to cool down almost immediately.
If it does, wait until the tempera-
ture gauge comes down to the mid-
Driving with the temperature gauge 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. point, then continue driving.
pointer at the red mark can cause Put the transmission in Neutral or
serious damage to your engine. Park and set the parking brake. 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
Turn off the heating and cooling/ the red mark, turn off the engine.
climate control system and all
Your car can overheat for several other accessories. Turn on the 5. Wait until you see no more signs
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a hazard warning indicators. of steam or spray, then open the
mechanical problem. The only bonnet.
indication may be the temperature 2. If you see steam and/or spray
gauge climbing to or above the red coming from under the bonnet,
mark. Or you may see steam or turn off the engine.
spray coming from under the bonnet.
In either case, you should take
immediate action.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:33:28 32SEA630_521
If Your Engine Overheats (Petrol models)
6. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, proper coolant mixture available,
such as a split radiator hose. you can add plain water.
Everything is still extremely hot, Removing the radiator cap Remember to have the cooling
so use caution. If you find a leak, it while the engine is hot can system drained and refilled with
must be repaired before you cause the coolant to spray the proper mixture as soon as you
continue driving (see Emergency out, seriously scalding you. can.
Towing on page 541 ).
Always let the engine and 11. Put the radiator cap back on
7. If you don’t find an obvious leak, radiator cool down before tightly. Run the engine and watch
check the coolant level in the removing the radiator cap. the temperature gauge. If it goes
radiator reserve tank (see page back to the red mark, the engine
358 ). If the level is below the needs repair (see Emergency
MIN mark, add coolant to halfway 9. Using gloves or a large heavy Towing on page 541 ).
between the MIN and MAX marks. cloth, turn the radiator cap anti-
clockwise, without pushing down, 12. If the temperature stays normal,
8. If there was no coolant in the to the first stop. This releases any check the coolant level in the
reserve tank, you may also have to remaining pressure in the cooling radiator reserve tank. If it has
add coolant to the radiator. Let the system. After the pressure gone down, add coolant to the
engine cool down until the pointer releases, push down on the cap MAX mark. Put the cap back on
reaches the middle of the tempera- and turn it until it comes off. tightly.
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator. 10. Start the engine and set the
climate control to AUTO at
‘‘ ’’. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the

05/10/03 20:33:37 32SEA630_522
If Your Engine Overheats (Diesel models)
The pointer of your car’s tempera- 3. If you do not see steam or spray,
ture gauge should stay in the mid- leave the engine running and
range under most conditions. It may Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
go higher if you are driving up a long overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading
steep hill on a very hot day. If it seriously scald you. (climbing a long, steep hill on a
climbs to the red mark, you should hot day with the A/C running, for
determine the reason. Do not open the bonnet if example), the engine should start
steam is coming out. to cool down almost immediately.
If it does, wait until the tempera-
ture gauge comes down to the mid-
Driving with the temperature gauge 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. point, then continue driving.
pointer at the red mark can cause Put the transmission in Neutral
serious damage to your engine. and set the parking brake. Turn 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
off the climate control system and the red mark, turn off the engine.
all other accessories. Turn on the
Your car can overheat for several hazard warning indicators. 5. Wait until you see no more signs
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a of steam or spray, then open the
mechanical problem. The only 2. If you see steam and/or spray bonnet.
indication may be the temperature coming from under the bonnet,
gauge climbing to or above the red turn off the engine.
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the bonnet.
In either case, you should take
immediate action.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:33:45 32SEA630_523
If Your Engine Overheats (Diesel models)
6. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, MAX line on the expansion tank. If
such as a split radiator hose. you do not have the proper coolant
Everything is still extremely hot, Removing the expansion mixture available, you can add
so use caution. If you find a leak, it tank cap while the engine is plain water. Remember to have
must be repaired before you hot can cause the coolant to the cooling system drained and
continue driving (see Emergency spray out, seriously scalding refilled with the proper mixture as
Towing on page 541 ). you. soon as you can.
7. If you don’t find an obvious leak, Always let the engine and 11. Put the expansion tank cap back
check the coolant level in the radiator cool down before on tightly. Run the engine and
expansion tank (see page 358 ). removing the expansion tank watch the temperature gauge. If it
cap. goes back to the red mark, the
8. If the expansion tank needs engine needs repair (see
coolant, you will have to remove Emergency Towing on page 541 ).
the cap. Before doing that, turn 9. Use a cloth or glove to protect
the ignition switch to ON (II) and your hand while removing the 12. If the temperature stays normal,
check the temperature gauge. expansion tank cap. Loosen the check the coolant level in the
Remove the expansion tank cap cap by turning it 1/8 turn anticlock- expansion tank. If it has gone
only if the temperature gauge wise. Stop and wait for any pres- down, add coolant up to the MAX
pointer has come down to normal sure in the expansion tank to line. Put the expansion tank cap
or below the red mark and you do escape. Then remove the cap by back on tightly.
not hear any bubbling or gurgling turning it anticlockwise.
noises coming from the cooling
system. 10. Start the engine and set the
climate control to AUTO at
‘‘ ’’. Add coolant up to the

05/10/03 20:33:53 32SEA630_524
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR the symbol with an ‘‘OIL PRESSURE 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
LOW’’ message on the multi- level back to the full mark on the
information display. dipstick (see page 418 on petrol
models and page 423 on diesel
models).
Running the engine with low oil 4. Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure can cause serious mechani- pressure indicator. If the light
cal damage almost immediately. does not go out within ten seconds,
Turn off the engine as soon as you turn off the engine. There is a
can safely get the car stopped. mechanical problem that needs to
be repaired before you can
1. Safely pull off the road and shut continue driving (see Emergency
This indicator comes on when the off the engine. Turn on the hazard Towing on page 541 ).
ignition switch is in ON (II), and go warning indicators.
out after the engine starts. It should
never come on when the engine is 2. Let the car sit for a minute. Open
running. If it starts flashing, it the bonnet and check the oil level
indicates that the oil pressure (see page 355 ). Although oil level
dropped very low for a moment, then and oil pressure are not directly
recovered. If the indicator stays on connected, an engine that is very
with the engine running, it shows low on oil can lose pressure during
that the engine has lost oil pressure cornering and other driving
and serious engine damage is manoeuvres.
possible. When the indicator is on,
you will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or

05/10/03 20:33:58 32SEA630_525
Charging System Indicator
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR Immediately turn off all electrical By eliminating as much of the
accessories: radio, heater, A/C, electrical load as possible, you can
climate control, rear demister, cruise drive several kilometres (miles)
control, etc. Try not to use other before the battery is too discharged
electrically-operated controls such as to keep the engine running. Drive to
the power windows. Keep the engine a service station or garage where
running and take extra care not to you can get technical assistance.
stall it. Starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
When you turn the ignition switch to

the ON(II) position, this indicator
comes on, and goes off after the
engine starts. If it comes on brightly
when the engine is running, it
indicates that the charging system
has stopped charging the battery.
Also, you will see the symbol
‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with a
‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’message on the
multi-information display.

05/10/03 20:34:05 32SEA630_526
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Petrol models)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP out excessive emissions. Continued

operation may cause serious damage.
If you keep driving with the
If this indicator comes on, safely pull malfunction indicator lamp on, you
off the road and turn off the engine. can damage your car’s emissions
Restart the engine and watch the controls and engine. Those repairs
indicator. If it stays on, have your car may not be covered by your car’s
checked by the dealer as soon as warranties.
possible. Drive moderately until the
dealer has inspected the problem. This indicator may also come on
Avoid full-throttle acceleration and along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
driving at high speed.
This indicator comes on for a few You should also have the dealer
seconds when you turn the ignition inspect your car if the indicator
switch to ON (II). If it comes on at comes on frequently, even though it
any other time, or if you see the goes off when you follow the above
symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with procedure.
a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display, it
indicates one of the engine’s
emissions control systems may have
a problem. Even though you may
feel no difference in your car’s
performance, it can reduce your fuel
economy and cause your car to put

05/10/03 20:34:13 32SEA630_527
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Diesel models)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP out excessive emissions. Continued

If you keep driving with the
If this indicator comes on, safely pull malfunction indicator lamp on, you
off the road and turn off the engine. can damage your car’s emissions
Restart and turn off the engine at controls and engine. Those repairs
least three times at intervals of may not be covered by your car’s
approximately 30 seconds, then warranties.
watch the indicator. If it stays on,
have your car checked by your The indicator may come on along
dealer as soon as possible. Drive with the glow plugs indicator if the
moderately until the dealer has emissions control systems have
inspected the problem. Avoid full- several problems.
This indicator comes on for a few throttle acceleration and driving at
seconds when you turn the ignition high speed. This indicator will also come on and
switch to ON (II). If it comes on at you cannot restart the engine after
any other time, or if you see the You should also have the dealer your car has run out of fuel. If this
symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with inspect your car if the indicator occurs, refuel the fuel tank, then
a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on comes on frequently, even though it follow the procedure for Priming
the multi-information display, it goes off when you follow the above the Fuel System on page 492 before
indicates one of the engine’s procedure. attempting to restart the engine.
emissions control systems may have
a problem. Even though you may
feel no difference in your car’s
performance, it can reduce your fuel
economy and cause your car to put

05/10/03 20:34:20 32SEA630_528
Glow Plugs Indicator (Diesel models)
If this indicator blinks, safely pull off warranties.

the road and turn off the engine.
Restart and turn off the engine at The indicator may blink along with
least three times at intervals of the malfunction indicator lamp if the
approximately 30 seconds, then emissions control systems have
watch the indicator. If it starts to several problems.
blink again, have your car checked
by your dealer as soon as possible. This indicator will also blink and you
Drive moderately until the dealer has cannot restart the engine after your
inspected the problem. Avoid full- car has run out of fuel. If this occurs,
throttle acceleration and driving at refuel the fuel tank, then follow the
GLOW PLUGS INDICATOR high speed. procedure for Priming the Fuel
System on page 492 before
This indicator comes on for a few You should also have the dealer attempting to restart the engine.
seconds (several seconds in cold inspect your car if the indicator
weather or at high altitudes) when comes on frequently, even though it This indicator may also blink if you
you turn the ignition switch to ON goes off when you follow the above do not use the proper fuel for the
(II). If it blinks while the engine is procedure. climate or regional condition. This
running, there is a problem with the may cause the engine power to
engine control system. Continued reduce (see page 352 ).
If you keep driving with the glow
plugs indicator blinking, you can
damage your car’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs
may not be covered by your car’s

05/10/21 11:54:17 32SEA630_529
Brake System Indicator
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR If it comes on at any other time, it However, if the brake pedal does not
indicates a problem with the car’s feel normal, you should take
brake system. When the indicator is immediate action. Because of the
on, you will see the symbol brake system’s dual-circuit design, a
‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with a problem in one part of the system
‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ message, or will still give you braking at two
the symbol ‘‘ ’’ (on some wheels. You will feel the brake pedal
types) or the symbol with a ‘‘CHECK go down much farther before the car
SYSTEM’’ message (on some types) begins to slow down, and you will
on the multi-information display. In have to press harder on the pedal.
most cases, the problem is a low The distance needed to stop will be
fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. much longer.
Press lightly on the brake pedal to
The Brake System Indicator is a see if it feels normal. If it does,
reminder to check the parking brake. check the brake fluid level the next
It normally comes on when you turn time you stop at a service station
the ignition switch to the ON (II) (see page 447 ). If the fluid level is
position. If you do not fully release low, take the car to your dealer and
the parking brake, the indicator have the brake system inspected for
comes on and stays on, and you will leaks or worn brake pads.
see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the
symbol with a ‘‘RELEASE PARKING
BRAKE’’ message on the multi-

05/10/21 11:54:23 32SEA630_530
Brake System Indicator
Slow down by shifting to a lower If you must drive the car a short
gear, and pull to the side of the road distance in this condition, drive
when it is safe. Because of the slowly and cautiously.
longer distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the car. You Have the car inspected by a dealer if
should have it towed, and repaired as the brake system indicator is on. If
soon as possible (see Emergency the ABS indicator and/or the VSA
Towing on page 541 ). system indicator also comes on, you
will see the symbol ‘‘ ’’ or the
message, and/or the symbol
‘‘ ’’ (on some types) or the
message (on some types) on the
multi-information display.

05/10/03 20:34:41 32SEA630_531
Closing the Sunroof (For some types)
If the electric motor will not close NOTCH SOCKET

the sunroof, do the following:
TAB
1. Check the fuse for the sunroof ROUND
motor (see page 529 ). If the fuse PLUG
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
2. Try closing the sunroof. If the new

fuse blows immediately or the
sunroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the sunroof
manually.
4. To remove the round plug in the 5. Insert the sunroof wrench into the
3. Get the sunroof wrench out of the centre of the headliner, turn the socket behind this plug. Turn the
tool kit case in the boot. plug by using a screwdriver or wrench until the sunroof is fully
coin, then pry it out. Make sure to closed.
align the tabs on the round plug to
the notches on the ceiling as 6. Remove the wrench. Reinstall the
shown in the illustration. round plug.

05/10/03 20:34:48 32SEA630_532
Fuses
All the electrical circuits in your car INTERIOR NOTCH UNDER-BONNET TAB
have fuses to protect them from a
short circuit or overload. These MINI
fuses are located in four fuse boxes. FUSE
BOXES
TAB PRIMARY FUSE

Petrol model shown BOX
The interior fuse box is on the The under-bonnet fuse boxes are
driver’s lower outside. To remove located near the back of the engine
the fuse box lid, put your finger in compartment on the left side. To
the notch on the lid, and pull it open it, push the tabs as shown.
upward slightly, then pull it toward
you and take it out of its hinges. The primary and mini fuse boxes are
located near the battery in the
engine compartment.

05/10/03 20:34:55 32SEA630_533
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses 1. Turn the ignition switch to the FUSE BLOWN
If something electrical in your car LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
stops working, the first thing you headlights and all other
should check for is a blown fuse. accessories are off.
Determine from the chart on page
533 to 540 , or the diagram on the 2. Remove the cover from the fuse
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses box.
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check the component’s
operation.
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-bonnet fuse box by
looking through the side window
at the wire inside. Removing these
fuses requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.

05/10/03 20:35:01 32SEA630_534
Fuses
FUSE PULLER BLOWN
BLOWN
4. Check the smaller fuses in the 5. Look for a burned wire inside the
under-bonnet fuse box and all the fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
fuses in the interior fuse box by one of the spare fuses of the same
pulling out each fuse with the fuse rating or lower.
puller provided in the under-
bonnet fuse box.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:35:07 32SEA630_535
Fuses
If you cannot drive the car without If the driver’s power window fuse is
fixing the problem, and you do not removed, the AUTO feature of the
have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the Replacing a fuse with one that has a driver’s window will be disabled. You
same rating or a lower rating from higher rating greatly increases the should reset the AUTO feature (see
one of the other circuits. Make sure chances of damaging the electrical page 157 ).
you can do without that circuit system. If you do not have a replace-
temporarily (such as the cigarette ment fuse with the proper rating for When the audio system is disabled,
lighter or radio). the circuit, install one with a lower the clock setting in the audio system
rating. will be cancelled. You will need to
If you replace the blown fuse with a reset the clock according to the
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it 6. If the replacement fuse of the instructions of the audio system.
might blow out again. This does not same rating blows in a short time,
indicate anything wrong. Replace the there is probably a serious
fuse with one of the correct rating as electrical problem in your car.
soon as you can. Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your car checked
by a qualified technician.

05/10/03 20:35:13 32SEA630_536
Fuse Locations (Petrol models)
On cars with VSA Primary Fuse Box

UNDER-BONNET FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. Circuits Protected
PRIMARY FUSE BOX
1 Left Headlight Low Beam
2 (Rear Defroster Coil)
3 Left Headlight High Beam
4 Small Light
5 Right Headlight High Beam
6 Right Headlight Low Beam
7 Back Up
8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM)
9 Condenser fan
10 Front Fog Lights
11 Cooling Fan
MINI FUSE BOX 1 MINI FUSE BOX 2 MINI FUSE BOX 3 12 Headlight Washer
(For some types) (For some types) 13 Horn, Stop
14 Rear Defroster
15 Back Up, ACC
16 Hazard
17 VSA Motor
The locations of fuses are shown with symbols on the fuse box lid. Refer to
the table for the fuses on your car. CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:35:21 32SEA630_537
Mini Fuse Box 1

18 VSA
19 Option 1 Heated Mirror
20 Option
21 Heater Motor Mini Fuse Box 2
22 Battery
Electric Power Steering (EPS)＊ No. Circuits Protected
23 Power Window Main
Ignition Main 1 Heated Mirror
2 Front Passenger’s Power Seat
＊ : For some types Reclining＊
＊ : For some types
Mini Fuse Box 3
1 Accessory Power Socket

05/10/03 20:35:28 32SEA630_538
On cars without VSA Primary Fuse Box

PRIMARY FUSE BOX
4 Small Light
7 Back Up
8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM)
9 Condenser fan
10 Front Fog Lights
11 Cooling Fan
MINI FUSE BOX 1 MINI FUSE BOX 2 MINI FUSE BOX 3 12 Headlight Washer
(For some types) (For some types) 13 Horn, Stop
14 Rear Defroster
15 Back Up, ACC
16 Hazard
17 ABS Motor
The locations of fuses are shown with symbols on the fuse box lid. Refer
to the table for the fuses on your car. CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:35:35 32SEA630_539
Mini Fuse Box 1

18 ABS
19 Option 1 Heated Mirror
20 Option
21 Heater Motor Mini Fuse Box 2
22 Battery
23 Power Window Main No. Circuits Protected
Ignition Main
1 Heated Mirror
＊ : For some types 2 Front Passenger’s Power Seat
Reclining＊
Mini Fuse Box 3

05/10/03 20:35:43 32SEA630_540
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

13 Front Passenger’s Power Seat

Reclining＊
14 Driver’s Power Seat Sliding＊
15 Heated Seat
16 Driver’s Power Seat Reclining＊
17 Front Passenger’s Power Seat Sliding＊
18 IG ACG
19 IG Fuel Pump
20 IG Washer
21 IG Meter
22 IG SRS
The locations of fuses are shown with symbols on the fuse label. Refer to the 23 IGP (PGM-FI ECU)
following table for the fuses on your car. 24 Rear Left Power Window
25 Rear Right Power Window
26 Passenger’s Power Window
No. Circuits Protected No. Circuits Protected 27 Driver’s Power Window
28 Sunroof
1 DBW 7 Back-Up Lights 29 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Headlight Adjuster
2 Ignition Coil 8 Door Lock 30 IG HAC
3 Daytime Running Lights 9 Cigarette Lighter 31 Not Used
4 Laf Heater 10 OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) 32 ACC
5 Audio 11 IG Wiper 33 Not Used
6 Interior Light 12 Rear Fog Light＊＊ : For some types

05/10/03 20:35:49 32SEA630_541
Fuse Locations (Diesel models)
On cars without VSA Primary Fuse Box

PRIMARY FUSE BOX
4 Small Light
7 Back Up
8 FI ECU (ECM)
9 Condenser fan
10 IGP2
11 PTC
MINI FUSE BOX 1 MINI FUSE BOX 2 12 Option
13 Horn, Stop
14 Rear Defroster
15 Back Up, ACC
16 Hazard
17 VSA Motor
The locations of fuses are shown with symbols on the fuse box lid. Refer
to the table for the fuses on your car.

05/10/03 20:35:56 32SEA630_542
Mini Fuse Box 1

18 VSA
19 Radiator Fan 1 Front Fog Light
20 Option 2 Headlight Washer＊
21 Heater Motor 3 PTC Heater
22 Battery 4 Heated Mirror
Glow
23 Power Window Main ＊ : For some types
Ignition Main
Mini Fuse Box 2
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:36:04 32SEA630_543
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

12 Rear Fog Light

13 Not Used
14 Driver’s Power Seat Sliding＊
15 Heated Seat＊
16 Driver’s Power Seat Reclining＊
17 Front Passenger’s Power Seat Sliding＊
18 IG ACG
19 IG Fuel Pump
20 IG Washer
21 IG Meter
22 IG SRS
The locations of fuses are shown with symbols on the fuse label. Refer to the 23 Not Used
following table for the fuses on your car. 24 Rear Left Power Window
25 Rear Right Power Window
26 Passenger’s Power Window
No. Circuits Protected No. Circuits Protected 27 Driver’s Power Window
28 Sunroof
1 Not Used 6 Interior Light 29 Headlight Adjuster
2 Not Used 7 Back Up 30 IG HAC
3 Not Used 8 Door Lock 31 Not Used
4 Front Passenger’s Power Seat 9 Cigarette Lighter 32 ACC
Reclining＊ 10 IG OPDS 33 Not Used
5 Audio 11 IG Wiper ＊ : For some types

05/10/03 20:36:13 32SEA630_544
Emergency Towing
If your car needs to be towed, call a Sling-type Equipment − The tow Automatic Transmission
professional towing service or, if you truck uses metal cables with hooks Release the parking brake.
belong to one, an organization that on the ends. These hooks go around Start the engine.
provides roadside assistance. Never parts of the frame or suspension and Shift to D, then to N.
tow your car behind another vehicle the cables lift that end of the car off Turn off the engine.
with just a rope or chain. It is very the ground. Your car’s suspension
dangerous. and body can be seriously damaged.
This method of towing is
There are three popular types of unacceptable. Improper towing preparation will
professional towing equipment. damage the transmission. Follow the
If your car cannot be transported by above procedure exactly. If you
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator flat-bed, it should be towed by wheel- cannot shift the transmission or start
loads your car on the back of a truck. lift equipment with the front wheels the engine (automatic transmission),
This is the best way to transport off the ground. If due to damage, your car must be transported with
your car. your car must be towed with the the front wheels off the ground.
front wheels on the ground, do the
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow following: With the front wheels on the ground,
truck uses two pivoting arms that go it is best to tow the car no farther
under the tyres (front or rear) and 5-speed Manual Transmission and than 80 km (50 miles), and keep the
lift them off the ground. The other 6-speed Manual Transmission speed below 55 km/h (35 mph).
two tyres remain on the ground. Release the parking brake.
This is an acceptable way to tow Shift the transmission to Neutral. If your car is equipped with a front
your car. spoiler/lower skirt, remove it before
towing so it is not damaged.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:36:18 32SEA630_545
Emergency Towing
If you decide to tow your car with all

four wheels on the ground, make
sure you use a properly-designed and Trying to lift or tow your car by the
attached tow bar. Prepare the car for bumpers will cause serious damage.
towing as described above, and leave The bumpers are not designed to
the ignition switch in Accessory (I) support the car’s weight.
so the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any
electrical accessories are turned off
so they do not run down the battery.
The steering system can be

damaged if the steering wheel is
locked. Leave the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) position, and
make sure the steering wheel turns
freely before you begin towing.

05/10/03 20:36:21 32SEA630_546
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 544

you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 546
your car, and the locations of the Emissions Controls
identification numbers. This section (Petrol models) .......................... 552
also includes the explanation of your Catalytic Converter
car’s catalytic converter. On some (Petrol models) .......................... 554
models, it also includes information Catalytic Converter
you should know about your car’s (Diesel models).......................... 555
emissions control systems.
Technical Information 543

05/10/03 20:36:30 32SEA630_547
Identification Numbers
Your car has several identifying Petrol models AUTOMATIC

numbers located in various places. TRANSMISSION
NUMBER
1. The chassis number is stamped on
the fire wall. ENGINE NUMBER
2. The Engine Number is stamped CHASSIS NUMBER/

into the engine block. It is on the ENGINE NUMBER/
front. VEHICLE
IDENTIFICATION
MANUAL NUMBER (VIN)/
3. The Transmission Number is on a TRANSMISSION BUILT DATE PLATE
label on top of the transmission. NUMBER (Australian model only)
Do not mistake the transmission

number for the engine number. Diesel models
On Australian model
A BUILT DATE information
ENGINE NUMBER
appears on the plate on the left
damper housing in the engine
compartment.
BUILT DATE is the calendar month
and the year in which the body shell CHASSIS NUMBER/
and power train sub-assemblies are MANUAL ENGINE NUMBER/
TRANSMISSION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
conjoined and the car is driven or NUMBER NUMBER (VIN)
moved from the production line.
544 Technical Information

05/10/03 20:36:36 32SEA630_548
Identification Numbers
On some types, the chassis number/

chassis and engine numbers also VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
appear on the plate attached to the
left damper housing in the engine
compartment.
On some other types, a certification

plate is attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
The Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) appears on a plate attached to
the left damper housing in the
engine compartment, and on a plate
fastened to the top of the dashboard
on some types.
On Australian model, the built date

plate is attached to the left damper
housing. CERTIFICATION PLATE
CHASSIS NUMBER/VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

05/10/03 20:36:51 32SEA630_549
Specifications
Dimensions The mounting point/rear over

Length 4,665 mm (183.7 in) hang of coupling device No. Dimensions
4,675 mm (184.1 in) ＊ (1) (1) 877 mm (34.5 in)
Width 1,760 mm (69.3 in) (2) (2) 876 mm (34.5 in)
(3)
Height 1,445 mm (56.9 in) (4) (3) 870 mm (34.3 in)
Wheelbase 2,680 mm (105.5 in) (5) (4) 836 mm (32.9 in)
(6)
2,670 mm (105.1 in) ＊ (5) 786 mm (30.9 in)
Track Front 1,515 mm (59.6 in) (6) 495 mm (19.5 in)
Rear 1,525 mm (60.0 in) (7) 957 mm (37.7 in)
1,515 mm (59.6 in) ＊ (8) 899 mm (35.4 in)
(9) 852 mm (33.5 in)
＊ : Australian model (14) (10) 841 mm (33.1 in)
(12)(11)(10)(9)(8)(7)
(11) 724 mm (28.5 in)
(12) 692 mm (27.2 in)
(13) 1,124 mm (44.3 in)
(14) 900 mm (35.4 in)
(13)
NOTE:
1. marks show towbar fixing points.
2. mark shows towbar coupling point.

05/10/03 20:37:03 32SEA630_550
Specifications
Weights Weights
Curb weight Max. towing weight
5-speed manual (EU)＊2 Trailer with 1,500 kg (3,307 lbs)
transmission 1,351−1,444 kg (2,978−3,183 lbs) brakes
6-speed manual 1,398−1,469 kg (3,082−3,239 lbs) Trailer without 500 kg (1,102 lbs)
transmission 1,405−1,475 kg (3,097−3,252 lbs)＊1 brakes
1,477−1,554 kg (3,256−3,426 lbs)＊2 Max. towing weight
Automatic transmission 1,363−1,511 kg (3,005−3,331 lbs) (ADR)＊1 Trailer with 1,200 kg (2,646 lbs)
1,440−1,520 kg (3,175−3,351 lbs)＊1 brakes
Max. permissible weight See the plate attached to the left Trailer without 500 kg (1,102 lbs)
(EU, KB) damper housing in the engine brakes
Max. permissible axle weight compartment or ask dealer for The maximum permissible 75 kg (165 lbs)
(EU, KB) information. vertical load on the coupling 60 kg (132 lbs)＊1
Max. permissible weight＊1 1,960 kg (4,321 lbs) device
Max. permissible weight＊2 1,970 kg (4,343 lbs)
Max. loaded vehicle weight Ask dealer for information. ＊1 : Australian model
(ADR)＊1 ＊2 : The following is for Germany only.
The maximum trailer weight is valid for 12 % slope. For an
＊1 : Australian model increasing of the trailer weight you have to look in your car paper
＊2 : Diesel models or ask your next dealer.
CONTINUED

05/10/03 20:37:13 32SEA630_551
Specifications
Engine (Petrol models) Engine (Diesel models)

Type 2.0 engine＊1 Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC Type Water cooled 4-stroke
i-VTEC in line, 4-cylinder gasoline DOHC in line,
engine 4-cylinder diesel turbo intercooler
2.4 engine＊2 Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC engine
i-VTEC in line, 4-cylinder gasoline Bore x Stroke 85.0 x 97.1 mm (3.35 x 3.82 in)
engine Displacement 2,204 cm (134 cu-in)
Bore x Stroke 2.0 engine 86.0 x 86.0 mm (3.39 x 3.39 in) Compression ratio 16.7 : 1
2.4 engine 87.0 x 99.0 mm (3.43 x 3.90 in)
Displacement 2.0 engine 1,998 cm (122 cu-in)
2.4 engine 2,354 cm (144 cu-in)
Compression
ratio 2.0 engine 9.6 : 1
2.4 engine 10.5 : 1
Spark plug See spark plug maintenance sec-
tion page 455 .
＊1 : For engine type: K20A6

＊2 : For engine type: K24A3
For the engine type, refer to page 544 .

05/10/03 20:37:25 32SEA630_552
Specifications
Capacities ＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
Fuel tank Approx. engine.
65 (17.2 US gal , 14.3 Imp gal) Reserve tank capacity:
Engine coolant (Petrol models) 0.6 (0.16 US gal , 0.13 Imp gal)
5-speed M/T ＊2 : 2.0 engine models
Change＊1 4.5 (1.19 US gal , 0.99 Imp gal) ＊3 : 2.4 engine models
Total 6.6 (1.74 US gal , 1.45 Imp gal) ＊4 : Diesel models
6-speed M/T ＊5 : Including the coolant in the heater and the expansion tank and that
Change＊1 5.4 (1.43 US gal , 1.19 Imp gal) remaining in the engine.
6.8 (1.80 US gal , 1.50 Imp gal) ＊4 Expansion tank capacity: 0.9 (0.24 US gal , 0.20 Imp gal)
Total 7.4 (1.96 US gal , 1.63 Imp gal) Heater capacity: 0.7 (0.18 US gal , 0.15 Imp gal)
8.0 (2.11 US gal , 1.76 Imp gal) ＊4 ＊6 : Without removing the drain bolt on the engine
A/T 4.4 (1.16 US gal , 0.97 Imp gal) ＊2 ＊7 : With removing the drain bolt on the engine
Change＊1 5.3 (1.40 US gal , 1.17 Imp gal) ＊3
Total 6.5 (1.72 US gal , 1.43 Imp gal) ＊2
7.3 (1.93 US gal , 1.61 Imp gal) ＊3
Engine coolant (Diesel models)
6-speed M/T 6.3 (1.66 US gal , 1.39 Imp gal) ＊6
Change＊5 6.8 (1.80 US gal , 1.50 Imp gal) ＊7
Total 8.0 (2.11 US gal , 1.76 Imp gal)
CONTINUED

05/10/05 15:04:41 32SEA630_553
Specifications
Capacities Tyres
Engine oil Change＊1 Size/Pressure See tyre information label on
Including 4.2 (4.4 US qt , 3.7 Imp qt) ＊4 driver’s doorjamb or ask dealer
filter 5.9 (6.2 US qt , 5.2 Imp qt) ＊5 for information.
Without 4.0 (4.2 US qt , 3.5 Imp qt) ＊4
filter 5.5 (5.8 US qt , 4.8 Imp qt) ＊5 Alignment
Total 5.3 (5.6 US qt , 4.7 Imp qt) ＊4 Toe-in Front 0.0 mm (0.00 in)
6.5 (6.9 US qt , 5.7 Imp qt) ＊5 Rear in 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
5-speed manual Camber Front 0°
transmission Change 1.9 (2.0 US qt , 1.7 Imp qt) ＊4 Rear −1°
fluid Total 2.1 (2.2 US qt , 1.8 Imp qt) ＊4 Caster Front 3°15’
6-speed manual 1.9 (2.0 US qt , 1.7 Imp qt)
transmission Change 2.2 (2.3 US qt , 1.9 Imp qt) ＊5 Suspension
fluid Total 2.1 (2.2 US qt , 1.8 Imp qt) Type Front Double wishbone
2.5 (2.6 US qt , 2.2 Imp qt) ＊5 Rear 5-link double wishbone
Automatic Change 2.8 (3.0 US qt , 2.5 Imp qt)
transmission Total 6.5 (6.9 US qt , 5.7 Imp qt) Steering
fluid Type Rack and pinion, with electrical
Windscreen washer reservoir 2.5 (2.6 US qt , 2.2 Imp qt) ＊2 power assistance/hydraulic power
4.5 (4.8 US qt , 4.0 Imp qt) assistance
5.8 (6.1 US qt , 5.1 Imp qt) ＊3
Clutch
＊1 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine. Type Dry, single plate, diaphragm
＊2 : Type-S in right-hand drive model spring
＊3 : With headlight washer
＊4 : Petrol models Brake
＊5 : Diesel models Type Power assisted
Front Ventilated disc
Rear Solid disc
Parking Mechanical

05/10/03 20:38:08 32SEA630_554
Specifications
Battery (Petrol models) Lights

Capacity 12 V − 36 AH/5 HR Headlights＊1 High 12 V − 55 W (H1)
12 V − 45 AH/20 HR Low 12 V − 55 W (H1)
12 V − 35 W ＊1
Battery (Diesel models) Front turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W
Capacity 12 V − 59 AH/5 HR Front position lights 12 V − 5 W
12 V − 74 AH/20 HR Side turn signal lights See note below.
Rear turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W
Fuses (Petrol models) Stop/taillights 12 V − 21/5 W
Interior See page 537 or the fuse label Back-up lights 12 V − 21 W
attached to the inside of the fuse Taillights 12 V − 5 W
box lid. Rear fog light＊2 12 V − 21 W
Under-bonnet See pages 533−536 or the fuse Licence plate lights 12 V − 5 W
box cover. High-mount brake light 12 V − 21 W
Spotlights＊2 12 V − 8 W
Fuses (Diesel models) Ceiling light 12 V − 8 W
Interior See page 540 or the fuse label Boot light 12 V − 5 W
attached to the inside of the fuse Front fog lights 12 V − 55 W
box lid. Front door courtesy lights 12 V − 2 CP
Under-bonnet See pages 538 and 539 or the fuse Vanity mirror light 12 V − 2 W
box cover.
＊1 : On cars with optional high voltage discharge type low beam
headlights, replacement of a low beam headlight bulb should be
performed by a dealer.
＊2 : For some types
NOTE:
Replacement of the side turn signal bulbs built in the outside mirrors
should be done by your dealer.

05/10/03 20:38:16 32SEA630_555
Emissions Controls (Petrol models)
On some models Crankcase Emissions Control Exhaust Emissions Controls

The burning of petrol in your car’s System The exhaust emissions controls
engine produces several byproducts. Your car has a Positive Crankcase include four systems: PGM-FI,
Some of these are carbon monoxide Ventilation System. This keeps Ignition Timing Control, Exhaust
(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and gasses that build up in the engine’s Gas Recirculation and Three Way
hydrocarbons (HC). Petrol crankcase from going into the Catalytic Converter. These four
evaporating from the tank also atmosphere. The Positive Crankcase systems work together to control the
produces hydrocarbons. Controlling Ventilation valve routes them from engine’s combustion and minimize
the production of NOx, CO, and HC the crankcase back to the intake the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
is important to the environment. manifold. They are then drawn into comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust
Under certain conditions of sunlight the engine and burned. emissions control systems are
and climate, NOx and HC react to separate from the crankcase and
form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon Evaporative Emissions Control evaporative emissions control
monoxide does not contribute to System systems.
smog creation, but it is a poisonous As petrol evaporates in the fuel tank,
gas. an evaporative emissions control
canister filled with charcoal absorbs
the vapour. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapour is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.

05/10/03 20:38:23 32SEA630_556
Emissions Controls (Petrol models)
PGM-FI System Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Three Way Catalytic Converter
The PGM-FI System uses sequential System The three way catalytic converter is
multiport fuel injection. The Exhaust Gas Recirculation in the exhaust system. Through
It has three subsystems: Air Intake, (EGR) system takes some of the chemical reactions, it converts HC,
Engine Control, and Fuel Control. exhaust gas and routes it back into CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
The Engine Control Module (ECM)/ the intake manifold. Adding exhaust to carbon dioxide (CO2), dinitrogen
Powertrain Control Module (PCM- gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces (N2), and water vapour.
A/T only) uses various sensors to the amount of NOx produced when
determine how much air is going the fuel is burned.
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all
operating conditions.
Ignition Timing Control System

This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.

05/10/03 20:38:30 32SEA630_557
Catalytic Converter (Petrol models)
The three way catalytic converter Always use unleaded petrol. Even
contains precious metals that serve a small amount of leaded petrol
as catalysts, promoting chemical can contaminate the catalyst
reactions to convert the exhaust metals, making the three way
gasses without affecting the metals. catalytic converter ineffective.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts Keep the engine tuned-up.
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part Have your car diagnosed and
or its equivalent. repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER running properly.
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic
place. It can set on fire any com- converter contributes to air pollution,
bustible materials that come near it. and can impair your engine’s per-
Park your car away from high grass, formance. Follow these guidelines to
dry leaves, or other flammables. protect your car’s three way catalytic
converter.

05/10/03 20:38:35 32SEA630_558
Catalytic Converter (Diesel models)
CATALYTIC CONVERTER CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The catalytic converter contains Always use only diesel fuel

precious metals that serve as recommended in this owner’s
catalysts, promoting chemical manual (see page 352 ).
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is equipped
with your car to reduce HC, CO,
NOx and PM. A replacement unit
must be an original Honda part or its
equivalent.

05/10/03 20:38:37 32SEA630_559
556

05/10/03 20:38:41 32SEA630_560
Index
A Ashtrays .......................................... 171 Bonnet Latch .................................. 451

Audio Remote Controls................. 297 Bonnet, Opening the ..................... 354
Accessories and Modifications .... 361 Audio System ................................. 195 Boot ................................................. 141
Accessories................................. 361 Automatic Lighting........................ 120 Hooks .......................................... 366
Additional Safety Precautions .. 363 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 63 Main Switch ................................ 143
Modifications ............................. 362 Automatic Transmission............... 378 Opening the ................................ 141
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Capacity, Fluid ........................... 550 Open Monitor Light .................... 89
Position) ...................................... 132 Checking Fluid Level ................ 441 Brakes
Accessory Power Socket .............. 170 Sequential SportShift Mode ..... 381 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 388
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ... 305 Shifting ........................................ 379 Break-in, New Linings .............. 351
Additives, Engine Oil ............ 419, 424 Shift Lever Position Bulb Replacement ............. 480, 483
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 12, 66 Indicator .................................. 378 Fluid ............................................ 447
Air Cleaner Element ...................... 450 Shift Lever Positions ................. 379 Parking ........................................ 164
Air Conditioning System ............... 176 Shift Lock Release ..................... 385 System Indicator .................. 85, 526
Maintenance ............................... 461 Wear Indicators ......................... 387
Usage .................................. 178, 185 B Braking System.............................. 387
Air Outlets(Vents) ......................... 176 Break-in, New Car ......................... 351
Air Pressure, Tyres ....................... 465 Battery Brightness Control,
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning........ 497 Charging System Instruments ................................ 122
Antifreeze ............................... 427, 433 Indicator............................ 83, 522 Brights, Headlights ....................... 116
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Jump Starting ............................. 514 Built Date Plate .............................. 544
Indicator ................................ 85, 390 Maintenance ............................... 456
Operation .................................... 388 Specifications ............................. 551
Anti-theft Steering Column Before Driving ............................... 349
Lock ............................................. 132 Belts, Seat ................................... 10, 61
Appearance Care ........................... 495 Beverage Holders .......................... 166 CONTINUED
557

05/10/03 20:38:45 32SEA630_561
Index
Bulb Replacement CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii Interior ........................................ 499

Back-up Lights ........................... 481 CD Changer ........... 213, 237, 258, 282 Leather ........................................ 500
Boot Light ................................... 490 CD Player ............................... 211, 234 Seat Belts .................................... 501
Brake Lights............................... 480 Ceiling Light ................................... 172 Vinyl ............................................ 500
Front Fog Lights........................ 484 Centre Pocket ................................ 167 Windows ..................................... 500
Front Position Lights ................ 479 Certification Plate .......................... 545 Climate Control System ................ 176
Headlights .................................. 475 Chains ............................................. 471 Clock, Setting the .. 210, 232, 256, 281
High-mount Brake Light .......... 483 Changing a Flat Tyre .................... 505 Clutch Fluid .................................... 448
Interior Lights ............................ 488 Changing Engine Coolant..... 429, 435 Coat Hook ....................................... 168
Licence Plate Lights .................. 486 Changing Oil Coin Box ......................................... 167
Rear Fog Light ........................... 481 How to ................................. 420, 424 Cold Weather, Starting in ..... 370, 371
Rear Lights ......................... 480, 481 When to .............................. 406, 410 Compact Spare Tyre...................... 504
Side Turn Signal Lights ............ 482 Charging System Indicator .... 83, 522 Console Compartment .................. 165
Specifications ............................. 551 Chassis Number ............................ 544 Controls, Instruments and .............. 76
Turn Signal Lights ..................... 478 Checklist, Before Driving ............. 368 Coolant
Bulbs, Halogen ....................... 475, 484 Child Restraint Systems ................. 31 Adding................................. 427, 433
Lower Anchorages ...................... 57 Checking ..................................... 358
C Tether Anchor Points ................. 55 Proper Solution .................. 427, 433
Child Restraint Systems for EU ..... 37 Replacing ............................ 429, 435
Capacities Chart............................. 549 Child Safety ...................................... 24 Temperature Gauge .................... 92
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 74 Childproof Door Locks ................. 141 Corrosion Protection ..................... 502
Carrying Luggage .......................... 364 Cigarette Lighter ........................... 170 Courtesy Lights ............................. 174
Cassette Player Cleaner Element, Air ..................... 450 Cruise Control ................................ 302
Care ............................................. 296 Cleaning
Operation............ 217, 241, 266, 292 Aluminum Wheels ..................... 497
Catalytic Converter ............... 554, 555 Exterior ....................................... 496
558

05/10/03 20:38:50 32SEA630_562
Index
D Super Locking ............................ 136 Malfunction Indicator

Downshifting, Manual Lamp ............................... 523, 524
DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii Transmission...................... 372, 374 Manually Closing Sunroof ........ 528
Dashboard .................................... 2, 78 Draining Water (Diesel Overheated Engine ........... 517, 519
Daytime Running Lights............... 118 models) ....................................... 452 Emergency Brake .......................... 164
Defog and Defrost ................. 183, 191 Drive Belt ........................................ 464 Emergency Flashers ..................... 128
Demister, Rear Window ............... 127 Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 7 Emergency Towing ....................... 541
Diesel Engine ................................. 548 Driving ............................................ 367 Emissions Controls........................ 552
Diesel Fuel ...................................... 352 Economy ..................................... 360 Engine
Filling the Fuel Tank ................. 352 In Bad Weather .......................... 394 Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 92
Filter ............................................ 452 Dual Temperature Control ... 184, 192 Drive Belt.................................... 464
Fuel Economy ............................ 360 Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 462 Glow Plugs Indicator ........... 87, 525
Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 88 Malfunction Indicator
Gauge ............................................ 92 E Lamp ......................... 83, 523, 524
Dimensions ..................................... 546 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 83, 521
Dimming the Headlights .............. 116 Economy, Fuel ............................... 360 Oil, What Kind to Use ....... 418, 423
Dipstick Electric Power Steering (EPS) Overheating........................ 517, 519
Automatic Transmission........... 441 Indicator ........................................ 84 Specifications ............................. 548
Engine Oil ................................... 355 Emergencies on the Road............. 502 Starting ............................... 369, 371
Directional Signals......................... 122 Battery, Jump Starting .............. 514 Engine Coolant....................... 427, 433
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 387 Brake System Indicator ............ 526 Engine Number.............................. 544
Disposal of Used Oil .............. 422, 426 Changing a Flat Tyre ................ 505 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 74
Doors Charging System Indicator ...... 522 Expansion Tank ..................... 358, 433
Locking and Unlocking ............. 134 Checking the Fuses................... 530
Monitor Light ............................... 89 Glow Plugs Indicator ................. 525
Power Door Locks ..................... 134 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 521 CONTINUED
559

05/10/03 20:38:54 32SEA630_563
Index
F Four-way Flashers ......................... 128 6-speed Manual

Front Airbags ............................. 12, 66 Transmission.......................... 374
Fabric, Cleaning ............................. 500 Front Fog Lamps ........................... 119 Glass Cleaning ............................... 500
Fan, Interior ........................... 180, 190 Fuel.......................................... 351, 352 Glove Box ....................................... 144
Features, Comfort and Cutoff System ............................ 359 Glow Plugs Indicator ............... 87, 525
Convenience ............................... 175 Diesel Fuel.................................. 352
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 352 Fill Door and Cap....................... 353 H
Filters Filter ............................................ 452
Air Cleaner ................................. 450 Gauge ............................................ 92 Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 475
Dust and Pollen .......................... 462 Octane Requirement (Petrol) .. 351 Hands-Free Telephone System.... 331
Fuel .............................................. 452 Petrol ........................................... 351 Hazard Warning Flashers............. 128
Oil ........................................ 420, 424 Reserve Indicator......................... 88 Headlights
5-speed Manual Transmission Tank, Filling the......................... 352 Adjuster ...................................... 154
Checking Fluid Level ................ 443 Fuses, Checking the ...................... 530 Aiming ......................................... 475
Shifting the ................................. 372 Daytime Running Lights .......... 118
Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 128 G High Beam Indicator ................... 89
Flat Tyre, Changing a ................... 505 Lights On Indicator ..................... 86
Floor Mats ...................................... 499 Gauges Reminder Chime........................ 116
Fluids Engine Coolant Temperature .... 92 Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 475
Automatic Transmission........... 441 Fuel ................................................ 92 Turning on .................................. 116
Brake ........................................... 447 Speedometer ................................ 91 Washer ........................................ 128
Clutch .......................................... 448 Tachometer .................................. 91 Head Restraints ............................. 149
Manual Transmission ....... 443, 444 Gearshift Lever Positions Heating and Air Conditioning
Power Steering........................... 449 Automatic Transmission........... 379 System..................................... 176
Windscreen Washers ................ 440 5-speed Manual High Altitude, Starting at .............. 370
Folding Rear Seat .......................... 150 Transmission.......................... 372 High-Low Beam Switch ................ 116
560

05/10/03 20:39:01 32SEA630_564
Index
High-mount Brake Light............... 483 J Locks

Horn ............................................ 3, 114 Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 133
Hot Gas Heater System ................ 193 Jacking up the Car ......................... 505 Boot ............................................. 141
Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 448 Jack, Tyre ....................................... 506 Fuel Fill Door ............................. 352
Jump Starting ................................. 514 Glove Box ................................... 144
I Power Door ................................ 134
K Super Locking ............................ 136
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 544 Low Coolant Level ......................... 358
Ignition Keys ................................................. 130 Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 88
Keys............................................. 130 Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 83, 521
Switch .......................................... 132 L Lower Anchorages .......................... 57
Immobilizer System....................... 131 Lower Gear, Downshifting
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 Label, Certification ........................ 545 to a ....................................... 372, 374
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 80 Lane Change, Signaling ................ 122 Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 550
Infant Restraint ................................ 24 Lane Keeping Assist System Luggage .......................................... 364
Infant Seats ....................................... 38 (LKAS) ........................................ 322
Lower Anchorages ...................... 57 Leather, Cleaning .......................... 500 M
Tether Anchor Points ................. 55 Lights
Inflation, Proper Tyre ................... 465 Bulb Replacement ..................... 475 Maintenance ................................... 405
Inside Mirror .................................. 161 Indicator ........................................ 80 Owner Maintenance Checks.... 414
Inspection, Tyre ............................. 466 Position ....................................... 116 Record ......................................... 413
Instrument Panel ............................. 80 Turn Signal ................................. 122 Schedule .............................. 406-412
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 122 Load Limit ...................................... 365
Interior Cleaning ............................ 499 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 133
Interior Lights ................................ 172 Lockout Prevention ....................... 135
Introduction ......................................... i CONTINUED
561

05/10/03 20:39:06 32SEA630_565
Index
Malfunction Indicator Change, When to ............... 407, 410 Octane Requirement ................. 351
Lamp ............................. 83, 523, 524 Checking Engine ....................... 355 Polishing and Waxing ........... 496, 497
Manual Transmission ........... 372, 374 Pressure Indicator ............... 83, 521 Power Mirror Heaters ................... 163
Manual Transmission Selecting Proper Viscosity Power Steering Fluid..................... 449
Fluid .................................... 443, 444 Chart ............................... 419, 424 Priming the Fuel System .............. 492
Maximum Allowable Shift ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 133 Proper Seat Belt Usage ................... 19
Speeds ......................... 373, 375, 384 Outside Mirrors ............................. 162 Protecting Adults ............................. 15
Meters, Gauges.......................... 80, 91 Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 95 Additional Safety Precautions .... 23
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 162 Overheating, Engine ............. 517, 519 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 22
Multi-Information Display .............. 93 Owner Maintenance Checks ........ 414 Protecting Children ......................... 24
Protecting Infants ........................ 38
N P Protecting Larger Children ........ 50
Protecting Small Children .......... 45
Neutral Gear Position.................... 381 Paint Touch-up ............................... 498 Using Child Seats with
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 351 Panel Brightness Control ............. 122 Tethers...................................... 55
Normal Shift Speeds ............. 373, 375 Park Gear Position......................... 380 Using Lower Anchorages ........... 57
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i Parking ............................................ 386
Numbers, Identification ................ 544 Parking Brake ................................ 164 R
Parking Brake and Brake System
O Indicator ................................ 85, 526 Radiator Overheating............ 517, 519
Petrol ............................................... 351 Radio/CD Sound System .............. 195
Octane Requirement, Filling the Fuel Tank ................. 352 Rear Fog Lamp .............................. 118
Petrol ........................................... 351 Filter ............................................ 452 Rear Lights, Bulb
Odometer .......................................... 93 Fuel Economy ............................ 360 Replacement ....................... 480, 481
Oil Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 88 Rear Seat Armrest ......................... 152
Change, How to ................. 420, 424 Gauge ............................................ 91 Rear Seat, Folding ......................... 150
562

05/10/03 20:39:11 32SEA630_566
Index
Rear View Mirror........................... 161 S Sequential SportShift Mode ......... 381

Rear Window Demister ................ 127 Service Intervals ............................ 406
Reclining the Seat Backs ...... 145, 147 Safety Belts................................. 10, 61 Service Station Procedures .......... 352
Recommended Shift Safety Features .................................. 9 Setting the Clock ... 210, 232, 256, 281
Speeds ................................. 373, 375 Airbags .......................................... 12 Shift Lever Position
Remote Transmitter ...................... 137 Head Restraints ........................... 14 Indicator ...................................... 378
Replacement Information Seat Belts ...................................... 10 Shift Lock Release ......................... 385
Air Cleaner Element .................. 450 Seats & Seat-Backs ...................... 13 Side Airbags ............................... 12, 68
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 462 Safety Labels, Location of .............. 75 Indicator .................................. 71, 84
Engine Coolant .................. 429, 435 Safety Messages ................................ ii Risks to Children ......................... 29
Engine Oil and Filter ......... 420, 424 Seat Belts .................................... 10, 61 Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 69
Fuel Filter ................................... 452 Additional Information ................ 61 Signaling Turns .............................. 122
Fuses ........................................... 530 Automatic Seat Belt 6-speed Manual Transmission
Light Bulbs ................................. 475 Tensioners ................................ 63 Checking Fluid Level ................ 444
Schedule ..................................... 406 Child Seat Anchor Fitting ........... 55 Reverse Lockout ........................ 377
Spark Plugs................................. 453 Cleaning ...................................... 501 Shifting ........................................ 374
Tyres ........................................... 469 Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 19, 61 Snow Tyres ..................................... 471
Wiper Blades .............................. 459 Maintenance ................................. 64 Solvent-type Cleaners .................... 496
Replacing Seat Belts After a Reminder Indicator ............... 61, 83 Sound System ................................. 195
Crash ............................................. 64 System Components.................... 61 Spare Tyre ...................................... 506
Reserve Tank, Engine Use During Pregnancy................ 22 Compact ...................................... 504
Coolant ................................ 358, 427 Wearing a Seat Belt ..................... 19 Spark Plugs, Replacing ................. 453
Restraint, Child ................................ 24 Seat Heaters ................................... 153 Specifications Charts..................... 546
Reverse Gear Position................... 380 Seats, Adjusting the....................... 145 Speedometer .................................... 91
Reverse Lockout ............................ 377 Security System ............................. 299
Rotation, Tyre ................................ 468 Select/Reset knob ........................... 91 CONTINUED
563

05/10/03 20:39:15 32SEA630_567
Index
Spotlights ........................................ 173 Supplemental Restraint Transmission

SRS, Additional Information........... 66 System................................. 12, 66 Checking Fluid Level,
Additional Safety Precautions .... 72 Airbags .................................... 12, 66 Automatic ............................... 441
How the SRS Indicator Servicing ....................................... 72 Checking Fluid Level,
Works ........................................ 70 SRS Indicator.......................... 70, 83 Manual ............................ 443, 444
How Your Airbags Work ............ 66 System Components.................... 66 Fluid Selection ........... 442, 443, 444
SRS Components ......................... 66 Synthetic Oil ................................... 423 Identification Number ............... 544
SRS Service................................... 72 Shifting the Automatic .............. 379
SRS Indicator.............................. 70, 83 T Shifting the Manual........... 372, 374
START (Ignition Key Position) ... 133 Treadwear ...................................... 467
Starting the Engine ............... 369, 371 Tachometer ...................................... 91 Trip Meter ........................................ 94
In Cold Weather at High Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 503 Turn Signals ................................... 122
Altitude ................................... 370 Technical Descriptions Tyre, How to Change a Flat ......... 505
With a Dead Battery ................. 514 Emissions Control Systems ...... 552 Tyres ............................................... 465
Steam Coming from Catalytic Converter ........... 554, 555 Air Pressure ............................... 465
Engine ................................. 517, 519 Temperature Gauge ........................ 92 Chains ......................................... 471
Steering Wheel Tether Anchor Points...................... 55 Checking Wear .......................... 467
Adjustment ................................. 129 Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 554 Compact Spare ........................... 504
Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 133 Time, Setting the ... 210, 232, 256, 281 Inflation ....................................... 465
Stereo Sound System .................... 195 Tools, Tyre Changing ................... 506 Inspection ................................... 466
Storing Your Car ............................ 491 Towing Maintenance ............................... 467
Sunroof ............................................ 159 a Trailer ...................................... 396 Replacing .................................... 469
Closing Manually ....................... 528 Emergency Wrecker ................. 541 Rotating....................................... 468
Operation .................................... 159 Trailer Hitch Mounting Points..... 546 Snow ............................................ 471
Super Locking ................................ 136 Specifications ............................. 550
Wear ............................................ 467
564

05/10/03 20:39:19 32SEA630_568
Index
U W Wiper Blades
Changing..................................... 459
Ultrasonic Sensor .......................... 301 WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii Operation .................................... 123
Underside, Cleaning ...................... 502 Warning Labels, Location of .......... 75 Worn Tyres .................................... 466
Unexpected, Taking Care Washer, Windscreen Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 541
of the ........................................... 503 Checking the Fluid Level ......... 440
Upholstery Cleaning...................... 499 Operation .................................... 127
Used Oil, How to Washing .......................................... 496
Dispose of ........................... 422, 426 Waxing and Polishing ................... 497
Wheels
V Adjusting the Steering .............. 129
Alignment and Balance ............. 467
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 365 Cleaning Aluminum Alloys ....... 497
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 546 Compact Spare ........................... 504
Vehicle Identification Number..... 544 Wrench ....................................... 508
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) Windows
System..................................... 391 Auto Reverse .............................. 156
Activation Indicator ..................... 86 Cleaning ...................................... 500
System Indicator .......................... 86 Operating the Power ................. 155
On/Off Switch ........................... 392 Rear, Demister ........................... 127
Ventilation ...................................... 176 Windscreen
VIN .................................................. 544 Cleaning ...................................... 123
Vinyl Cleaning ................................ 500 Defroster ............................ 183, 191
Viscosity, Oil .......................... 420, 424 Washers ...................................... 127
Winter Tyres .................................. 471
565

05/10/03 20:39:21 32SEA630_569
566

2006 Accord

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2006 Accord

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

05/10/03 19:27:04 32SEA630_001

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A Few Words About Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Comfort and Convenience Appearance Care ................. 495

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Car at a Glance

Left-hand drive type

FUEL FILL DOOR HANDLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Car at a Glance

Left-hand drive type

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Car at a Glance

Right-hand drive type

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON INSTRUMENT PANEL MIRROR CONTROLS

FUEL FILL DOOR HANDLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Car at a Glance

Right-hand drive type HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Important Safety Precautions

8 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Car’s Safety Features

Your car is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety 9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Car’s Safety Features

Why Wear Seat Belts

Be sure you and your

10 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Car’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Car’s Safety Features

12 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Car’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Car’s Safety Features

Front seat occupants are sitting

Seat-backs are upright (see page

14 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Introduction Your car has a door monitor

Your car has a door

Driver and Passenger Safety 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats

Locking the doors also helps prevent

See page 134 for how to lock the

16 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To reduce the chance of injury, wear 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

See page 145 for how to adjust the

Driver and Passenger Safety 17